Seismic Retrofit Design and Construction Guidelines

Seismic Retrofit Design and
Construction Guidelines
for Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings and
Steel Encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings
Using Continuous Fiber Reinforced Materials
Published by the Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association

Edited by the Building Guidance Division, Housing Bureau, Ministry of Construction
Editorial Supervisors Message

Seismic retrofitting techniques using continuous fiber reinforced materials is (receiving
attention as) one of the most effective techniques for accelerating the retrofitting of buildings
due to its high strengthening effectiveness and excellent workability. (Particularly in recent
years, a construction method that makes buildings available for use even during retrofitting
work has been widely anticipated, which accounts in large part for the attention this technique
is receiving as it contains the possibility of meeting such a requirement.) However, this
technique has the characteristics of using materials that have not been widely employed
before in the construction industry and also of not offering high performance of the
continuous fiber reinforced materials until the continuous fiber sheet is impregnated with
impregnate adhesive resins at the work site. Consequently, conventional seismic retrofit
design and construction methods can not be used for the continuous fiber reinforcement-based
technique. Thus, this document is intended to complement the seismic diagnostic standards
and seismic retrofit design guidelines for existing reinforced concrete buildings and steel
encased reinforced concrete buildings. It is essential to properly understand these guidelines
to implement adequate seismic retrofitting strategies them to correctly applied them in the
field.
The Great Hanshin and Awaji Earthquake, which occurred early in the morning of January 17,
1995, attacked highly populated areas and caused the greatest disaster of the postwar period,
6,400-odd fatalities, 43,000-odd injures and a total number of earthquake-damaged houses of
about 440,000. As a result, the Ministry of Construction created the Survey Committee for
Damaged Buildings composed of academic and professional entities investigated the
conditions of earthquake results and reviewed the causes of damage and corrective measures
to be taken in the future. As a result, this committee concluded and reported that it is
urgently necessary to carry out seismic retrofit and reconstruction of existing buildings and
other countermeasures. In light of this situation, the Law for Promoting Seismic Retrofit of
Buildings was promulgated on October 27, 1995 and has been in effect since December 25
of the same year. In addition, based on this law, it is stipulated that seismic diagnostic and
seismic retrofit design guidelines be notified and the basic concepts, judgment criterion and
precautions etc. of seismic diagnostics and seismic retrofit be defined. This document
contains recommendations on seismic retrofitting design and construction methods using
continuous fiber reinforced materials in reinforced concrete buildings and steel encased
reinforced concrete buildings, and should be very useful for preparing proper seismic repair
strategies.
The present document includes the latest research results and reports based on many wide
ranging studies and investigation concerning this field. The efforts of all those who were
engaged in these activities are highly recognized. Also, we express our deep gratitude to the
committee members for helping in the production of this document.
It is expected that this document will be widely utilized, and that seismic retrofitting using
fiber reinforced materials in addition to more traditional seismic retrofitting techniques will
provide and adequate retrofit of buildings.
September, 1999
Jin Matsuno
Director
Building Guidance Division
Housing Bureau
Ministry of Construction
Introduction
The development of the FRP technology, which uses materials mainly constituted of carbon
fibers or aramid fibers was initiated in the 1980s. The original uses were mainly as bars or
rods being an alternative for internal reinforcement due to their high durability. Also, the
FRP materials were broadly used as tendons for prestressed concrete, for increasing the
durability of concrete structures, thereby improving their endurance under extreme conditions.
In the early 1990s, design recommendation using continuous fiber reinforced materials were
being proposed in international meetings held on the basis of many research results and the
prospect that bar type continuous fiber reinforced materials would become commercially
practical was established, the development aim started to shift to the application of technology
to continuous fiber sheets instead of bar-typed reinforcements. The purpose is to strengthen
and repair existing buildings by attaching continuous fiber sheets with impregnate bond resins
such as epoxy resins on the surface of reinforced concrete or steel encased reinforced concrete
members. This was the starting point for the development and commercialization of a new
seismic retrofit method for existing buildings. In 1994, the FRP-Hybrid Committee
(1994-1997) was formed by the Building Research Institute with the theme of Research on
Hybrid Structures Using Continuous Fiber Reinforced Materials. The activities led by this
committee provided an opportunity to systematize research on continuous fiber reinforced
materials. This committee focused on establishing the application of continuous fiber sheets
as an effective technique for the strengthening and repair of existing reinforced concrete
buildings.
In the midst of this technological movement, the Hyogoken-Nanbu Earthquake (Kobe
Earthquake) occurred on January 17, 1995 damaging many existing buildings. As a result,
the social needs for seismic evaluation and seismic strengthening techniques increased, and
leading to the increase of seismic retrofitting using carbon fiber or aramid fiber.
Experimental programs were conducted by many institutions to evaluate the performance of
strengthened structural element. As their results were generated, the design and construction
guidelines for using continuous fiber reinforced materials as seismic reinforcements were
developed by each organization and certified by either the Japan Building Disaster Prevention
Association or the Japan Building Center, which allowed the development phase of the
practical technologies to be continued. As a result of the earthquake, the following three
organizations were established; the cooperative research Development of Technology for
Improving Structural Earthquake Resistance under the Ministry of Constructions
(comprehensive) research and development project (1996-1998), the related Review
Committee for Continuous Fiber Sheet Construction Methods (1996-1998) and the Review
Committee for Seismic Retrofit of Housing and Urban Development Corp. And a seismic
reinforcement structure and construction method based on continuous fiber reinforced

materials was examined and its research results reported.
At this stage, a committee to develop these and to prepare the Seismic Retrofit Design and
Construction Guidelines for Existing Reinforced Concrete Construction and Steel Encased
Reinforced Concrete Buildings Using Continuous Fiber Reinforced Materials was
established. These guidelines were based on each previous committees report and the
accumulated research results. The committee, which is composed of relevant members of
the previous committees involved in research activities, decided to prepare the guidelines
available in the current phase.
Chiefly, the guidelines, show a design method for seismic repair using continuous fiber
reinforced materials wrapped around existing independent columns and attached to a concrete
surface with impregnate adhesive resins. For other members, it summarizes basic techniques
of design and construction for using continuous fibers as a seismic reinforcement which
include relevant precautions. In addition, it incorporates related techniques and construction
work cases so that the actual situation regarding this method can be understood.
Finally, we wish to express our deep gratitude to the above mentioned committees for
allowing us to make use of their research results, to each member of the committee for
creating these guidelines for their hard work in carrying out their duties under a tight schedule,
and to the Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association for their great assistance in regard
to the publication of this document.
Committee for Developing Seismic Retrofit Design and

Construction Guidelines for Existing Reinforced Concrete
Buildings and Steel Encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings
Chairman, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki
Committee for Developing Seismic Retrofit Design and Construction

Guidelines for Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings and
Steel Encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings
Chairman:
Manager:
Member:
Yasuhiro Matsuzaki
Professor, Faculty of Architecture, Engineering Department, Science University
of Tokyo
Hiroshi Fukuyama
Senior Researcher, International Institute of Seismology and Earthquake
Engineering, Building Research Institution, Ministry of Construction
Hisayoshi Ishibashi
Vice Director, Building Structure Group, Technical Research and Development
Institute, Kumagai Gumi Co., Ltd.
Shunsuke Otani
Professor of Architecture, Engineering Research Department, Graduate School,
University of Tokyo
Hideo Katsumata
Senior Researcher, Technical Research and Development Institute, Obayashi
Corp.
Soichi Kawamura
Director of Seismic Promotion, Sales Promotion Headquarters, Taisei Corp.
Shigeharu Kitamura
Assistant Manager, Building Guidance Division, Housing Bureau, Ministry of
Construction
Kazuaki Shimada
Former Assistant Manager, Building Guidance Division, Housing Bureau,
Shunsuke Sugano
Director of Basic Research Department, Technical Research and Development
Institute, Takenaka Corp.
Hideyuki Suzuki
Senior Researcher, Technology Institute, Ando Corp.
Toshio Takahashi
Director of Technology, Altes Co., Ltd. (Senior Researcher, Technology Institute,
Kashima Corp.)
Member:
Masaharu Tanigaki
Senior Researcher, Technical Research and Development Institute, Mutsui
Construction Co., Ltd.
Hideo Tsukagoshi
Senior Researcher, Technical Research and Development Institute, Shimizu
Corp.
Masaomi Teshigawara
Head of Structural Division, Structural Engineering Dept., Building Research
Institute, Ministry of Construction
Kenichi Nakamura
Director, Test No. 2, Tsukuba Building Test Laboratory, Better Living
Hiroyuki Nakamura
Director, Building Research Office, Technical Research and Development
Institute, Tokyu Construction Co., Ltd.
Takashi Nireki
Vice Head, Tsukuba Building Test Laboratory, Better Living
Hisahiro Hiraishi
Director, Codes and Evaluation Research Center, Building Research Institute,
Shigeru Fujii
Associate Professor of Environment Earth Engineering, Engineering Research
Department, Graduate School, Kyoto University
Tadashi Fujisaki
Senior Researcher, Technical Research and Development Institute, Shimizu
Corp.
Kiyoshi Masuo
Director, Structure Division, General Building Research Corporation of Japan
Kenji Motohashi
Director, Maintenance and Modernization Division, Building Materials and
Components Dept., Building Research Institute, Ministry of Construction
Susumu Imaizumi
General Director, Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association
Secretariat: Yoshinori Takahashi

Director, General Affairs Division, Japan Building Disaster Prevention
Association
Naomi Kawashima
Manager, Operating Section, General Affairs Division, Japan Building Disaster
Prevention Association
Contents
Introduction Outline of Seismic Retrofit Method Using Continuous Fiber Reinforced
Materials ............................................................................................................. 2
1.
Method Features ............................................................................................................... 2
2.
Construction Overview ..................................................................................................... 5
Chapter 1 General.................................................................................................................. 11
1.1 Scope and Terms ............................................................................................................. 11
1.1.1 Scope ..................................................................................................................... 11
1.1.2 Terms ..................................................................................................................... 12
1.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 14
1.3 Basic Policy for Strengthening Design ........................................................................... 16
1.3.1 Target Seismic Performance and Earthquake-resistance Index of Structures ....... 16
1.3.2 Properties of Continuous Fiber-reinforced Materials and Retrofit Plans .............. 21
1.3.3 Strengthening Design Procedures ......................................................................... 22
1.3.4 Construction of Retrofit Work ............................................................................... 24
1.3.5 Fireproofing Efficiency ......................................................................................... 24
Chapter 2 Characteristics of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements ........................................... 31
2.1 Characteristics of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements ..................................................... 31
2.1.1 Continuous Fiber Sheets and Continuous Fiber Reinforcements .......................... 31
2.1.2 Impregnate Adhesive Resin ................................................................................... 34
2.1.3 Primers................................................................................................................... 37
2.1.4 Ground Mending Materials ................................................................................... 39
2.1.5 Cross Section Repair Materials ............................................................................. 41
2.2 How to Evaluate the Material Characteristics of Continuous Fiber Reinforcement ...... 43
Chapter 3 Design of Reinforcing Members and Parts........................................................... 51
3.1 Strengthening of Independent Reinforced Concrete Columns ....................................... 51
3.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 51
3.1.2 Strengthening Methods and Structural Details ...................................................... 51
3.1.3 Evaluation Methods for Strength and Toughness .................................................. 55
3.2 Strengthening of Reinforced Concrete Beams................................................................ 83
3.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 83
3.2.2 Strengthening methods and structural details ........................................................ 83
3.2.3 Evaluation methods for strength............................................................................ 87
3.3 Strengthening of Steel-Encased Reinforced Concrete Columns ............... (Not translated)
3.4 Considerations ................................................................................................................ 92
3.4.1 Strengthening without Removing Finishing Mortar ............................................. 92
3.4.2 Adhesion of Ends of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements ..................................... 108
3.4.3 Strengthening of Columns with Wing Walls ....................................................... 116
3.4.4 Strengthening of Columns with Low Partitions .................................................. 123
3.4.5 Strengthening of Reinforced Concrete Walls ...................................................... 128
Chapter 4 Construction of Strengthening Work .................................................................. 141
4.1 Work specifications....................................................................................................... 141
4.1.1 General ................................................................................................................ 141
4.1.2 Carbon fiber/epoxy resin work method ............................................................... 143
4.1.3 Carbon fiber/methacrylate resin work method .................................................... 145

4.1.4 Aramid fiber/epoxy resin work method .............................................................. 149
4.2 Construction procedure ................................................................................................. 150
4.2.1 General ................................................................................................................ 150
4.2.2 Construction plan ................................................................................................ 153
4.2.3 Construction procedure ....................................................................................... 155
4.2.4 Preparation........................................................................................................... 156
4.2.5 Temporary work .................................................................................................. 159
4.2.6 Removing existing finish materials ..................................................................... 162
4.2.7 Ground treatment ................................................................................................. 165
4.2.8 Applying a primer ............................................................................................... 172
4.2.9 Ground mending .................................................................................................. 176
4.2.10 Marking ............................................................................................................... 180
4.2.11 Wrapping continuous fiber sheets ....................................................................... 182
4.1.12 Curing .................................................................................................................. 195
4.2.13 Finishing .............................................................................................................. 196
4.3 Safety, health and quality management during construction ........................................ 199
4.3.1 General rules........................................................................................................ 199
4.3.2 Construction management system ....................................................................... 199
4.3.3 Safety and health management ............................................................................ 200
4.3.4 Quality management............................................................................................ 203
4.3.5 Inspection ............................................................................................................ 207
[Appendix to Section 4.3] Quality management items ................................................ 218
Introduction
Outline of Seismic Retrofit Method
Using Continuous Fiber Reinforced
Materials
Introduction Outline of Seismic Retrofit Method Using Continuous

Fiber Reinforced Materials
Continuous fiber reinforced materials have material characteristics different from those of the
conventional steel and concrete construction materials. Therefore, their treatment requires
special construction methods. In this section, characteristics and construction outlines of
seismic retrofit methods using continuous fiber reinforced materials are introduced.
1.
Method Characteristics
The seismic retrofit method for existing reinforced concrete and steel framed reinforced
concrete construction buildings using continuous fiber reinforced materials is a technique that
strengthens and repairs existing buildings by wrapping continuous fiber sheets (mainly
contains materials like carbon fiber and aramid fiber) with impregnate adhesive resins such as
epoxy resins on the surface of reinforced concrete or steel encased reinforced concrete
members. Figure 1 illustrates the classification of fibers described in these guidelines. The
carbon fibers shown in parenthesizes are excluded from these guidelines. Details of
materials are shown in section 1.2.
PAN-family high strength type
Carbon fiber
Fibers
[PAN-family high stiffness type]*

[PITCH-family] *
Aramid fiber
(Aromatic
polyamide fiber)
Aramid 1: One kind of amine components

belongs to a mono-polymer family
Aramid 2: Two kinds of amine components
belong to a copolymer family.
* Items in [
Figure 1
] are excluded from these guidelines.
Fiber Classification
The specific gravity of any fiber is lower than that of steels by approximately 1/4-1/5.
Fibers have a high tensile strength of approximately 3000 MPa or more. For these reasons,
expectations are high for the new technique using fibers to replace the conventional seismic
retrofit methods based on steels and concrete. Also, other methods using relatively low cost
glass fibers and polyacetal fibers in addition to the fibers shown in Figure 1, are being
considered and developed for commercialization.
-1-
Photo 1
Carbon Fiber Sheet
Photo 2
Aramid Fiber Sheet
Continuous fiber sheets used in seismic retrofitting are processed in a thin sheet shape. A
carbon fiber of 0.2 mm or less in thickness and an aramid fiber of 0.3 mm or less are often
used. A carbon fiber sheet is shown in Figure 1 and an aramid fiber sheet in Figure 2.
These are worked into a sheet shape by aligning very thin continuous fibers of approximately
5-20 m in diameter in a given direction. Some of the continuous fibers worked into a sheet
shape which have relatively narrow widths may be called continuous fiber tape. However, in
this guidelines, they are collectively called a continuous fiber sheet. Each of these fibers can
be shaped to suit a concrete surface and wrapped on it due to their high flexibility.
One-way preimpregnation type
One-way reinforced sheet
Shapes of
continuous
fiber sheet
One-way textile (including tape)

One-way sheet
Two-way reinforced sheet

Figure 2
Two-way textile
Shape Classification of Continuous Fiber Sheets
-2-
The shape classification of continuous fiber sheets is shown in Figure 2. Continuous fiber
sheets are classified into one-way or two-way types depending on their direction.
Depending on the process used for maintaining them in a sheet shape, the fibers are classified
based on preimpregnation type which wraps bundles of continuous fibers on a removable
adhesive paper, the type of continuous fibers processed into a textile shape, and the type of
continuous fibers formed into a sheet shape with auxiliary resins. For continuous fibers
processed into a textile shape, two textile types exist. One is the two-way textile
manufactured by weaving reinforced fibers placed in two directions and the other is a
one-way textile manufactured by placing reinforced fibers in one direction and auxiliary and
low cost fibers in another direction, as shown in Figure 3.
Continuous
fiber
Continuous
fiber
Auxiliary fiber
(glass fibers etc.)
Two-way textile
One-way textile
Figure 3
Continuous
fiber
One-way Textile and Two-way Textile
One-way reinforced sheets are often employed for seismic repair. For instance, shear
reinforcement can be ensured by wrapping these sheets to columns and beam members
perpendicularly to the longitudinal, while bending strength can be reinforced by wrapping
these sheets in their longitudinal direction. Also, since impregnate adhesive resins
impregnated into continuous fiber sheets also serve as an adhesive between the sheets, it is
possible to lap them in multiple layers. Therefore, two-way reinforcement is possible by
lapping the sheets over each other at right angles, and high strengthening effectiveness can be
attained by lapping them in the same direction.
Good workability:
Advantages of
continuous fiber
reinforcement-b
ased method
Figure 4
Lightweight and welding-free
Shortening of construction period: Preprocess-free and a few

construction items
Increased design flexibility:
Invariant section dimension and

building weight
Improved durability:
Prevention of concrete
neutralization and steel corrosion
Advantages of Continuous Fiber Reinforcement-based Seismic Retrofit Method
-3-
Figure 4 shows the advantages of the continuous fiber reinforcement-based seismic retrofit
method over the conventional steel jacketing when the two methods are compared.
Construction features of the former method include: construction by manpower only is
possible since continuous fiber sheets are lighter than steel materials, easy construction can be
achieved even in work environments not accessible to machines and heavy equipment. Also,
special skills in welding and other operations are not required, fires are not required, and there
is little generation of noise or dust. The steel jacketing method requires the obtaining of
prior measurement of reinforcement members and processing steel plates, but continuous
fiber sheets can be cut to the size and shape of the members on-site. Such good construction
features allow shortening of the construction period using the former method. Since
shortening of the construction period becomes a key cost factor particularly when seismic
retrofit work causes suspension of building use, the advantages of the former method are
apparent. Also, because the amount of increase in the buildings weight of building weight
following construction is negligible, building serviceability is not disrupted and the increase
in weight can be ignored from a design viewpoint. In addition, it does not have effect on the
balance of member rigidity due to little variation of member stiffness in shear reinforcement.
Little maintenance work such as periodic painting is required for durability since wrapping
members prevents concrete neutralization and there is no risk of steel corrosion in continuous
fiber reinforced materials.
Though continuous fiber reinforced materials are more expensive than steels on the basis of
material cost, the continuous fiber-based method is often cheaper than the conventional steel
jacketing in terms of total costs including construction conditions and construction period.
On the other hand, when continuous fiber sheets are closely wrapped around members, the
corner edges of members must be rounded so as to reduce centralized stress on bending areas.
Noise and dust are produced when chamfering these edges and correcting the unevenness of
member surfaces, and offensive odors are generated during the application of primers and
impregnate adhesive resins. For these reasons, a method that eliminates dust and odors
during such construction is required while a building is in use.
Continuous fiber sheets are bonded to a concrete surface with impregnate resins. To ensure
their strengthening effectiveness, the sheets must be close looped to the circumference of
members or the sheet edges must be completely anchored.
In addition to seismic retrofit using continuous fiber reinforced materials processed into a
sheet shape, these guidelines also propose some other continuous fiber-based reinforcement
methods.
-4-
Some methods considered in the past include machine looping columns with impregnate
adhesive resins impregnated into strand fibers, on-site wrapping of L-shaped or U-shaped
continuous fiber reinforced materials and filling the gaps between the concrete and the fibers
with grouts or resins, and on-site assembly of precast concrete slabs whose insides are
wrapped with continuous fiber sheets.
Apart from carbon fibers and aramid fibers, the use of glass fibers and polyacetal fibers is
considered. The latter fibers are cheaper than the former, and their strengthening
effectiveness evaluation methods and durability are being researched and developed. The
methods and materials excluded from these guidelines are referred to in this documents
appendix.
2.
Construction Overview
The general procedures for continuous fiber reinforcement-based seismic retrofit are shown in
Figure 5. The construction overview is as follows:
Surface treatment: If the surface has irregularities, when wrapping continuous fiber
sheets, this will produce rising and waving. Surface smoothing is critical work since
rising and waving substantially reduce strengthening effectiveness. Corner edges should
be roundly chamfered. The chamfering diameter ranges from approximately 10 to 30 mm.
It does not matter that the edge-chamfering diameter in aramid fibers is smaller than that in
carbon fibers. Primers are applied to improve the adhesion of impregnate bond resins to
the concrete surface.
Wrapping of continuous fiber sheets: Continuous fiber sheets and tapes can be easily cut
with scissors or cutters. The cutting is done taking into consideration member
dimensions, sheet allocation and the required wrapping length. The required amount of
impregnate adhesive resins is applied for rough coating and finish coating respectively. It
is important to impregnate continuous fiber sheets with impregnate bond resins and remove
excessive foams. This process should be repeated when overlapping the sheets.
Curing: The hardening time of impregnate bond resins depends on atmospheric
temperatures. Particularly in outdoor construction, it is necessary to cure the resins so
that sand, dirt and dust can not bond to them. When using epoxy resins as impregnate
adhesive resins, if the atmospheric temperature drops during hardening, there is a
possibility of defective hardening of the bond resins. Therefore, it may be required to
perform curing in line with the atmospheric temperature. Since epoxy resins are not
generally suitable for construction work below 5C, methacylic (MMA) resins with
excellent low-temperature hardening have recently become commercially practical. If the
-5-
resins have become wet with water before hardening, low strength resins may be formed.
For this reason, operation should be stopped during rainfall or fog in outdoor construction,
and in indoor work prevention of dew condensation during curing is required.
Finishing: Finishing is done in consideration of surface appearance, protection and fire
resistance. All work starts after hardening of the impregnate bond resins.
Surface treatment
Smoothing of concrete surface by scouring and sanding

Putty-based unevenness correction of concrete surface
Roundly chamfer corner edges
Application of primers
Bonding of continuous
fiber sheets
Cutting of continuous fiber sheets

Rough coating with impregnate bond resins
Wrapping and impregnating of continuous fiber sheets
Finish coating with impregnate bond resins
Impregnating and removing foams
Curing
Cure impregnate bond resins without the adherence of

rain, sand or dust before hardening.
Cure epoxy impregnate bond resins while ensuring the
atmospheric temperature does not fall below 5C.
Finishing
Figure 5
Photo 3
Conduct finishing with mortars and paints after verifying

that impregnate bond resins have dried.
General Procedures for Continuous Fiber Reinforcement-based Seismic Retrofit
Surface Treatment with a Sander

Equipped with a Dust Collector
-6-
Photo 4
Chamfering of Corner Edges
Photo 5
Application of Primers
Photo 6
Photo 7
Cutting of Carbon Fibers
Photo 8
Photo 9
Rough coating with

impregnate bond resins
Photo 10
-7-
Putty-based Unevenness
Correction
Cutting of Aramid Fibers
Sheet wrapping
(carbon fiber sheet)
Photo 11
Sheet wrapping
(aramid fiber tape)
Photo 12
Finish coating with

impregnate adhesive resins
Photo 13
Resin impregnating and

removing foams
Photo 14
Spraying of silica sands for

finish coating after the
completion of wrapping
The seismic repair method features better workability than that of existing methods.
However, their strengthening effectiveness depends largely on construction work conditions.
Rising and loosing between a concrete surface and the continuous fiber reinforced materials
substantially reduce its effectiveness. The fiber reinforcement-based method requires all the
processes including surface treatment, wrapping of continuous fiber sheets, resin
impregnating and curing, etc. to obtain the strengthening effects expected in the design.
-8-
Chapter 1 GENERAL
-9-
Chapter 1
General
1.1 Scope and Terms

1.1.1
Scope
These guidelines, that cover independent columns and beams of existing reinforced concrete
buildings and existing steel-encased reinforced concrete buildings, apply to the seismic
retrofit design and construction methods that use continuous fiber-reinforced materials, except
for design and construction based on special studies. The items not contained in these
guidelines are based on related standards and criterion such as the Guidelines for Seismic
Retrofit of Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings, the Guidelines for Seismic Retrofit of
Steel-Encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings published by the Japan Building Disaster
Prevention Association.
[Comments]
These guidelines apply to seismic retrofit design and construction methods for existing
reinforced concrete buildings and existing steel-encased reinforced concrete buildings that use
continuous fiber-reinforced materials. A seismic retrofit method that covers independent
columns and rectangular beams is employed to improve their capacity or ductility by
attaching continuous, fiber-reinforced materials to their surfaces.
These guidelines focus on construction methods and materials investigated to date by research
results. When employing construction methods, materials, and details not contained in these
guidelines, strengthening effectiveness must be confirmed based on laboratory data and new
experiments. However, the items not contained in these guidelines, should be in accordance
with related standards, criteria, and guidelines such as the Guidelines for Seismic Retrofit of
Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings, the Guidelines for Seismic Retrofit of Steel-frame
Reinforced Concrete Buildings, and the criteria and standard specifications related to various
kinds of structural calculations and construction presented by the Architectural Institute of
Japan (AIJ), as well as the guidelines cited.
- 11 -
1.1.2
Terminology
The terminology used in these guidelines, unless specified otherwise, conform to the
Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity, Guidelines for Seismic Retrofit of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Buildings, the Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity,
Guidelines for Seismic Retrofit of Steel-encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings published
by Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association, and the criterion and standard
specifications related to various kinds of structural calculations and construction presented by
the Architectural Institute of Japan (AIJ).
[Comments]
Terms and their definition generally used in these guidelines are listed as follows:
Continuous fiber:
Generic name for very thin, continuous fibers with a diameter

of approximately 5-20 m.
The continuous fibers are
extremely strong with a high level of corrosion resistance, are
lightweight and non-magnetic. The fibers are employed for
seismic retrofit.
Continuous Fiber Sheet:
These sheets use auxiliary materials to maintain their sheet

shape. Those sheets that can be continuously closely wrapped
around columns and beams due to a relatively small width is
called continuous fiber tape.
Continuous Fiber
Reinforcement:
(FRP)
(CFRP)
(AFRP)
Those types of reinforcement formed by impregnating

continuous fiber sheets with adhesive resins and letting them
harden is called FRP. Some types of reinforcement use
carbon fiber and are called CFRP and other reinforcements use
aramid fiber and are called AFRP.
Carbon Fiber:
(CF)
Carbon fibers, imperfect graphitic microcrystal aggregates, are

classified into a PAN-family and PITCH-family depending on
raw materials and manufacturing methods. PAN-family fibers
are formed by heating and carbonizing polyacrylonitrile fibers,
and PITCH-family fibers are formed by burning oil or coal
pitches. The PAN-family has a diameter of approximately 5-8
m and the PITCHfamily has a diameter of approximately
9-18 m. The two types physical properties vary according
to crystal orientations. The PAN-family includes extremely
strong and highly stiffness products. It is very easy to
manufacture highly stiffness products. These fibers are called
- 12 -
Carbon Fiber or CF.

Aramid Fiber:
(AF)
(Aramid 1)
(Aramid 2)
These fibers are synthetic fibers consisting of PAN-aromatic

polyamide fibers that have the same amide links -CONH- as
nylon. An aramid fiber has a mono-polymer family consisting
of one kind of amine component and a copolymer family
consisting of two kinds of amine components.
These
guidelines label the former fiber Aramid 1 and the latter fiber
Aramid 2. Both of these kinds of fibers have a diameter of
approximately 12 m and offer substantially greater tensile
strength, stiffness, and thermal resistance when compared to
other organic or synthetic fibers. They are called AF.
Impregnate Adhesive
Resin:
These resins are used to impregnate continuous fiber sheets and

tapes for incorporation into these fibers and bonding to a
concrete surface. These resins are also used as an adhesive
between reinforcements to lap continuous fiber sheets.
Amount of Continuous
Fiber Reinforcement:
The mass of continuous fibers alone per unit area of continuous

fiber-reinforced materials
Designed Thickness of
Continuous Fiber
Reinforcement:
The designed thickness represents a value calculated by

dividing the density of continuous fibers into the amount of
continuous fiber-reinforced materials.
Cross Section Area of

Continuous Fiber
Reinforcement:
The cross section area represents a value calculated by

multiplying the designed thickness of continuous
fiber-reinforced materials by the width of continuous
fiber-reinforced materials taken at right angles to the
continuous fiber orientation.
Standardized Tensile
Strength of Continuous
Fiber-reinforced
Materials:
The tensile strength represents a value produced by reducing

the maximum tensile stress of continuous fiber-reinforced
materials in light of a given safety factor. It is called the
Guaranteed Tensile Strength.
Designed Tensile Strength

of Continuous
Fiber-reinforced
Materials:
The tensile strength of continuous fiber-reinforced materials

used for design.
It is determined by multiplying the
standardized tensile strength of continuous fiber-reinforced
materials by an effective coefficient.
- 13 -
1.2 Materials
Continuous fibers, produced by forming carbon or aramid fibers in sheet or tape shapes, can
be used for seismic retrofit.
Epoxy-family or methacrylic (MMA)-family
impregnated-adhesive resins should be employed.
[Comments]
These guidelines cover carbon and aramid fibers demonstrated to date by research results and
are tried and true to some extent, although there are some kinds of continuous fibers that can
be used for seismic retrofit.
An example of the stress-strain relationship for continuous fiber-reinforced materials and
reinforcing bars is shown in Figure 1.2-1. The tensile strength of continuous fiber-reinforced
materials is about ten times the yield strength and tensile strength of normal-strength steels, and
fiber materials behave elastically until rupture by tension. However, when members
strengthened by continuous fiber-reinforced materials reach ultimate capacity, the stress of the
material does not always reach its tensile strength limit. To evaluate the structural
performance of members for seismic retrofit, the fracture pattern and strengthening
effectiveness of continuous fiber-reinforced materials must be thoroughly studied.
Stress (Mpa)
There are two types of carbon fibers: one has the almost the same Youngs modulus as steel,
and the other is highly stiffness and its Youngs modulus is about twice that of steel. Since
the strain at rupture of highly stiffness is lower than that of other continuous fibers, care must
be taken to use the fibers as shear-reinforcement. The guidelines cover PAN-family and
high-strength carbon fibers.
Carbon Fiber
(stiffness type)
Carbon Fiber
(high-strength type)
Aramid 2
Aramid 1
PC Tendon
(C class)
Normal Reinforcing Bar
(SD295A)
Strain (%)
Figure 1.2-1
Stress-Strain Relationship for Continuous Fiber-reinforced Materials

and Reinforcing Bars
- 14 -
Youngs modulus of Aramid fibers is about 1/2-1/3 that of steel and their strain at tensile
strength is higher than that of carbon fibers.
The resins for impregnated bonding must be compatible with the temperature during
construction work. Epoxy resins, which are often used as impregnated-adhesive resins, have
hardening problems at low temperatures, i.e., below 5C. Therefore, using methacrylic
(MMA)-family resins with excellent hardening at low temperatures is suggested for
construction work in such environments. Recently, a technique to improve the hardening of
impregnated-adhesive resins has been developed by pre-impregnating (prepreg type)
continuous fiber sheets with the resins, wrapping them over a body, and heating them
electrically.1)
Impregnated-bond resins generally are less fireproof. The post-hardening resins soften with
heat and continuous fiber-reinforced materials tensile strength lowers.
So, when
fireproofing is desired for earthquake-proofing methods using continuous fiber-reinforced
materials, proper fireproof coverage is required.
For reference, when using carbon and aramid fibers in seismic retrofit, research results
indicate that the strengthening effectiveness of a combination of continuous fibers and
impregnated-adhesive resins is limited. Construction methods from the guidelines are based
on this combination, so this fact should be understood. When using continuous fibers and
impregnated-bond resins by changing their combination, their strengthening effectiveness
must be confirmed with testing, and future accumulation of research data is suggested.
<References for Section 1.2>

1)
Tomoaki Sugiyama, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Katsuhiko Nakano, and Hiroshi Fukuyama: Experimental
Research on the Performance of RC Non-structural Walls Strengthened with Carbon Fiber Sheets, Report
on Annual Papers in Concrete Engineering, Vo1.21, No.3, pp.1423-1428, 1999.7
- 15 -
1.3 Basic Policy for Strengthening Design

1.3.1
Target Seismic Performance and Earthquake-resistance Index of Structures
When developing retrofitting plans, targeted seismic performance should be clearly defined.
[Comments]
(1) Seismic performance

When designing reinforcement for seismic, the value of RIS, the seismic resistance index
for structures, a strengthening design target, should be set based on the Standards for
Evaluation of Seismic Capacity and Comments for Existing Reinforced Concrete
Buildings1) (hereafter referred to as RC Diagnostics Standards) or the Standards for
Evaluation of Seismic Capacity and Comments for Steel-encased Reinforced Concrete
Buildings2) (hereafter referred to as SRC Diagnostics Standards), or the Law for
Promoting the Seismic Retrofit of Buildings (Law No. 123, 1995)3) (hereafter referred to
as Seismic-retrofit Promotion Law). After the completion of strengthening design,
earthquake-resistance diagnostics should be performed again and the attainment of target
values should be confirmed.
RC Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics and SRC Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics
standards express the earthquake-resistance performance of buildings as a structural
earthquake resistance index IS and also set a target value for the product of a cumulative
strength index and a shape index, CT SD, as well as a target structural earthquakeresistance index RIS. Also conforming to these concepts for earthquake resistance using
continuous fiber reinforcement methods, properly applying these guidelines to repair
methods means that the coefficient () associated with evaluation of strengthening
effectiveness and construction reliability (Seismic Retrofit Design and Construction
Guidelines for Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings4) (hereafter referred to as RC
Retrofit Design Guidelines) or Seismic Retrofit Design and Construction Guidelines
for Existing Steel-encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings5) (hereafter referred as to
SRC Retrofit Design Guidelines) may be 1.0. Namely, it is possible to set targets like
the expressions in (1.3.1) and (1.3.2). For reference, expression (1.3.2) can be applied
to the second and third diagnostics methods. This target value may be considered set in
a similar way with the concurrent use of the reinforcement method with evaluation
approaches in the RC Retrofit Design Guidelines and SRC Retrofit Design Guidelines
and the continuous fiber reinforcement method.
- 16 -
RI S
ISO
CT SD
(1.3.1)
0.3
0.28 Z G U
(RC buildings)
(SRC buildings consisting of partial steel members)
0.25 Z G U
(SRC buildings consisting of full steel members)

(1.3.2)
Where
Target value for the structural earthquake resistance index of
R I S:
post-reinforcement buildings
ISO: Structural earthquake-proofing determination index in earthquake-resistance
diagnostics (=EsZGU)
Es:
Basic earthquake-resistance performance index (0.8 for the first diagnostics
method and 0.6 for the second and third diagnostics methods)
Z:
Regional index, revision coefficient on the basis of regional seismic activity
levels and possible seismic strength
G:
Coefficient of the subgrade reaction, revision coefficient on the basis of
amplification properties, and topographic effectiveness of subsurface grounds
and interaction between grounds and buildings
U:
Importance coefficient, revision coefficient on the basis of function of
buildings, etc.
CT:
Cumulative capacity index for post-reinforcement buildings
SD:
Shape index for post-reinforcement buildings
In addition, the Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics and Earthquake-resistance Guidelines

for Specific Buildings (Notification No. 2089 of the Ministry of Construction, on
December 25, 1995), based on the provisions of the Earthquake-resistance Promotion
Law, Article 3, express earthquake-resistance performance as an index q associated with a
structural earthquake-resistance index RIS for an ultimate lateral strength of each story,
providing expressions (1.3.3) and (1.3.4). When the requirements of these two
expressions are met, the safety during an earthquake in key areas of earthquake proofing
is evaluated as a slight possibility that buildings will collapse or fall due to seismic
shakes and shocks. This is considered to be the same level of earthquake-resistance
performance required by current seismic provisions as a minimum requirement.
0.6
q 1.0
RI S
(1.3.3)
(1.3.4)
Where
- 17 -
q:
Qu:
Fes:
W:
Z:
Rt:
Ai:
St:
Index associated with the ultimate lateral strength of each floor

= Qu / (Fes W Z Rt Ai St)
Ultimate lateral strength of each floor
Fes value (coefficient representing shape characteristics of each floor
determined with stiffness and eccentricity) defined by Article 82-4, No. 2, the
Enforcement Ordinance, Building Standards Act
Sum of the fixed load and live load (plus the snow accumulation load in areas
with heavy snow) in areas supported by appropriate floors when calculating
the seismic force according to the provisions of Section 1, Article 88, the
Enforcement Ordinance, Building Standards Act
Z value (seismic zone coefficient) defined by the provisions of Section 1,
Article 88, the Enforcement Ordinance, Building Standard Act
Rt value (coefficient of vibration characteristics due to soil condition) defined
by the provisions of Section 1, Article 88, the Enforcement Ordinance,
Building Standard Act
Ai value (distributed coefficient of the story shear force during an earthquake)
defined by the provisions of Section 1, Article 88, Enforcement Ordinance,
Building Standard Act
The value is defined according to structural types for buildings and is 0.25 for
steel-building and steel-encased reinforced concrete building and 0.3 for other
structural methods.
Earthquake-resistance performance was originally associated with overall basic structural

performance: safety, reparability and serviceability of structural frames, building
members, facilities and equipment, furnitures and ground in response to an earthquakes
seismic tremors, but here only the safety of structural frames is covered in a limited sense.
Frame safety can be assured by preventing frames from falling, collapsing, and
disintegrating due to an earthquakes seismic tremors. To express the frame safety as a
value, as mentioned above, a structural earthquake-resistance index for
earthquake-resistance diagnostics, the product of a cumulative capacity index, and a
shape index or an ultimate lateral strength-related index are used. The structural
earthquake-resistance index represents the magnitude or strength of an earthquakes
seismic tremors when the buildings structural frame reaction during an earthquake
reaches safety limits (with situations that resulting in falls or collapse). The target value
of earthquake-resistance performance is shown in equations (3.1.1) to (3.1.4). Refer to
recommended values required by the RC Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics and SRC
Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics standards or the target value defined by
Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics and Earthquake-resistance Guidelines for Specific
Buildings. Given cost efficiency, availability, and the features of earthquake-resistance
- 18 -
methods using continuous fiber-reinforced materials, the target value must be set.
This construction method conforms to earthquake-resistance polices to ensure the
earthquake-resistance performance necessary for buildings by preventing shear failure of
existing members, increasing their ductility and improving the ductility of structural
frames. Therefore, a construction method is recommended using ductility with
resistance-based reinforcement or strength and ductility with resistance-based
reinforcement, with the main aim of increasing the ductility index and performance of the
bending yield priority of post-reinforced buildings. On the other hand, the method can
be applied to strength and ductility resistance-based reinforcement that has the main aim
of attaining higher member strength by increasing shear strength. In this case, the
stiffness, balance with other members, and fracture patterns of overall buildings should
be properly considered. In any case, it is important to make the owners understand that
repairs and other work for earthquake-damaged members are required. For reference,
this construction method can improve earthquake proofing without increasing the weight
of the buildings and without increasing member stiffness due to small, growing sections
of post-executed members.
To ensure the targeted earthquake-resistance performance of buildings, the concurrent use
of this method and other repairing methods should be considered in depth. For this
deliberation, it is important to select the most suitable construction method, given the
seismic element balance in the same layer and balance in strength, ductility, and stiffness
between each story and in accordance with basic earthquake-resistance polices as to the
extent of strength and ductility that should be provided for reinforced buildings.
(2) Structural Earthquake-resistance Index (Is)
The RC and SRC Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics standards express
earthquake-resistance performance of buildings as a structural earthquake-resistance
index Is.
The structural earthquake-resistance index Is is determined from the product of three
sub-indices, an ultimate performance basic index EO, a shape index SD and an aging index
T (Is = EO SD T). The index EO is used to evaluate the buildings own
earthquake-resistance performance based on the ultimate strength and fracture
patterns/ductility of buildings. Ultimate strength is expressed with the C index (the
ultimate lateral shearing force coefficient), and fracture patterns and ductility are
represented by the F index (EO = C F). A shape index SD is a coefficient for correcting
the imbalance of yield strength and stiffness and an aging index T for considering the
effects of cracks, deformation, and aging on structural yield strength.
- 19 -
(a) Improvement of the Ductility Index Value (Increasing the F index)

When it is difficult to add seismic elements including increases in member sections
and shear walls when planning, measures should be taken to meet the target value for
earthquake resistance by raising the F index.
When the shear strength is lower than the bending strength in members,
improvement of the ductility can be accomplished by the increasing shear strength
with continuous fiber reinforcement methods and transferring it to a bending yield
pattern. The same effect as seen in increasing shear reinforcement can be obtained.
In addition, as observed when increasing shear reinforcement, it is expected to
increased ductilities by the concrete lateral confining effect will lead to growing
compressive toughness of concrete, upgrading bond properties of reinforcing bars
and concrete, and minimizing bond splitting failures. The F index is evaluated on
the basis of the ratio of the shear strength to bending strength (the ratio of shear
capacity to flexural capacity), the amount of shear reinforcement, an axial force ratio,
and a shear span ratio. However, sufficient data has not been accumulated to
evaluate the effects of these forces, and these effects are not presented in a positive
manner.
(b) Improvement of the Capacity Index Value (Increasing the C index)
This construction method is used mainly to increase the shear strength of members.
The member strength is determined on the basis of shear failure, and can be expected
to develop a bending strength that is greater than shear strength and an increase in
ductility after reaching its bending strength. In this case, the earthquake-resistance
reinforcement will be a strength and ductility resistance pattern that can improve
both the C and F values. The method could be applied to reinforcement to increase
the bending strength. But particular attention should be paid to problems due to the
fact that continuous fiber-reinforced materials are elastic materials that are subject to
brittle fracture. Problems are that the maximum strength is determined on the basis
of rupture or anchoring fractures, that stress re-allocation as in reinforcing bars
cannot be expected, and that the edges of continuous fiber-reinforced materials must
be securely anchored. Also, to develop an assumed bending strength, shear
reinforcement needs to be consistent with the same strength.
(c) Improvement of the Shape Index Value (Increasing the SD Index)
A continuous fiber reinforcement method makes earthquake resistance possible
without increasing the section area and weight, but receiving the effects of
controlling the stiffness of members with this construction method would be difficult.
The balance of the average strength can be corrected by reinforcing lateral members
with low and rising strength. This effect is not positively reflected in the SD index
but provides a useful measure to correct odd-shaped buildings.
- 20 -
(d) Improvement of the Aging Index Value (Increasing the T Index)

The aging index T evaluates the effects of cracks, deformation, and aging on
structural capacity.
In applying this construction method to strengthening
construction, cracks, deformation, and aging of members should be basically repaired.
Members covered with continuous fiber-reinforced materials after earthquake
resistance could retard the results of cracks, deformation, and aging.
(e) Diagnostics Order and Repair Policies
The first diagnostics method may be employed for evaluating strength
resistance-pattern reinforcement as an earthquake-resistance policy. The second
and third diagnostics methods are required for ductility resistance-pattern
reinforcement. When beam-retrofit is implemented, the third diagnostics method
must be used. The diagnostics order will be more than the second diagnostics when
employing a continuous fiber reinforcement method that often provides a ductility
resistance-pattern repair policy.
(3) Earthquake-resistance Index for Non-structural Members (IN)
The earthquake-resistance index for non-structural members IN, a structural method index
B, and an effect index H are important coefficients. The index for B is measured from
performance following deformation and service performance, and the H represents the
effects of fractures. This construction method can be often expected to improve
deformation performance for structural members and to compensate for deformation to
follow in non-structural members due to great interlayer deformation during a major
earthquake. According to a review 6) of that concept, non-structural members are
reinforced with a continuous fiber reinforcement method; performance following
deformation in non-structural members has been shown to be substantially better. The
earthquake-proofing index IN is a coefficient to diagnose the safety of human lives given
that peeling and falling of non-structural members, and especially exterior walls, during
an earthquake directly injure people and prevent their escape. Therefore, this
construction method could be effective in improving the index.
1.3.2
Properties of Continuous Fiber-reinforced Materials and Retrofit Plans
Properties of continuous fiber-reinforced materials should be thoroughly considered in the

strengthening plan.
[Comments]
The earthquake-resistance method using continuous fiber-reinforced materials has different

properties with existing repair methods, as discussed here. Therefore, paying attention to
- 21 -
these distinctive features, the areas where the materials are used should be selected and
strengthening and construction planning should be developed.
(a) Continuous fiber-reinforced materials can attain great levels of strength with fiber
orientation but are brittle at right angles to the fiber orientation.
(b) Continuous fiber-reinforced materials cause brittle fractures without yield phenomena
after exhibiting elastic behavior.
(c) Continuous fiber-reinforced materials can attain strength after the fibers have been
securely impregnating with resins.
(d) The corner areas of continuous fiber-reinforced materials may be subject to stress
reduction due to intensive stress.
(e) The adherence of continuous fiber-reinforced materials to a concrete surface and
lapping of the materials depend on resin-based bonding capabilities.
(f) Impregnated-bond resins, with their positive effect on construction performance and
fireproofing, should be employed.
1.3.3
Strengthening Design Procedures
(1) Feasibility Studies

When conducting strengthening design and construction planning, field studies should be
conducted thoroughly and meetings with building owners should be held to confirm
various conditions related to retrofit work.
(2) Strengthening Design Procedures
Strengthening design procedures, basic design, detailed design, and strengthening
effectiveness evaluation should be followed in proper order, and the procedures be
repeated when earthquake-resistance performance cannot reach a target value.
[Comments]
(1) Feasibility Studies

Earthquake resistance using continuous fiber-reinforced materials is the most effective for
members that can be close looped as in independent columns. However, actual columns
often have appurtenant structures such as shear walls and non-structural walls, sashes and
equipment, and it is generally difficult to wrap continuous fiber-reinforced materials
closely around these members. Also, some surface of members to be reinforced may be
in various finishings and uneven or sloping. Therefore, when cracks occur on
earthquake-damaged concrete, cracks must be filled with resin and other fillers and
repaired in advance. The members and their surrounding shapes, subject to repair,
- 22 -
should be studied beforehand.

The continuous fiber reinforcement method is suitable for use with in-service buildings in
comparison to existing steel-plate lining methods. Since dust, noise and offensive smells
are given out during construction work, the in-service conditions of buildings during
construction should be thoroughly studied and meetings with the owners should be held.
(2) Strengthening Design Procedures
Strengthening design procedures, (a) reinforcement plan, (b) basic design, (c) detailed
design, and (d) strengthening effectiveness evaluation, should be conducted in proper
order and procedures (a)-(d) should be repeated when post-reinforced
earthquake-resistance performance cannot reach a target value. Review items at each
phase are provided as follows:
(a) Reinforcement Plan
A reinforcement target should be set and a basic policy about the extent of the
strength and ductility provided to retrofitted buildings should be defined. In
addition to the set target and policy, given the characteristics and important points for
materials and construction work contained in Chapters 2 and 4, the construction
method best suited to the target should be selected.
(b) Basic Design
The required quantity of reinforcement (the section area of reinforcing members and
their quantities) should be estimated and the layout of reinforcing members should be
planned. The evaluation expressions of strength (the shear strength and bending
strength) and ductility (ductility factor) are provided in Chapter 3. It is important to
use these expressions after understanding the member strength and scope.
(c) Detailed Design
Details including the arrangement of layout-planned reinforcing members and
methods to bond new members to existing members should be designed in
accordance with Chapter 3 of these guidelines and the RC or SRC Retrofit Design
Guidelines. For reference, important points in strengthening design are presented in
Section 3.4.
(d) Strengthening Effectiveness Evaluation
Earthquake-resistance performance of earthquake-resistant buildings should be
evaluated in accordance with the RC or SRC Retrofit Design Guidelines, and
post-retrofit earthquake-resistance performance should meet the target value. It is
recommended that diagnostics results for buildings prior to repair be used as much as
possible. Based on these results, the mechanical properties of earthquake-resistant
buildings should be considered and the validation of the reinforcement plan should
- 23 -
be verified.
1.3.4
Construction of Retrofit Work
The construction of retrofit work should conform to the provisions in Chapter 4.

[Comments]
The construction of an earthquake-resistance method using continuous fiber-reinforced

materials should be done in accordance with construction method specifications, construction
instructions, safety and sanitation control, and quality control specified in Chapter 4. The
concurrent use of this method and other construction methods should be referred to in RC and
SRC Retrofit Design Guidelines.
1.3.5
Fireproofing Efficiency
(1) Basic Concepts

Adequate measures should be taken as necessary so that members, earthquake-proof with
continuous fiber-reinforced materials, meet fireproofing requirements.
(2) Ensuring Fireproofing
(a) Control of an Increase in Combustible Materials
In an earthquake-resistance method using continuous fiber-reinforced materials, the
excessive increase in combustible materials within buildings should be controlled.
If an increase in combustible materials is not negligible, adequate fireproofing
measures must be taken.
(b) Incombustibility of Interior Materials
When members, earthquake-resistance with continuous fiber-reinforced materials in
accordance with the Building Standards Act, are subject to interior limitations, the
surface areas in the interior should be finished with noncombustible,
semi-noncombustible and other appropriate materials.
(c) Ensuring Structural Fireproofing
When earthquake-resistance work causes section deficits in fireproof structural
members due to chamfering and slitting or reinforced materials on the surface of
members may promote the spread of a fire, adequate measures should be taken to
prevent these factors from reducing fireproofing.
(d) Fireproof Covering for Continuous Fiber-reinforced Materials
When continuous fiber-reinforced materials used in earthquake resistance are subject
to fires and then intended for reuse, adequate fireproofing covers should be placed on
their surfaces.
- 24 -
(3) Repair and Reinforcement for Fire-damaged Materials

When members strengthened with continuous fiber-reinforced materials are subject to
fires, adequate repair and reinforcement should be performed according to the level of
damage.
[Comments]
(1) Basic Concepts

Fireproof structures basically consist of noncombustible materials and originally did not
promote the occurrence and spread of a fire. Fireproof columns continuously support
vertical loads even if they are subject to a fires heat and have the capability to support
loads necessary to prevent a building from falling. In addition, section members
including fireproof walls and floors possess thermal shielding and flame shielding
that prevent a fires heat, flames, and high-temperature gas from penetrating these
structures. Functions for thermal shielding and flame shielding are needed to stop the
spread of a fire. The incombustibility, capability to support loads, and thermal
shielding/flame shielding (i.e., fireproofing as mentioned before), are original
fireproofing capabilities. Fire safety for buildings with main structures such as columns,
beams, floors, and walls that are fireproof is based on the fireproofing efficiency
mentioned. Therefore, when applying the continuous fiber-reinforced materials-based
construction method to fireproof members, measures contained in (2) should be taken as
needed and the fireproofing efficiency of members should be ensured. According to
Article 5 and the Enforcement Ordinance of the Earthquake-resistance Promotion Law
(Decree No. 28 of the Ministry of Construction, 1995), the provisions of the Building
Standards Act for fireproof buildings should not be applied to buildings equipped with
fire alarm systems to promote earthquake resistance. The systems must effectively
detect the occurrence of fire and notify a building superintendent.
(2) Ensuring Fireproofing efficiency
(a) Control of an Increase in Combustible Materials
Combustible resins used for continuous fiber-reinforced materials, which might burn
in a fire, generally have no fireproofing problems since the amount of these materials
used in earthquake resistance is much less than that of stored combustible materials.
However, if many members are subject to earthquake resistance and the usage (the
numbers of looped layers, etc.) of reinforced materials for members is greater in the
same floor and section, combustible materials will increase. Therefore, an efficient
construction plan, with a greater effect of earthquake resistance and decreased usage
of reinforced materials, is desired. When fireproof buildings based on limited usage
- 25 -
of combustible materials are earthquake-resisted after considering the effects of an

increase in combustible materials on a fires characteristics, re-design may be
required depending on the results.
(b) Incombustibility of Interior Materials
Limitations for interior finishing for earthquake-resistance members should be
compulsory in accordance with the Building Standards Act. The members used in
interior surface areas must be fireproof materials such as noncombustible and
semi-noncombustible ones according to the use, size, and structure of the building.
Reinforced materials placed on the surface of members, containing a slight amount
of resin, have little risk of catching fire even when exposed at the surface of the
interior, but covering them with noncombustible materials is suggested even without
the application of limitations for interior finishing.
There are some methods to install interior materials, bonding them with adhesives,
placing them on the base of lightweight steel frames and painting them with mortar
after lathing. Work must be done to prevent the reinforced materials from being
damaged.
(c) Ensuring Structural Fireproofing
The Building Standards Act specifies that the thickness of cover concrete for
reinforcing bars of reinforced concrete bearing walls, columns, and beams will be
more than 3 cm. Fireproof, reinforced concrete members should also meet the
requirements for the thickness of cover concrete. In addition, the minimum
thickness of walls and the minimum minor diameter of columns and beams are
defined to ensure fireproofing efficiency. On the other hand, earthquake resistance
using continuous fiber-reinforced materials requires surface preparations including
the removal of concrete member finishes, cutting of a body concrete surface, and
chamfering of corner areas. With this preparation, for example, as shown in Figure
1.3-1, the cited cover thickness and size of the member section must be preserved.
If required, the members must be repaired with the application of mortar so that they
can meet the requirement for a given section size.
- 26 -
Chamfering
Shear Reinforcement
Longitudinal Reinforcement
Figure 1.3-1
Preserving Cover Thickness
Reinforced Material
Wall
Column
Wall
Mortar Backfill
Noncombustible
Figure 1.3-2
Ensuring Fireproofing Efficiency in Fireproof Sections
With reinforcing for completely mounted columns that form fireproof sections, due
to cutting slits in lapped areas of walls and columns and wrapping of reinforced
materials around columns, a fire might spread to the side of the room that is not
exposed through these slits or by the material burning. Therefore, to prevent a fire
from spreading, as shown in Figure 1.3-2, the slits must be completely backfilled
with mortar and concrete and then the surface of reinforced materials must be
covered with noncombustible materials including mortar.
(d) Fireproof Cover for Continuous Fiber-reinforced Materials
Notification No. 1675 of the Ministry of Construction, 1964, specified that RC and
SRC construction members meeting given requirements have a fireproof structure.
Continuous fiber-reinforced materials used for shear reinforcement have no
difficulties in structural strength for long-term loading even if heat from a fire causes
a deterioration in performance or they burn, since they do not contribute to the
support of continuing loads. Therefore, it is not generally necessary to place
- 27 -
fireproof covers on the surface. However, when the re-use of materials damaged by
fire is intended, fireproof covers will be placed on their surface to keep the
temperature of the reinforced materials in a fire below a temperature where their
performance might deteriorate. For example, reinforced materials using carbon
fibers as fiber and epoxy resins as impregnated-bond resins are considered to lose
tensile strength in heating hysteresis at approximately 260C. So, if the temperature
of the reinforced materials in a fire is kept below 260C, re-use will be possible.
These fireproof covers must be designed to ensure fireproofing efficiency while
meeting the size requirements of possible fires (fire duration, fire temperature, etc.).
In fact, adequate reinforced materials can receive fireproof covers in terms of 30
minutes to 3 hours for fireproofing performance in steel-encased fireproofing as
specified by the Minister of Construction. Any work to install fireproof covers, as
defined in (b), should be done to prevent the reinforced materials from be damaged.
Specified fireproof covers in steel-encased fireproofing are designed for
steel-encased members. For example, fireproof covers in 1-hour fireproofing do not
always posses the same 1-hour fire resistance efficiency for continuous
fiber-reinforced materials. According to a fireproofing test required to obtain the
designation as fireproof, the steel temperature limit of steel-encased members
averages about 350C for columns and beams. But, continuous fiber-reinforced
materials generally suffer degradation even in heating hysteresis at lower
temperatures.
For reference, when earthquake proof members are exposed to fires, even if they are
fireproof due to a coating, fireproof covers must be removed and the deterioration of
continuous fiber-reinforced materials must be studied, except when fire damage is
sensitive (the cover surface is contaminated with smoke).
(3) Repair and Reinforcement for Fire-damaged Materials
When members stiffened with continuous fiber-reinforced materials are subject to fires,
fire damage such as rising, peeling, burning, cracking of the body concrete and cracks
should be visually checked. If required, a tensile test for continuous fiber-reinforced
materials should be conducted.
If continuous fiber-reinforced materials suffer
deterioration, degraded areas should be removed and earthquake resistance should be
done again. When the fire damage also affects body concrete, repairs and reinforcing of
members per se is required, and work such as the removal of concrete, additional
placement of reinforcing bars, and additional casting of concrete will be done. In this
case, in place of repeating the same earthquake-resistance method, it would be more
efficient to plan the incorporation of repairs and reinforcement in earthquake resistance.
- 28 -

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association: Revised Edition, Standards for Evaluation of Seismic
Capacity and Comments for Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings, 1990.12
Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association: Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity and
Comments for Existing Steel-encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings, 1997.12
Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association, Japan Building Center : Regulation and its Comments on
the Law Promoting the Earthquake-proofing of Buildings, 1996.1
Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association: Revised Edition, Standards for Evaluation of Seismic
Capacity and Comments for Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings, 1990.12
Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association : Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity and
Comments for Existing Steel-encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings, 1997.12
Tomoaki Sugiyama, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Katsuhiko Nakano, and Hiroshi Fukuyama: Experimental
Research on the Performance of RC Non-structural Walls Strengthened with Carbon Fiber Sheets, Report
on Annual Papers in Concrete Engineering, Vo1.21, No.3, pp.1423-1428, 1999.7
- 29 -
Chapter 2
Characteristics of Continuous Fiber
Reinforcements
- 30 -
Chapter 2
Characteristics of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements
2.1 Characteristics of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements

2.1.1
Continuous Fiber Sheets and Continuous Fiber Reinforcements
Continuous fiber sheets are made using four different continuous fibers as shown in Table
2.1-1. The continuous fiber reinforcements are made by hardening them with impregnate
adhesive resin. The specified values, shown in Table 2.1-2, must be used for the
strengthening design and construction described in this guideline.
Table 2.1-1
Type of fiber
Sheet shape
Weight per unit
length
Carbon fiber
3400 MPa class
2900 MPa class
PAN-class high-strength type
Unidirectional reinforcement type
300 g/m2 or smaller
Table 2.1-2
Tensile strength
Youngs
modulus
Specifications of Continuous Fiber Sheets

Aramid fiber
Aramid 1
Aramid 2
Homopolymer
Copolymer
Unidirectional reinforcement type
623 g/m2 or
525 g/m2 or
smaller
smaller
Specifications of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements
Carbon fiber
Aramid fiber
3400 MPa class 2900 Mpa class
Aramid 1
Aramid 2
2900
MPa
2060
MPa
2350
MPa
3400 MPa
(24,000 kgf/cm2)
(35,000 kgf/cm2) (30,000 kgf/cm2) (21,000 kgf/cm2)
118 GPa
78 GPa
230 GPa
(1.20 106 kgf/cm2) (0.80 106 kgf/cm2)
(2.34 106 kgf/cm2)
If materials other than the continuous fiber sheets shown in Table 2.1-1 are used, the
characteristics of such materials must be examined thoroughly based on Section 2.2,
Evaluating the characteristics of continuous fiber reinforcements and strengthening design
and construction must be done using design and construction methods verified by
experiments.
Comments:
(1) Specifications of continuous fiber sheets

Chapter 3 and subsequent chapters describe continuous fiber sheets and reinforcements
that meet the specifications shown in Tables 2.1-1 and 2.1-2. They already have a good
track record, and the impregnating ability of resin, workability, adhesion performance,
material characteristics, strengthening performance, and so forth have been verified.
- 31 -
Various types of carbon fiber sheet of different tensile strength and Youngs moduli have
so far been made. This guideline describes only the PAN-class high-strength carbon
fiber sheets because their strengthening effects have been experimentally demonstrated.
For aramid fibers, this guideline describes both aramid 1 (homopolymer) and aramid 2
(copolymer).
Table 2.1-3
Type of fiber
Tensile strength*
Youngs
modulus*
Weight per unit
length
Fiber density
Quality Standards for Continuous Fiber Reinforcements
Carbon fiber
3400 MPa class
2900 MPa class
PAN-class high-strength type
2900 MPa or
3400 MPa or
greater
greater
(35,000 kgf/cm2) (30,000 kgf/cm2)
+45
23015 GPa
(2.34 106 kgf/cm2)
+0.45
0.15
Aramid fiber
Aramid 1
Aramid 2
Homopolymer
Copolymer
2060 MPa or
2350 MPa or
greater
greater
(21,000 kgf/cm2) (24,000 kgf/cm2)
7815 GPa
11820 GPa
(1.200.2 106 (0.800.15 106
kgf/cm2)
kgf/cm2)
To be greater than values shown on products

1.800.05
1.450.05
1.390.05
* Quality standard values of tensile strength and Youngs modulus are used to assess the results of
normal-condition tests but also heating and alkali immersion tests.
Table 2.1-4
Shapes of Continuous Fiber Sheets
(a) A bundle of continuous fibers is placed on a sheet of paper. The shape of the fibers
is retained using a small amount of resin and shape-retaining meshes.
(b) Shape-retaining meshes with adhesives are placed on both sides or one side of a
bundle of continuous fibers.
(c) The shape of a bundle of continuous fibers is retained in the form of fabrics using
glass and nylon fibers.
(d) Nonwoven fabric made with thermoplastic resin is heat sealed on both sides or one
side of a bundle of continuous fibers.
Tables 2.1-3 and 2.1-4 show the quality standards for continuous fiber reinforcements and
the shapes of continuous fiber sheets respectively. The properties of continuous fiber
reinforcements include the density of continuous fibers, the weight per unit length of
continuous fiber sheets and the tensile strength and Youngs modulus of continuous fiber
reinforcements. It is required that the specified tensile strength and Youngs modulus
values of continuous fiber reinforcements remain unchanged after being subjected to
heating and alkali immersion tests. The heating method and alkali immersion test
conditions are shown in Section 2.2. The shapes of continuous fiber sheets are
classified into four types, as shown in Table 2.1-4. All four types are unidirectionally
- 32 -
reinforced sheets and are already used in actual applications; the resin impregnating
ability, workability and strengthening performance have already been verified. The
weight per unit length of continuous fiber sheets affects the impregnating ability and
bond performance of resin, as in the case of the shape. In this guideline, continuous
fiber sheets having the weight per unit length shown in Table 2.1-1 are used because the
strengthening performance of those in this weight range has already been verified.
Table 2.1-5
Name
Carbon fiber
sheets
Aramid fiber
sheets
(aramid 1)
Aramid fiber
sheets
(aramid 2)
3400 MPa
class
2900 MPa
class
40-ton type
60-ton type
90-ton type
40-ton type
60-ton type
90-ton type
Specifications of Continuous Fiber Sheets
Weight per
unit length
(g/m2)
Design
thickness
(mm)
Sheet
width
(mm)
Specified tensile
strength*
200
300
200
300
280
415
623
235
350
525
0.111
0.167
0.111
0.167
0.193
0.286
0.430
0.169
0.252
0.378
250
3400 MPa
(35,000 kgf/cm2)
330
500
100
2900 MPa
(30,000 kgf/cm2)
Specified Youngs
modulus*
230 GPa
(2.34 106
kgf/cm2)
2060 MPa
(21,000 kgf/cm2)
118 GPa
(1.20 106
kgf/cm2)
2350 MPa
(24,000 kgf/cm2)
78 GPa
(0.80 106
kgf/cm2)
300
500
* This tensile strength is not for continuous fiber sheet but for continuous fiber reinforcement.
For presently manufactured carbon and aramid fiber sheets, those that meet the specifications
in Tables 2.1-1 and 2.1-2 are shown in Table 2.1-5. Carbon fiber sheets are classified based
on the tensile strength of fiber, while aramid fiber sheets are named based on the tensile
strength of a sheet having a width of one meter. They are further classified based on weight
per unit length and named accordingly. Although sheets of up to 50 cm in width are
available, the larger the sheet width, the more creases they have. It is important to choose an
appropriate sheet width after due consideration of the workability.
(2) Specifications of continuous fiber reinforcements
The specifications for continuous fiber reinforcements shown in Table 2.1-2 are specified
design values applicable for continuous fiber reinforcements that meet the standards
shown in Table 2.1-3. In this guideline, tensile strength, Youngs modulus and other
mechanical characteristics correspond to continuous fiber reinforcements that are made
by impregnating fibers in resin and hardening them. This is based on the understanding
that the performance of continuous fiber reinforcements hardened with impregnate
adhesive resin is more important than the mechanical characteristics of continuous fibers
themselves. A continuous fiber reinforcement is a composite material of a continuous
fiber sheet and impregnate adhesive resin. If a certain continuous fiber reinforcement is
- 33 -
made with the same continuous fiber sheet but different impregnate adhesive resin is used,
this continuous fiber reinforcement must be considered as a different material. Tables
2.1-2 and 2.1-5 show the tensile strength and Youngs modulus of continuous fiber
reinforcements made of epoxy resin, methacrylate resin and continuous fiber sheets
which are described in Section 2.1.2, Impregnate adhesive resin.
The specified values shown in Table 2.1-2 are based on data obtained from the results of
tensile strength tests conducted on 50 specimens in accordance with the tensile test
methods described in Section 2.2, Evaluating the material characteristics of continuous
fiber reinforcements. Specifically, as the tensile strength value, a value less than the
one obtained by subtracting the number three times as large as the standard deviation
from the average tensile strength value is adopted in consideration of variations in
material characteristics. As the Youngs modulus, average values are adopted. The
specified tensile strength shown in this table is the specified value of a material. It is
also understood as the tensile strength having a certain safety margin defined with
consideration given to material variations, which is sometimes referred to as the
guaranteed tensile strength.
When an external force is applied to a member reinforced with continuous fiber
reinforcement made of continuous fiber sheet, the stress intensity acting on this
continuous fiber reinforcement varies, depending on the type of continuous fiber sheet,
where the reinforcement is installed and the reinforcement method. In ultimate load
conditions, the specified full tensile strength of the continuous fiber reinforcement is not
necessarily delivered. Therefore, the design tensile strength values for continuous fiber
reinforcements shown in Chapter 3 and subsequent chapters have been established by
reducing the specified tensile strength values after considering of safety margins.
2.1.2
Impregnate Adhesive Resin
As impregnate adhesive resin either epoxy or methacrylate resin should be used. A type of
resin that can be efficiently integrated with the continuous fiber sheet and increase the
combined strength effectively must be used. Epoxy resin is used as impregnate adhesive
resin to be applied to carbon or aramid fiber sheets. Methacrylate resin is used as
impregnate adhesive resin to be applied to carbon fiber sheets.
If types of resin other than these are used, the material characteristics should be identified
thoroughly and strengthening design and construction should be done using appropriate
design and construction methods established based on experiments.
- 34 -
Comment:
The functions of adhesive resin impregnated and hardened inside the continuous fiber sheet
are to enable the continuous fiber reinforcement to function as a reinforced composite
material by transferring stress among continuous fibers, and to transfer stress between the
continuous fiber reinforcement and a reinforced structure. To enable impregnate adhesive
resin to deliver the designed dynamic and strength characteristics, it must be thoroughly
impregnated and hardened inside all cavities in the continuous fiber sheet.
There are example applications for epoxy and methacrylate resins as impregnate adhesive
resin. The performance of these two resins when they are applied to continuous fiber sheets
for reinforcement has been verified. Epoxy resin has so far been widely used as impregnate
adhesive resin but methacrylate resin is also being increasingly used because it hardens more
quickly than epoxy resin and is suited for use in cold environments.
Tables 2.1-6 and 2.1-7 show the quality standards for impregnating adhesive epoxy and
methacrylate resins respectively. These quality standards show weight, viscosity and other
characteristics which greatly affect useful life, workability and construction management,
tensile strength after hardening, compression strength, Youngs modulus of compression and
other mechanical characteristics. Because both impregnate adhesive resins are integrated
with the continuous fiber sheets to achieve the specified strength, their quality must be
inspected carefully; if suspended solids, deposits or solids are found, the impregnate adhesive
resin must be rejected, despite of whether it is a base or a hardening agent.
- 35 -
Table 2.1-6
Quality Standards for Impregnating Adhesive Epoxy Resins

Specified value
Unit
Test
conditions
Appearance
Weight
23 for 7 days
Test item
Useful life
Viscosity
Initial hardenability
Tensile strength
Bending strength
Compression strength
Youngs modulus of
compression
Tensile strength of a
lapped joint
Bending and adhesive
strength at low
temperatures
Mass
Heat
change
Volume
Table 2.1-7
Test item
Appearance
Weight
Hardening time
Viscosity
Tensile strength
Tensile elongation
Bending strength
Compression
strength
Youngs modulus of
compression
Tensile strength of a
lapped joint
General-purpose
resin
Resin to be used
in winter
No defects in appearance must be

found
Indications shown on resin products
Test method
JIS K6833
JIS K7112
Minute
5 or 23
How to increase
temperature
Pa s
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
5 or 23
5 or 23
23 for 7 days
23 for 7 days
23 for 7 days

30 or greater
40 or greater
70 or greater
JIS K7117
JIS A6024
JIS K7113
JIS K7203
JIS K7208
MPa
23 for 7 days
1,500 or greater
JIS K7208
MPa
23 for 7 days
To be greater than the breaking

strength of members other than the
lapped joint and the specified tensile
strength of the corresponding
continuous fiber reinforcement
JIS K6850
MPa
5 for 14 days
%
%
3 or greater
5 or smaller
5 or smaller
JIS A6024
JIS A6024
JIS A6024
Quality Standards for Impregnating Adhesive Methacrylate Resin

Specified value
Test method
Test
conditions
23
No defects in appearance must be found

JIS K6833
JIS K7112
Minute
23
How to increase
temperature
Pa s
MPa
%
MPa
23
23
23
23

20 or greater
26
25 or greater
JIS K7117
JIS K7113
JIS K7113
JIS K7203
MPa
23
50 or greater
JIS K7208
MPa
23
800 or greater
JIS K7208
23
To be greater than the breaking strength

of members other than the lapped joint
and the specified tensile strength of the
corresponding continuous fiber
reinforcement
JIS K6850
Unit
MPa
- 36 -
Because weight, viscosity and useful life values have no correlation with the basic physical
properties of impregnate adhesive resin, it was decided that they should be shown on resin
products. In choosing the most appropriate epoxy resin for a working environment or a
specific type of continuous fiber sheet, the ambient temperature at which it is to be used
should be considered. Namely, general-purpose epoxy resin should be used at around 23
and epoxy resin designed specifically for winter should be used at around 5. This
temperature is shown on resin products. Viscosity is listed as one of the quality-related
items affecting work efficiency. If a design requirement is to avoid sagging, epoxy resin of
higher viscosity should be used. If smooth impregnation into a continuous fiber sheet is an
important design requirement, one of lower viscosity should be used. In general, sagging
can be avoided at the expense of impregnating ability. It is necessary to choose the most
appropriate epoxy resin after considering the type of sheet, weight per unit length and the
portion where the continuous fiber reinforcement is to be installed.
Methacrylate resin hardens very quickly and generates heat during hardening. Sometimes, a
continuous fiber sheet integrated with methacrylate resin hardened while generating excessive
heat cannot be used as a product. When this resin is applied to a large-size sheet, such as a
test piece used for a compression strength test, several sheets must be laminated to prevent the
resin from overheating. Therefore, it is difficult to conduct this test during day to day
quality control operations. The compression strength values for methacrylate resin shown in
Table 2.1-9 are used for everyday quality control operations and are shown here for
information only.
Combinations of impregnate adhesive resin and continuous fiber sheets were studied based on
actual application records, and it was decided in this guideline to use carbon fiber sheets with
epoxy and methacrylate resins, and to use aramid fiber sheets with epoxy resin. Although
there the combination of an aramid fiber sheet and methacrylate resin will not cause a
problem, there are no available records of actual application. In using this combination,
therefore, it is necessary to thoroughly examine their material characteristics, workability and
strengthening effects.
2.1.3
Primers
As a primer, an epoxy resin primer or a methacrylate resin primer that enables a high level of
workability and strength must be used so that the continuous fiber reinforcement can be
securely bonded to the structure to be reinforced.
- 37 -
Comment:
A primer is applied to the structure to be reinforced before the continuous fiber sheet is
attached to it. It permeates through the surface of concrete to reinforce the concrete surface.
After it adheres to impregnate adhesive resin, the continuous fiber reinforcement can be
firmly bonded to the concrete. As primers, epoxy and methacrylate resin primers are
currently used. Tables 2.1-8 and 2.1-9 show their quality standards.
Impregnating adhesive methacrylate resin cannot be used in combination with epoxy resin.
If it is used, problems in the hardening process, may occur resulting in a defective product.
Therefore, a primer and impregnate adhesive resin of the same epoxy resin type must be used.
Table 2.1-8
Test item
Quality Standards for Epoxy Resin Primers
Unit
Test condition
Appearance
Useful life
Minute
23
Interval between coats
Minute
23
Standard
Adhesive
strength
Repetition
of drying
and water
immersion
Alkali
water
immersion
23 for 7 days
MPa
After the standard hardening

process, a primer is immersed
for 4 hours in water at 23 and
exposed for 20 hours to 65%
air at 60. This cycle is
repeated 4 times.
To be immersed for 48 hours
in a saturated calcium
hydroxide solution at 23
- 38 -
Specified value
No defects in the
appearance must
be found.
Indications shown
on primers
Indications shown
on primers
Broken base coat
or more than 1.5
Broken base coat

or more than 1.2
Broken base coat

or more than 1.2
Test method
JIS K6833
JIS K5400
JIS A6916
JIS A6916
To comply
with JIS
A5548
Table 2.1-9
Test item
Quality Standards for Methacrylate Resin Primers
Unit
Test condition
Appearance
Weight
23
Pa s
23
Minute
23
Viscosity
Hardening time
Standard
Repetition
of drying
and water
immersion
Adhesive
strength
Alkali
water
immersion
2.1.4
23 for 7 days
MPa
After the standard hardening

process, a primer is immersed
for 4 hours in water at 23 and
exposed for 20 hours to 65%
air at 60. This cycle is
repeated 4 times.
To be immersed for 48 hours
in a saturated calcium
hydroxide solution at 23
Specified value
No defects in the
appearance must
be found
Indications shown
on primers
Indications shown
on primers
Indications shown
on primers
Broken base coat
or more than 1.5
Broken base coat

or more than 1.2
Test method
JIS K6833
JIS K6833
JIS K7117
JIS A6916
JIS A6916
To comply
with JIS
A5548
Broken base coat

or more than 1.2
Ground Mending Materials
Ground mending materials are used to mend uneven parts on the surface of concrete of an
existing structure. Important points to note when selecting a proper ground mending
material are the workability and strength characteristics which allow the continuous fiber
reinforcement to be firmly bonded to the structure to be reinforced.
Comment:
If a sharp protrusion, a level difference, a offset hole, or unevenness is found on the ground of
an existing concrete structure during strengthening work, the continuous fiber sheet may be
damaged, and float or blisters may occur, thus reducing the strengthening effect. In this case,
a coat of this ground mending material of less than several millimeters in thickness is applied
to repair such defects. As ground mending materials, cement material, epoxy resin and
methacrylate resin are used. Tables 2.1-10, 2.1-11 and 2.1-12 show the quality standards for
these ground mending materials.
If a ground mending material, impregnate adhesive resin and a primer are not all of the same
resin type, imperfect adhesion or other problems may occur. In principle, a cement-type
ground mending material or one made with the same resin type as that used for impregnate
adhesive resin and a primer must be used.
- 39 -
Table 2.1-10
Quality Standards for Cement-Type Ground Mending Materials
Test item
Mass per unit volume
Softness change
Resistance to crazing
Standard
Adhesive
strength
Durability
Table 2.1-11
Unit
kg/l
%
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
Standard value
Indications shown on products
20 or less
There must be no crazing
Test method
JIS A1174
JIS A6916
JIS A6916
1.0 (10.2) or higher
JIS A6916
JIS A6916
Quality Standards for Epoxy Resin Ground Mending Materials

Standard value
Mending material to
be used at low
temperature
Test item
Unit
Weight (hardened material)
JIS K7112
Minute
How to increase
temperature
Useful life
Standard
Adhesive
strength
Low
temperature
Durability
Shrinking percentage after

hardening
Table 2.1-12
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
General-purpose
mending material
1.0 (10.2) or
higher
1.0 (10.2) or
higher
JIS A6919
3 or lower
JIS A6024
Quality Standards for Methacrylate Resin Ground Mending Materials
Test item
Appearance
Weight
Standard value
No defects in the appearance must
be found
Minute
Hardening time
Adhesive
strength
Test method
Standard
Durability
Unit
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
Test method
How to increase
temperature
JIS K6833
JIS K7112

JIS A6916
- 40 -
2.1.5
Cross Section Repair Materials
Cross section repair materials are used to repair defects found in the cross section of an
existing structure. They must have enough strength and characteristics that allow the repair
work to be done efficiently.
However, the use of cross section repair materials should be limited to relatively minor
defects in the cross section. If a defect that may cause loss of structural safety of a structure
is found, the separate specified repair and reinforcement procedures must first be followed
and then the procedure described in this guideline must be performed.
Comment:
If offset hole, honeycomb or edge chips that cannot be mended with the ground mending
materials are found, base concrete or a material having the same or higher strength should be
used to repair a cross section. In this guideline, cross section mending materials are used to
repair relatively minor defects in a cross section. If a large craze, a noticeable chipping, rust
on reinforcing bars or any other defect that may cause loss of structural safety of a structure is
found, the specified repair and reinforcement procedures must first be followed. Then the
procedure described in this guideline must be performed.
As cross section repair materials, cement-type, epoxy resin-type or methacrylate resin-type
mortar can be used. Tables 2.1-13, 2.1-14 and 2.1-15 show the quality standards of these
types of mortar. If the resin-type cross section repair material is used, the resin type of
impregnate adhesive resin, a primer, a ground mending material and this cross section repair
material must be the same. Otherwise, imperfect adhesion and other problems may occur.
- 41 -
Table 2.1-13
Quality Standards for Cement-Type Cross Section Repair Materials
Test item
Amount of
sagging
Sagging
Surface
conditions
Resistance-to-crazing
characteristics
Bending strength
Adhesion
strength
Standard
Durability
Length change
Table 2.1-14
Unit
kg/l
Standard value
Indications on products
mm
5 or smaller
JIS A6916
5.0 (51) or greater
JIS R5201
25.0 (250) or greater
JIS R5201
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
%
Test method
JIS A1174
Test method specified in the
Guideline for Building Repair
Work Management supervised
by Chief Cabinet Secretary of
the Minister of Construction
1.0 (10.2) or greater

JIS A6916
0.15 or smaller
JIS A6916
Quality standards for epoxy resin-type cross section repair materials

Standard value
Test item
Useful life
Sagging
Bending strength
Standard
Adhesion
strength
Low
temperature
Durability
Shrinking percentage
after hardening
Unit
General-purpo
se material
Material to be
used at low
temperature
kg/l
Minute
The shape must be free of

defects. There must be
no sagging.
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
%
Test method
JIS A1174
How to increase temperature
JIS R5201
JIS R5201
1.0 (10.2)
or greater
1.0 (10.2)
or greater
JIS A6916

3 or lower
- 42 -
JIS A6024
Table 2.1-15
Quality Standards for Methacrylate Resin-Type Cross Section Repair Materials
Test item
Hardening time
Sagging
Bending strength
Adhesion
strength
Standard
Durability
Unit
kg/l
Minute
Amount
of sagging
Standard value
Test method
JIS A6916
How to increase temperature
5 mm or smaller
Surface
There
must
be
no
sagging.
conditions
MPa
JIS R5201
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
JIS R5201
(kgf/cm2)
MPa
(kgf/cm2)
JIS A6916
MPa
1.0
(10.2)
or
greater
2
(kgf/cm )
%
5 or smaller
Shrinking percentage
after hardening
2.2 How to Evaluate

Reinforcement
the
Material
Characteristics
JIS A6916
of
Continuous
Fiber
To ensure the strengthening performance, workability and durability of continuous fiber

reinforcements, proper test methods must be chosen after assessment of the section to be
strengthened, strengthening details, operating environment and other factors. Material
characteristics must be verified for each different combination of continuous fiber sheets and
impregnate adhesive resin.
Comment:
As described in the previous section, continuous fiber sheets, impregnate adhesive resin,
primers, ground mending materials and cross section repair materials are used in continuous
fiber strengthening work. As shown in Tables 2.1-6 to 2.1-15, the test methods for all
materials except continuous fiber sheets are already specified in JIS and other standards, or
their material characteristics can be evaluated using the test methods specified in JIS and
other standards. For continuous fiber reinforcements made with continuous fiber sheets and
impregnate adhesive resin, the test method for evaluating their material characteristics has not
yet been established. The reason is that they are relatively new structural materials and there
are too many detailed characteristics to be evaluated, including the sections to be strengthened.
In order to evaluate the strengthening performance of continuous fiber reinforcements and
construct the design method, strengthening effects must be verified by conducting structural
experiments, and material characteristics must be clarified by using standardized material test
- 43 -
methods. This section describes the methods for testing the weight per unit length of
continuous fiber sheets and the mechanical characteristics and durability of continuous fiber
reinforcements, which are considered to be the most basic material characteristics of
continuous fiber reinforcements. Also, Appendix 5 shows examples of material test
methods.
(1) Weight per unit length of continuous fiber sheet
The weight per unit length of continuous fiber sheet is related to the impregnating ability
of impregnate adhesive resin, adhesion to a structure and adhesion between the
continuous fiber reinforcements. It affects the strength characteristics of the continuous
fiber reinforcements and the strengthening performance of members. Therefore, it is
necessary to use continuous fiber sheet of weight per unit length whose performance has
been verified through material tests and member experiments. In general, the heavier
the weight per unit length, the lower the strength utilization factor of continuous fibers
and the lower the ability of resin to impregnate into the continuous fiber sheets. If the
weight per unit length is inappropriate, the continuous fiber reinforcements may not be
able to deliver their specified strength characteristics. Therefore, it is necessary to use
continuous fiber sheet having weight per unit length that meets the quality standard. As
specified in JIS L1096, the weight per unit length of continuous fiber sheet is the weight
per specified area of continuous fibers. If sizing materials are used as in the case of
carbon fiber sheet, it is necessary to exclude their weight. This particular test method is
specified in JIS R7062 and JIS K7071. For continuous fiber sheet made by retaining the
shape of continuous fiber bundles with a small amount of resin or that made by retaining
the shape using shape-retaining meshes with adhesive, it is necessary to exclude the
weight of resin contained in continuous fiber bundles.
(2) Tensile characteristics of continuous fiber reinforcements
In the case of the continuous fiber reinforcement method, the resistance of
unidirectionally oriented continuous fibers to tensile force is used to advantage. Such
tensile characteristics as tensile strength and Youngs modulus are the most basic
characteristic values of continuous fiber reinforcements.
To check the tensile
characteristics of continuous fiber reinforcements, the tensile test method for carbon fiber
reinforced plastics (JIS K7073) has so far been used (see Appendix 5.1). Also, as a test
method that can be used for continuous fiber reinforcements having larger weight per unit
length, the tensile test method (draft) for continuous fiber sheets1) is proposed by the
Japan Concrete Institute (see Appendix 5.2).
specimen used for these tensile tests.
- 44 -
Figure 2.2-1 shows the shape of the
Test methods specified in JIS K7073 and proposed by JCI use a specimen of 12.5 mm in
width. Because the tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements is greatly
influenced by the width of a specimen, it is important to evaluate the tensile strength
characteristics using specimens of the same size. In either test method, the number of
specimens is defined as five or more pieces. When using any of these test methods as
part of everyday quality control operations, this number may be appropriate. When
determining the specified tensile strength value for continuous fiber reinforcement,
however, more specimens must be used to evaluate material variations. In this guideline,
based on the results of tensile tests conducted on 50 specimens, a value smaller than the
one obtained by subtracting the number three times as large as the standard deviation
from the average tensile strength value is defined as the specified tensile strength value,
in consideration of variations in material characteristics. Also, the average value
obtained from these tests is defined as the specified Young modulus.
Overall length of a specimen
Gauge length
Tabs
Continuous fiber reinforcements

Width of a specimen
Fig. 2.2-1
Shape of the Specimen Used for a Tensile Test
(3) Adhesion characteristics of continuous fiber reinforcements

The characteristics of the adhesion of the continuous fiber reinforcement to the concrete
of a structure greatly affects the strengthening performance of the continuous fiber sheet.
The results of experiments show that the strengthening effect markedly declines if the
continuous fiber reinforcement imperfectly adheres to a structure. As a test method for
checking the characteristics of the adhesion of the continuous fiber reinforcement to the
concrete of a structure, the Ken Ken style tensile strength test method has been
commonly used. This method complies with the method for testing the adhesion of wall
coating materials used for construction, which is specified in JIS A6909. It is used for
verifying the out-of-plane tensile and adhesion strength between the continuous fiber
reinforcement and concrete. On the other hand, a stress acting between the continuous
fiber reinforcement and concrete is mainly tensile shearing force and, therefore, it can be
more directly evaluated by measuring the tensile shearing adhesion strength. As this
test method, the method for testing adhesion of a continuous fiber sheet to concrete
using tensile tests (draft)1) is proposed by the Japan Concrete Institute.
- 45 -
When continuous fiber sheets are glued to each other to form a multiple-layer structure,
the strength of adhesion between the continuous fiber reinforcements is important. As
in the case of the strength of adhesion between the continuous fiber reinforcement and
concrete, that between the continuous fiber reinforcements themselves is a deciding
factor not only in achieving the expected strengthening effect of the continuous fiber
reinforcements but also in determining the length of a lapped joint on the continuous fiber
reinforcements. The shearing, tensile and adhesion test method is used to evaluate the
length of a lapped joint when shearing and tensile stress is applied to the continuous fiber
reinforcements. As shown in Fig. 2.2-2, this method is basically the tensile test. Using
this method, stress is applied to a specimen having a lapped joint where the continuous
fiber reinforcements meet and the tensile strength of this specimen is measured when
base materials other than the lapped joint are broken. Based on the tensile strength
measured this way, the length of the lapped joint can be determined. Although a test
method for determining the shearing, tensile and adhesion strength of the continuous
fiber reinforcements is necessary, it has not yet been standardized. Because the shearing,
tensile and adhesion strength are influenced by the size of a specimen and the length of
the lapped joint, test conditions must be clearly shown when providing relevant data.
For the continuous fiber sheets shown in Tables 2.1-1, 2.1-2 and 2.1-3 and the continuous
fiber reinforcements using impregnate adhesive resin shown in Tables 2.1-6 and 2.1-7,
the values described in Section 3.4.2, Fixing the sheet end should be adopted as the
length of the lapped joint.
Overall length of a specimen
Gauge length
Tabs
Length of the
lapped portion
Support member
Continuous fiber reinforcements

Width of a specimen
Fig. 2.2-2
Shape of the Specimen for Lapped Joint Test
(4) Tensile strength of the bent portion of continuous fiber reinforcement

When attaching the continuous fiber sheet to the corner of a structure, the continuous
fiber reinforcement has a bent portion. Because it is a unidirectionally oriented
reinforcing material, the bent portion may be less resistant to tensile stress than the
straight portion. The strength of the bent portion, therefore, must be carefully examined
to prevent the continuous fiber reinforcement from breaking at this particular portion.
The tensile strength of this bent portion varies, depending on the type of fiber, weight per
- 46 -
unit length, radius of the bent portion and other factors. It must be evaluated with
consideration given to the details of the reinforcements used.
Various test methods can be used to evaluate the tensile strength of the bent portion of the
continuous fiber reinforcement. Figures 2.2-3 and 2.2-4 show presently used test
methods. Figure 2.2-3 shows the method of measuring the tensile strength by setting a
continuous fiber reinforcement on a jig shaped like the corner of a structure and pushing
open the inside jack. Figure 2.2-4 shows the method of measuring it by fixing one end
of a continuous fiber reinforcement and applying tensile stress to the other end via a jig
shaped like the corner of a structure. By using these test methods, the shape of the
corner must be determined so that the tensile strength of the bent portion is more than the
design tensile strength.
The tensile strength of the bent portion of the continuous fiber reinforcement is not
specified in this guideline. For continuous fiber reinforcements using the continuous
fiber sheet shown in Tables 2.1-1, 2.1-2 and 2.1-3 and the one using impregnate adhesive
resin shown in Tables 2.1-6 and 2.1-7, the radius of the corner is defined as 20 mm or
larger for carbon fiber sheets and as 10 mm or larger for aramid fiber sheets, as shown in
Section 3.1.2, Strengthening work method and structural details. It has been verified
that if the corner is designed based on these radius values, the bent portion can withstand
the design tensile stress with a sufficient margin.
Continuous fiber
reinforcement
Jack
Tab
Corner jig
Corner jig
Continuous fiber
Pin reinforcement
Fig. 2.2-3 Method of conducting a tensile

test on the bent portion
Fig. 2.2-4 Method of conducting a tensile

test on the bent portion
(5) Heat resistance and durability of continuous fiber reinforcement

Test methods for evaluating the strength and heat resistance of the continuous fiber
reinforcement used at specified operating temperatures have not yet been standardized.
Assuming specific temperatures based on applications and environments, the tensile
strength is measured after heat is applied or it is measured when the temperature is rising
to evaluate the heat resistance characteristics.
Although the continuous fiber
reinforcement does not come in direct contact with the concrete of a structure, it may be
- 47 -
exposed to alkali if mortar is used for finishing. Test methods for evaluating the alkali
resistance have not yet been standardized. In conducting alkali resistance tests, it is
important to use the alkaline solution concentration and promoting temperature
conditions suitable for each environment. In this guideline, the tensile characteristics
after heat and alkali immersion tests are specified as one of the quality standards to
ensure that the quality of the continuous fiber reinforcement is satisfactory; specific
environments in which the continuous fiber reinforcement is used are not taken into
consideration. Specifically, a specimen is subjected first to the following tests and then
to tensile tests. Tensile strength and Youngs modulus are measured.
Heat test:
Alkali immersion test:
A specimen is left to stand at ambient temperature of 80C

for two weeks.
A specimen is immersed in a saturated sodium hydroxide
solution maintained at 23C for one week.
It is also necessary to evaluate the weather resistance of the continuous fiber

reinforcement, such as deterioration by ultraviolet rays, depending on the environment in
which it is used. Although the weather resistance can be evaluated in accordance with
JIS A1415 Accelerated exposure test for plastic building materials, exposure hours and
other test conditions must be determined after due consideration of the type of finishing
material, the environment and other factors. Also, it may be necessary to conduct
material experiments and evaluate the weather resistance and fatigue characteristics of the
adhesion of the continuous fiber reinforcement to concrete, chemical resistance and other
characteristics, depending on the environment in which the continuous fiber
reinforcement is used.
<References>
1)
Continuous fiber reinforced concrete committee report II by the Japan Concrete Institute, 1998
- 48 -
Chapter 3
Design of Reinforcing Members and
Parts
- 49 -
Chapter 3
Design of Reinforcing Members and Parts
3.1 Strengthening of Independent Reinforced Concrete (RC) Columns

3.1.1
Overview
The strengthening of existing independent RC columns with continuous fiber reinforcements

aims to improve the ultimate seismic performance of buildings by increasing their shear
strength and preventing shear.
[Comments]
Similar benefits as when using hoop reinforcement is obtained by the method of improving
seismic performance by placing continuous fiber reinforcements around existing independent
reinforced concrete (RC) columns. The strengthening of columns aims to increase their shear
strength and toughness to improve the flexural yield against failure, which lead to improving
the seismic property of the entire building. Due to the fact that continuous fiber
reinforcements are placed around the columns, lateral restraint and great toughness are
achieved, which is comparable to the use of steel plates. Thereby, this technique is effective
for strengthening columns adjacent to walls on lower floors which receive greater axial force,
as well as for classified under the Second Class structural element.
When columns adjacent to low partitions or fascias receive transversal force, the portion of
the columns without strengthening might collapse even though the portions of columns
non-adjacent to walls are reinforced.1) In this case, cuts should be done so that the entire
columns can be reinforced by wrapping them with fiber reinforcing material. It is not allowed
to strengthen only the non-adjacent to parts walls by continuous fiber reinforcements.
3.1.2
Strengthening Methods and Structural Detailing
In principle, the method for strengthening independent reinforced concrete columns by

wrapping them with continuous fiber reinforcements them shall comply with the following
methods and structural details:
(1) Place continuous fiber reinforcements without waviness around columns with the
direction of fiber perpendicular to the longitudinal axes of members.
(2) Overlap continuous fiber reinforcements so that breakage of base materials is ensured.
- 51 -
(3) Impregnate continuous fiber reinforcements with adhesive resins so that the materials
are united with the adhesives in order to adhere to existing concrete surfaces. In
principle, remove finishing materials over existing columns.
(4) Round the corners of columns to avoid the breakage of the continuous fiber
reinforcements at lower strength value than the standard tensile strength of the
continuous fiber reinforcements. Especial care is required to avoid that continuous
fiber reinforcements are exposed to areas of high concentrations of stress or direct
shear.
(5) The shear reinforcement (pwf fd) of continuous fiber reinforcements shall be 0.04 Fc
to 0.8 MPa.
[Comments]
The retrofitting strategy shall ensure that the design strength and Youngs modulus are met by
the use at continuous fiber reinforcements. Since this technique susceptible to be affected by
the installation process or finishing materials unlike strengthening with steel plates, steel
strips or steel reinforcing bars against shear, it is essential to design and construct according to
the standard construction and management methods described in 3.4. Considerations and
Part 4.
(1) Installation of continuous fiber reinforcements
The effective strengthening design is based on the proper installation of continuous fiber
reinforcements almost perpendicular to the longitudinal axes of the members of columns.
Thereby, when the direction of the fiber is at a considerable angle to the axes of the
column members, calculate the shear reinforcement ratio of continuous fiber reinforcing
members according to the inclined angles of the positive and negative directions of shear
force.
If continuous fiber reinforcements show waviness, the strength efficiency decreases
because the actual Youngs modulus and strength of continuous fiber reinforcements will
not be met. Thereby, the concrete surfaces, where continuous fiber sheets will be placed,
shall be smooth and shall not be allowed to show waves during the installation process.
When continuous fiber reinforcements are placed continuously when columns are
wrapped and thoroughly around columns, each sheet ensures adhesion as shear
reinforcement, confines the concrete and improves toughness due to the effect of
restraining the buckling of the main reinforcement of columns. Even though the obtained
shear reinforcement may be sufficient, it is essential to avoid placing continuous fiber
reinforcements in fragments along columns lengthwise. This is recommended to avoid
- 52 -
partial deformation due to cracked openings. Continuous fiber reinforcements should be

evenly placed all around the columns.
(2) Anchorage and fittings of continuous fiber reinforcements
The results of previous investigations confirmed that breakage of base materials was
ensured if the continuous fiber reinforcements covered in this guideline, are overlapped
by 100 mm or more with each other and placed with adhesives. For safety it is
recommended, the overlapping length of 200 mm or more (300 or more for aramid fiber
of 90 tons). For details of overlapping lengths, refer to Table 3.4.2-1. It is also
recommended not to place overlapping areas on any particular plane but to scatter the
overlaps over each plane.
(3) Adhesion of continuous fiber reinforcements and existing concrete surfaces
It is important to harden continuous fiber reinforcements with resins to maximize the
tension force as reinforcing materials. The fiber is extremely thin and prevents failures
caused by low strength when continuous fiber reinforcements are unified with resin
impregnating. In general, continuous fiber reinforcements debond from concrete surfaces
at the time of ultimate shear failure. However, previous experimental programs have
shown that the shear strength and stiffness of columns decreased when they were not
adhered in the first place compared to the adhered ones.
In principle, continuous fiber reinforcements should be adhered to the concrete surfaces
of columns. However, if continuous fiber reinforcements have to be placed around the
finishing materials of columns intact due to the conditions of construction, refer to Table
3.4.1-1.
Any existing cracks should be injected before the strengthening to unify the surfaces of
columns, substrates and continuous fiber reinforcements.
(4) Application around the corners of columns
If continuous fiber reinforcements are bent sharply around the corners of columns, the
continuous fibers will be damaged and may break of a low strength level. Therefore, it is
necessary to round the corners according to the type of continuous fiber used. Continuous
fiber reinforcements made of carbon and aramid fiber, which are applicable in this
guideline, require rounded corners of columns with a radius of 20 mm or more for carbon
fiber and of 10 mm or more for aramid fiber. The maximum radius shall be 30 mm in
order to provide sufficient cover of concrete to ensure adequate fire-resistance.
- 53 -
Continuous fiber reinforcements are strong when the force is oriented in the direction of
the fiber but not in the direction perpendicular to the fiber. Furthermore, since continuous
fiber reinforcements have elastic behavior, they have small breaking elongation. These
characteristics, which are not found in steel products, are effective to maintain elastic
restraint and control cracking opening. In addition, it is an advantage during the
construction because the materials are easily cut without requiring special equipment.
However, it is necessary to take into account some disadvantages in the structural
characteristics for strengthened columns. For instance, a cut opening does not have any
strengthening efficiency. The sectional areas of continuous fiber reinforcements, which
have been cut for openings, shall be omitted from the calculation of reinforcement and
supplementary reinforcement should be provided.
(5) Shear reinforcement of continuous fiber reinforcements
Many of the previous investigation on reinforced concrete columns strengthened with
continuous fiber reinforcements were conducted on non-full scale test specimens. In
addition a relatively large quantity of fiber reinforcement was provided. Therefore, there
are not sufficient experimental data based on full scale sizes. In general, shear fiber
reinforcement around columns is expected to reduce its effectiveness in comparison with
the reduced test specimens results of laboratories if the sizes of members increase.
Therefore, even though the calculated required reinforcement is small, we minimized the
shear reinforcement of continuous fiber reinforcements that exceeded the extent of the
fluctuation of previous experimental data. Reinforcement (pwf fd) shall be 0.04 Fc to 0.8
MPa (minimum value) where: pwf: shear reinforcement ratio of continuous fiber
reinforcements, fd: tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for designing
shear, Fc: compressive strength of concrete. The compressive strength of concrete shall be
13.5 MPa or more.
(6) Others
Since the cross section of a column does not significantly increase when continuous fiber
reinforcements are placed, the extent of the continuous fiber reinforcements to be placed
should be enlarged and no gaps are required on the underside of beams upstairs and at the
top of beams downstairs. However, the retrofitting strategy includes the increase of the
cross sectional areas, the bending moment is improved to increase stiffness and bending
strength. As a result, the shear force that columns have to resist, is also increased.
Therefore, gaps of 10 mm to 30 mm shall be provided on the underside of beams upstairs
and at the top of beams downstairs so that the ultimate bending strength does not
increase.
- 54 -
3.1.3
Evaluation Methods for Strength and Toughness
The performance of continuous fiber reinforcements is calculated by (1) the ultimate flexure
strength, (2) the ultimate shear strength, and (3) the ultimate ductility factor and the ductility
index toughness as follows.
(1) Ultimate bending strength
The ultimate bending strength is based on formulas (3.1.1) to (3.1.4) as follows:
Qmu = Mu/h0 (N)
(3.1.1)
For Nmax N > Nb:

N N
Mu = {0.5ag yg1D + 0.024 (1 + g1)(3.6 g1) b D2Fc} max
N max N b
(N mm)
(3.1.2)
For Nb N 0:
N
Mu = 0.5ag yg1D + 0.5N D 1
b D Fc
(N mm)
(3.1.3)
For 0 > N Nmin:

Mu = 0.5ag yg1D + 0.5N g1D (N mm)
(3.1.4)
Nb = 0.22 (1 + g1) b DFc: Balanced axial force (N)
Nmax = b DFc + ag y:
Compressive capacity under concentric loading (N)
Nmin = ag y:
Tensile capacity under concentric loading (N)
where,
N: Stress of a column in the axial direction (N)
ag: Area of longitudinal reinforcement of a column (mm2)
g1: Ratio of the distance between the centers of gravity of tension and
compression bars to the whole length
b: Sectional width of a column (mm)
D: Whole sectional length of a column (mm)
y: Strength of tension reinforcement at the yield point (MPa)
y can be 295 MPa for Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar and (standard
strength at the yield point + 49 MPa) for deformed steel bars.
Fc: Compressive strength of concrete (MPa)
h0: Inside measurement between each column vertically (mm)
: In principle, should be accurately calculated. Use 2 for rough calculation.
- 55 -
[Comments]

The current Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity is based on an approximated
calculation of the ultimate bending strength. However, since two or more reinforcing bars
are usually placed on four sides of a column, there is a large amount of longitudinal
reinforcement arranged in middle height that can not be neglected. If the contribution of
the longitudinal reinforcement arranged in middle height is not taken into consideration, a
shear force larger than the design shear force with unsafe factors will be exerted on
members. The ultimate bending strength of the guideline is based on the formula for the
rough calculation for the bending strength of columns with multiple reinforcement
arrangement described in the Structural Regulations of Buildings of 1997 of the
Building Center of Japan. A ratio of 1.21 between the values of maximum bending
strength derived from the total of 71 test specimens (reinforced concrete columns and
columns reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements), which suffered shear failure
after bending failure and yield during previous investigations 2) - 31) of columns reinforced
with continuous fiber reinforcements, and calculated figures based on the formula is 1.21
on average and 0.160 for the standard deviation, which indicate good compatibility (see
Figure 3.1-1). Accurately calculated figures for the analysis of sectional bending can be
also used with consideration for multiple reinforcement arrangement.
Experimental figures of the

maximum strength (kN)
38 test specimens
21 test specimens
Reinforced with steel plates:
12 test specimens
Reinforced concrete for
comparison: 12 test specimens
Calculated figures of flexural capacity (kN)

Figure 3.1-1
Verification of the Formula for the Ultimate Bending Strength
(Test specimens of shear failure after bending failure and yield)
- 56 -
(2) Ultimate shear strength

The ultimate shear strength is calculated by formula (3.1.5) as follows:
0.053p t 0.23 (17.6 Fc )
0.845 p w wy 0.1 0 bj (N)

Qsu =
M/(Q d) 0.12
(3.1.5)
where, pwwy = pws wys + pwf fd.

Therefore, when pwwy exceeds 100, pwwy = 10 MPa.
When M/(Q d) is 1 or less, use 1. When M/(Q d) is 3 or more, use 3.
where,
0 :
Axial stress (MPa)

However, when 0 exceeds 7.84 MPa, use 7.84 MPa.
M/Q: Shear span (mm)
However, h0/2 (h0: Inside measurement between each column vertically) can be
used.
b:
Sectional width of a column after reinforcement (mm)
d:
Effective whole sectional length of a column after reinforcement (mm)
j:
Distance between tension and compression resultants; 0.8D can be used.
D: Overall height of a column after reinforcement (mm)
pt: Tension reinforcement ratio (%) = (at/(b d) 100: Derived by the sectional area at
of tension reinforcement)
Fc: Compressive strength of existing concrete (MPa)
pws: Shear reinforcement ratio of shear reinforcing bars of an existing column to a
section after reinforcement
pwf: Shear reinforcement ratio of continuous fiber reinforcements to a section after
reinforcement
wys: Strength at yield point of shear reinforcement of an existing column (MPa)
fd: Tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for designing shear (MPa)
fd = min. [E fd fd and (2/3) f]
E fd: Standard Youngs modulus of continuous fiber reinforcements (Table 2.1-2)
fd: Effective strain of continuous fiber reinforcements (= 0.7%)
f :
Standard tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements (Table 2.1-2)
- 57 -
[Comments]

(a) Tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for designing shear
In this guideline, the ultimate shear strength of columns reinforced with continuous fiber
reinforcements is derived by adding the shear contribution of the continuous fiber
reinforcements to the contribution of the existing shear reinforcing and by applying the
current Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity. Existing shear reinforcement at the
time of the ultimate shear strength is evaluated with yield strength as a ductility index.
Thereby, in this guideline, the shear reinforcing contributed by the continuous fiber
reinforcements are derived by multiplying yield strength by shear reinforcement ratios.
However, since continuous fiber reinforcements are elastic materials, the shear resistance
factors, which are contributed by the continuous fiber reinforcements, are derived by
multiplying stress according to strain, which the continuous fiber reinforcements sustain
at the time of ultimate shear, and the shear reinforcement ratio of the continuous fiber
reinforcements.
Figure 3.1-2 indicates the strain of continuous fiber reinforcements, obtained by previous
investigations 2) - 31) when reinforced concrete test specimens with shear reinforcement
suffered shear failure. The gauged strain is mostly distributed between 0.5% and 1.5%
smaller than the standard tensile strength of the continuous fiber reinforcements. The test
specimens with a greater amount of continuous fiber reinforcements (rigidity of
reinforcing bars: pwf Efd) showed smaller strains at the time of ultimate shear. The
measured strains also varies according to the types of reinforcing fiber. Aramid fiber
shows somewhat greater values than carbon fiber. Based on the data of past experiments,
we decided to use 0.7%, which is almost the lowest figure obtained by the experiments,
as the effective strain for calculating tensile strength for designing the shear of continuous
fiber reinforcements, in order to calculate the ultimate shear strength. Because the
experimental formula of the existing Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity, which
we adopted in the guideline to obtain the ultimate shear strength, is widely and
successfully used and the contributed shear reinforcement is derived by the square root of
the quantity of reinforcement, we took account of the characteristic that the increase of
shear strength actually diminishes when the quantity of reinforcing materials is greatly
increased.
- 58 -
Figure 3.1-2
Gauged Values of Strain of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements

at the Time of Shear Failure
Two-thirds or less of the strength reported by the manufacturer is used as the tensile
design strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for shear design is because it is only
the standard for the upper limit for the ratio of the average tensile strength of reinforcing
materials, which cross the shearing cracks of actual members, to the standard tensile
strength when the tensile load remains the same. The standard Youngs moduli for carbon
and aramid fiber reinforcing materials in the guideline are indicated in Table 2.1-2 and
are not affected by the restriction. In addition, when tensile strength for designing shear is
calculated only by effective strain, the standard tensile strength of continuous fiber
reinforcements might be too close to the figure. This was also another reason for
providing the restriction.
Previous experiments indicate that carbon fiber with its greater Youngs modulus has
greater reinforcing efficiency for shear strength than aramid fiber in proportion close to
the ratio of respective Youngs moduli. Regardless of the types of continuous fiber, the
guideline provided tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for designing shear
based on the common formula for the ultimate shear strength (modified equation by
Ohno and Arakawa formula) in order to evaluate based on the calculated shear strength
with sufficient safety factor.
If the effective strain of continuous fiber reinforcements is given a definite value, the
tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for designing shear will have greater
values for a greater value of Youngs modulus of the continuous fiber. A previous
investigation reported failures occurred at shearing cracks at an early stage and shear
strength was not obtained in proportion to greater Youngs modulus when carbon fiber
sheets (Efd = about 600 GPa) with high elasticity of pitch family were used. The report
also noted that on the contrary, strength reduced.2) Based on experiment, results the
standard Youngs moduli of carbon and aramid fiber is limited as follows:
- 59 -
Carbon fiber:
Aramid fiber:
190 GPa < E fd < 250 GPa

70 GPa < E fd < 130 GPa
The reason why pwwy = 10MPa was set as the upper limit of shear reinforcement is
based on the fact a larger amount of reinforcement tends to reduce the strain of
continuous fiber reinforcements when the maximum strength is achieved, and that we
verified the data of past experiments as an upper limit, which was considered a safe factor
for the formula in the guideline.
Even though the effective strain of 0.7% of continuous fiber reinforcements corresponds
to the strain level actually measured, the strength is considered to be a safe factor based
on the current formula for the ultimate shear strength. Therefore, in the future, a more
rational way to determine effective strain as well as a expressions for calculating the
ultimate shear strength need to be established.
(b) Ultimate shear strength
Figure 3.1-3 compares the values of shear strength obtained from experiments and the
expected values of shear strength based on the equation presented in this guideline 2) - 31)
of the experiments of shear failure that occurred before bending yield of members. The
total number of test specimens using continuous fiber reinforcements and reinforced
concrete is 88, and the ratio of the experimental figures to the calculated figures is 1.35
on average and 0.235 for the standard deviation. Figure 3.1-4 indicates the experimental
figures and calculated figures of the test specimens, which were reported to have suffered
bond splitting failure before bending yield. Both failure modes indicate good agreement.
- 60 -
30 test specimens
Experimental figures of
shear strength (kN)
21 test specimens
3 test specimens
Calculated figures of shear strength (kN)

Figure 3.1-3
Verification of the Formula for the Ultimate Shear Strength
(Test specimen of shear failure)
4 test specimens
Experimental figures of
strength (kN)
0 test specimens
1 test specimens
Calculated figures of strength (kN)

Figure 3.1-4 Verification of the formula for the ultimate shear strength
(Test specimen of bond splitting failure)

Because the previous data of this experimental formula are mainly based on main
reinforcement with Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar and include data on failure modes
caused by the bond failure of main reinforcement, we can also make a rough evaluation of
these test specimens and the type of failures. Because the formula is used by the current
Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity and we need to maintain the continuity of the
design of strengthening, we decided to adopt the same formula for evaluation in the guideline.
Therefore, there is no other formula for main reinforcement with Column with (longitudinal)
Round Bar or for the bond splitting failure of main reinforcement.
- 61 -
(Main
reinforcement at
the time of yield)
Reinforced with
steel plates
(Main
reinforcement
before yield)
Reinforced
concrete for
comparison
(Main
reinforcement
before yield)
Experimental figures of strength (kN)
Experimental figures of strength (kN)
(Main
reinforcement
before yield)
Figure 3.1-5
(Main reinforcement at the time

of yield)
Reinforced with
steel plates
(Main reinforcement before yield)
Reinforced
concrete for
comparison
(Main reinforcement before yield)
Calculated figures of shear strength (kN)
Calculated figures of bending strength (kN)
(a) Comparison with calculated figures

of the ultimate bending strength
(Main
reinforcement
before yield)
(b) Comparison with calculated figures

of the ultimate shear strength
Comparison between experimental and calculated figures of the maximum

strength of reinforced columns with Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as
main reinforcement
Figure 3.1-5 (a) and (b) compare the experimental figures of the ultimate shear strength of
reinforced concrete columns when Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar were used as main
reinforcement in the past experiments of continuous fiber reinforcements 2) - 31) and the
calculated figures based on the guideline for the ultimate bending and shear strength. They are
on the safer side in comparison to the calculated values of the ultimate shear strength, though
there are some test specimens which showed bending failure. Like the test specimens using
deformed steel bars as main reinforcement, they are the lower limit.
Refer to (4) When Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar are used as main reinforcement
for the types of failure of members using Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main
reinforcement.
Footnote for CGS unit:

Formula (3.1.5):
0.053p t 0.23 (180 Fc )
2.7 p w wy 0.1 0 bj
Qsu =
M/(Q d) 0.12
(3.1.5)
The unit of stress is kgf/cm2, the unit of length cm, and the unit of strength kgf. The unit of
pt is %.
pwwy = pws wys + pwf fd,
When pwwy exceeds 100 kgf/cm2, pwwy = 10 kgf/cm2.
When 0 exceeds 80 kgf/cm2, use 80 kgf/cm2.
- 62 -
(3) Ultimate ductility factors and ductility index of toughness

The ultimate ductility factor of bent columns, strengthened with FRP, shall be calculated
using the following equation (3.1.6):
Q
= 10 su 0.9
Q mu
where, 1 5
(3.1.6)
Qmu is shear force at the time of the ultimate bending strength as described in (1) above.
For the calculation of columns having axial force, which exceeds the balanced axial force
at the time of an earthquake, use the calculated figure of shear force at the time of the
ultimate bending strength with balanced axial force. Qmu is the calculated figure of the
ultimate shear strength of columns as described in (2) above.
Table 3.1-1 indicates the ductility index of toughness of reinforced columns as follows:
Table 3.1-1 Ductility index of toughness of independent reinforced concrete columns
reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements
Types of failures of columns
When a bent column does not
satisfy any of the following
conditions:
Ns/(b DFc) > 0.4
mu/Fc > 0.2
h0/D 2.0
Ductility index of toughness (F)

F = 2 1
Number of analyses
2 or 3
However,
1
0.75 (1 0.05)
Bent columns other than the above
F = 1.27
2 or 3
Shear column
F = 1.0
2 or 3
Column with flexural yielding

type beams
F = 3.0
Column with shear failure type

beams
F = 1.5
where,
:
Ns:
b and D:
mu:
j:
h0:
Fc:
Ultimate ductility factor of reinforced columns based on formula (3.1.6)

Axial force at the time of an earthquake
Sectional width and overall height of a column
Qmu /(b j)
Distance between the centers of stress of a reinforced column (use 0.8D)
Inside measurement between each column vertically
Compressive strength of concrete (MPa)
- 63 -
[Comments]
(3) Ultimate ductility factor and ductility index of toughness

The ductility indexes of bent columns reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements
should be calculated according to Table 3.1-1 with ductility factors derived by formula
(3.1.6) of the guideline.
The ultimate ductility factor of columns strengthened with continuous fiber
reinforcements is related to the ratio (margin of shear capacity to flexural capacity) of the
ultimate shear strength to the ultimate bending strength, and are effective a useful tool for
the design process. We are now reviewing the results of past experiments on condition
that we evaluate in the guideline in the same way as the current Standards for Evaluation
of Seismic Capacity.
- 64 -
Experimental figures of ultimate

ductility factor
38 test specimens
21 test specimens
12 test specimens
Margin of shear capacity to flexural capacity
Experimental figures of ultimate

ductility factor
(a) When reinforcing bars used for main reinforcement
(Main reinforcement
before yield)
(Main reinforcement
at the time of yield)
Reinforced with
steel plates
(Main reinforcement
before yield)
Reinforced concrete
for comparison
(Main reinforcement
at the time of yield)
(b) When round steel bars are used for main reinforcement
Figure 3.1-6 Margin of shear capacity to flexural capacity and ultimate ductility factor
The ultimate shear strength increases when the axial force increases in the general equation
for ultimate shear strength. On the other hand, the ultimate bending strength decreases if axial
force exceeds the balanced axial force. Therefore, formula (3.1.6) contradicts the actual
property that a larger axial force increases the calculated figure of the ultimate ductility factor,
and that a larger axial force lowers the flexural toughness. As a result, in this guideline for the
calculation of the ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity, we decided to adopt shear force
- 65 -
(Qmu) at the time of the ultimate bending strength with balanced axial force when the axial
force of columns is greater than the balanced axial force, and to make a lower estimate of the
ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity.
Based on the data of past experiments 2) - 31), Figure 3.1-6 (a) indicates the test specimens,
which suffered bending failure, and the other test specimens, which suffered shear or bond
failure after bending yield, with deformed steel bars as main reinforcement. Figure 3.1-6 (b)
indicates the experimental figures (derived by dividing the deformed angles, which are 80%
of the maximum strength of the load-deformation curve envelope by deformed angle at the
time of bending yield) of the ultimate ductility factor of test specimens, which used Column
with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main reinforcement, and the relationship between the
calculated figures of the ultimate ductility factor and the ratio of shear capacity to flexural
capacity based on formula (3.1.6).
According to formula (3.1.6), the previous data on columns, which were reinforced with
continuous fiber, show almost the lower limit. Formula (3.1.6) gives a larger value of ductility
factor by reducing the constant term in the parentheses. This is indicated in the current
Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity of Reinforced Concrete, from 1.0 to 0.9.
However, the formula reflects the fact that reinforcement with continuous fiber
reinforcements has greater toughness after bending yield due to the characteristics of the
materials, which are effective in restraining the entire sections of columns including the
thickness of cover concrete because the materials are placed around columns. We do not take
into account k1 (the coefficient of buckling of main reinforcement) and k2 (the coefficient of
average shear stress at the time of bending strength bending yield) that are taken into account
in the current Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity. The reason for this is that
perimeter restraint is effective for the buckling of main reinforcement and that formula (3.1.6)
does not have any significant difference in shear stress between the estimated and
experimental figures of the ultimate ductility factor to the extent of 0.2 Fc of the average shear
stress, which was derived from the results of past experiments.
- 66 -

ultimate ductility factor
or less
or less
or less
or less
or more

Figure 3.1-7 Margin of shear capacity to flexural capacity and the ultimate ductility factor
Figure 3.1-7 indicates that test specimens with greater axial compressive force are close to the
lower limit line even though they have the same ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity. It
also indicates that columns with great axial force have low safety factors and columns with
low axial force have great safety factors. It is preferable to adjust the calculated figures of
formula (3.1.6) according to the level of axial force of columns in order to unify the safety
factors.
Therefore, 3.3. Strengthening of independent steel encased reinforced concrete columns
allows the calculated figure of the ultimate ductility factor, which is derived by formula
(3.1.6), to be multiplied by the following simple coefficient n when the ratio (h0/D) of the
height of a column measured inside to the overall height of a column having open web steel
frames inside, which are considered equivalent to reinforced concrete, is 2.5 or more.
n =
0 .3
Ns
)
(
b D Fc
(However, n should be 1.84 or less.)
(3.1.7)
where,
Strength in the direction of a column at the time of an earthquake
Ns:
b and D: Width and overall height
This formula adjusts the calculated figures of the axial stress of columns derived by formula
(3.1.6) from 0.16 Fc to 0.3 Fc by increasing up to 1.84 times. It also adjusts the calculated
figures derived by formula (3.1.6) to smaller figures for the columns, which have axial stress
of more than 0.3 Fc. Figure 3.1-8 indicates the relationship with experimental figures when
formula (3.1.7.) adjusts the calculated figures of the ultimate ductility factor derived by
- 67 -

formula (3.1.6).
or less
or less
or less
or less
or more
Calculated figures of the

Figure 3.1-8 Methods and experimental figures of the ultimate ductility factor
of steel framed reinforced concrete
If columns have a great axial force exceeding 0.3 Fc, they are evaluated on the safer side.
However, there are several test specimens of columns with axial force lower than this, which
are evaluated on the unsafe side. The overestimated test specimens are made in actual sizes
with a small quantity of reinforcement. This indicates that large-sized test specimens tend to
show a reduced effect of lateral restraint. They can be eliminated according to the minimum
quantity of reinforcement required by the guideline. Therefore, it is possible to make
adjustments as mentioned above as far as the data of the previous researches are concerned.
However, it is also true that there are not enough data to evaluate precisely the compound
effects such as the impact of axial force on the ductility of columns and other factors, that
there are few data on dimensions to impact on the effect of strengthening, that the evaluation
of toughness by the ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity is closely related to the
methods of evaluating shear and the ultimate bending strength, and that the method of
adjusting by axial force does not rectify the evaluation methods. In the guideline, it was
decided to follow the current formula of the Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity,
which controls the ductility index of toughness. Therefore, the ductility index of toughness is
calculated by using the ultimate ductility factor derived by formula (3.1.6) based on Table
3.1-1. If the ductility index of toughness satisfies the minimum quantity of reinforcement and
exceeds 0.4 Fc, the ductility index (F) of the toughness of L-shaped columns reinforced with
continuous fiber reinforcements is set as 1.27 (equivalent to the calculated figure for the
ultimate ductility factor = 1.0).
- 68 -

Figures 3.1-9 (a), (b) and (c) indicate the relationships between the ratio of shear capacity to
flexural capacity and the experimental figures of the ultimate ductility factor respectively. The
tension reinforcement ratios of columns are indicated in (pt), shear stress at the time of
ultimate flexural strength in (mu/Fc) and shear span ratio in (M/(QD) = (h0/D)/2). These
parameters regulate the ductility index of toughness along with the axial force of columns in
the current Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity. Because the past experiments
include tension reinforcement ratios (pt) of 1.0% or more for columns and ductility factors are
evaluated on the safe side for these, L-shaped columns reinforced with continuous fiber do
not have to be regulated by tension reinforcement ratios. However, since the data of the
experiments have shear stress (mu/Fc) of 0.2 or less and (h0/D) of more than 3.0, we decided
to follow the ductility index of toughness regulated by these parameters. In this guideline, (F)
is set as 1.27 (calculated figure when equals 1) across the board as the lower limit of the
ductility index of toughness for L-shaped columns, which reflects the effect of restraint by
reinforcing with continuous fiber. The short columns with h0/D of less than 2.0 usually have
low partitions or fascias. In order to improve toughness, the columns should be basically
provided with slits to make the columns longer and reinforced with continuous fiber in the
whole length. After reinforcing columns with continuous fiber in the whole length, when low
partitions and fascias are reconnected without slits, the strength of the shortened columns is
expected to increase. However, even though the L-shaped walls are strengthened, toughness
will not be substantially improved.
or less
or less
or less
or more
(a) Impact of tension reinforcement ratio
- 69 -

0.15 or less
0.15 - 0.2 or less
0.2 0.25 or less
0.25 or more

(b) Impact of mu/Fc

Less than 1.5
1.5 to 2
2 to 2.5
0.25 or more
(c) Impact of M/(QD)

Figure 3.1-9 Relationship between Ratio of Shear Capacity to Flexural Capacity and
Calculated Figures of the Ultimate Ductility Factor
(4) When Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar are used as main reinforcement
(a) Periods when Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar were used
The Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS G3110) for deformed steel bars was established in
1953. Deformed steel bars started to be used as main reinforcement mainly for high-rise
buildings (equivalent to the current medium-rise buildings) since 1955. They took hold
nationwide after 1970. Therefore, the transitional period from round to deformed steel
bars is considered to have happened from 1955 to 1974. We do not know exactly how
many of those buildings, which used Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main
reinforcement, are still standing because detailed information is not available, however, it
is likely that many of them still remain.
- 70 -
(b) Mechanism of shear resistance and types of failure of members using Column with
(longitudinal) Round Bar as main reinforcement
In general, the mechanism of resistance to the shear of reinforced concrete members such
as columns and beams is classified into truss and arch structures32). The truss structure
consists of the balanced tension force of shear reinforcement, adhesion of reinforcement
and concrete, and compression of concrete floor post footing. Therefore, the members of
Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar used as main reinforcement do not have the same
shear strength as deformed steel bars when sliding failures are caused by the deterioration
of the adhesion of the main reinforcement. This means that the truss structure does not
have enough resistance, and mainly only the arch structure has resistance to shear force.
When shear reinforcement is increased to improve seismic retrofit, the tension force of
shear reinforcement increases in the condition of the balanced trussed structure
mentioned above. Therefore, the adhesion of the main reinforcement has to be improved
to overcome this. If a bond slip failure happens, the designed bending strength or shear
strength of members is not attained and the hysteresis loops decrease the capacity to
absorb energy in an inverted S-shape. Therefore, a bond slip failure is a type of failure
that should be avoided in general.
These problems are not characteristic of members reinforced with continuous fiber
reinforcements but are common among members reinforced by the conventional
reinforcing methods such as steel jacketing or reinforced concrete lining methods. Since
there are still many buildings using Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main
reinforcement, these construction methods should be reviewed and the problems solved.
When deformed
steel bars are used
When round steel

bars are used
When deformed steel

bars are used
When round steel bars

are used
Figure 3.1-10 Difference in Cracking Patterns of Members using deformed and

Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as Main Reinforcement
- 71 -
Regarding the difference of the properties of shear between reinforced concrete members
using round and deformed steel bars as main reinforcement, there is a report on an
experiment that investigated the impact of the bonding properties of main reinforcement
on the shear resistance of reinforced concrete members33). Figure 3.1-10 indicates the
difference of the properties of failures by type of main reinforcement based on the
experiment. When shear span was small, the beams using deformed steel bars as main
reinforcement had diagonally-run cracks at the center of members at an early stage
compared to Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar. The cracks expanded with
maximum strength and the center of the members of concrete eventually collapsed. On
the other hand, beams using Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar had shear cracks at
an angle of about 45 degrees to both supporting points and ran along the main
reinforcement. The cracks eventually ran between the supporting points, and compressed
concrete at the end of the members eventually collapsed with strength. Since main
reinforcement, the members of which had a considerably large diameter as a proportion
to the surfaces of the members, was used in the experiment, the adhesion of beams using
Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar started deteriorating at an early stage after loading
and only arched structures had shear resistance. Though the type of main reinforcement
had a significant impact in the experiment because of the main reinforcement with a large
diameter, not all reinforced concrete members using Column with (longitudinal) Round
Bar have this sort of phenomenon.
Literature with Reference No. 34 shows a study on the compressive strength, the placing
method and the average bond stress of concrete columns with Column with (longitudinal)
Round Bar used as main reinforcement and deteriorated adhesion. As a result, it was
found that (1) columns with Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main
reinforcement were improved to have toughness by increasing the strength of concrete
and casting concrete vertically, (2) this effect was not so significant when shear span
ratios were 1.0 but the impact of deteriorated adhesion was greater when reinforcement
ratios were greater, (3) the test specimens, which suffered bond slip failure, had an
average bond stress that was 0.14 to 0.17 times the concrete compressive strength at the
time of maximum strength. As the result of the above (3), it was found that the average
designed bond stress of main reinforcement should be about 10% of concrete
compressive strength in order to sustain flexural strength.
In general, the diameters of members used as main reinforcement in existing low-rise
buildings are 16 mm to 25 mm. If columns with an interior span of 2,500 mm receive an
asymmetric moment and main reinforcement yields at column capitals and bases on
compressed and pulled sides (with yield strength of 300 MPa), the average bond stress
along the depth of the members of main reinforcement will be about 1.0 to 1.5 MPa and
- 72 -
less than 10% of concrete strength. Therefore, main reinforcement with Column with
(longitudinal) Round Bar does not seem to have significant problems of flexural strength
unless columns are shortened with low partitions or fascias.
(c) Strengthening effects of continuous fiber reinforcements for reinforced concrete columns
with Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main reinforcement
Since the earthquake struck in the southern part of Hyogo Prefecture 1995, there have
been a number of studies on improving the seismic retrofit of reinforced concrete
columns reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements. Some of the researches on the
types (round and deformed steel bars) of main reinforcement are introduced in the next
paragraphs:
According to Literature with Reference No. 35, the flexural shear of the test specimens of
reinforced concrete columns was tested for bending yield with consideration for the
shapes of members used as main reinforcement and the quantity of continuous fiber
reinforcements. It was concluded that (1) the different types of main reinforcement had
different cracking properties because columns using Column with (longitudinal) Round
Bar as reinforcement had cracks at the top and bottom of the columns, but columns using
deformed steel bars had additional cracks also the center of the columns and (2) although
carbon fiber reinforcing materials were effective in improving the properties of members
to deformation, the quantity of the reinforcing materials did not significantly influence
the effect. The research pointed out that the reasons for (1) and (2) were the effects of the
shapes of members used as main reinforcement on trussed structures. According to
Literature with Reference No. 36, the shearing properties of the test specimens of
reinforced concrete columns were estimated in the experiments that studied the shapes of
members used as main reinforcement and the quantity of continuous fiber reinforcements.
As a result, it was found that (1) it was necessary to evaluate the strength of members
according to the bonding strength of Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar because
columns, which had Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main reinforcement and
were reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements, lost the adhesion of the main
reinforcement at a relatively early stage, (2) when the main reinforcement lost the
adhesion, the shear strength of columns using Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as
main reinforcement was not increased as much as columns with deformed steel bars as
main reinforcement even though the quantity of continuous fiber reinforcements was
increased and (3) toughness was improved by increasing the compressive toughness of
the end of concrete with increased reinforcement based on the fact that columns with
Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main reinforcement had diagonal cracks after
the ends of the columns started to collapse and eventually the whole columns collapsed.
Based on (3), the research proposed a method to evaluate the property of toughness.
- 73 -
Figure 3.1-11 shows the comparison of the test specimens of columns used for the
Literature with References Nos. 35 and 36, which have the same shapes, dimensions and
quantity of continuous fiber reinforcements except for the shapes of members used as
main reinforcement37). The columns using deformed steel bars failed after flexural yield
but the test specimens using Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar lost adhesion with
the strength of members before reaching the flexural yield strength. However, there is no
significant difference in ductility and the forms of hysteresis loops between deformed and
Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar.
(a) Main reinforcement: Deformed steel bars

(failure caused by flexural yield)
(b) Main reinforcement: Round steel bars

(failure caused by deteriorated adhesion)
Figure 3.1-11 Comparison of the Relationship between Load and Deformation 37)
According to Literature with Reference No. 38, the test specimens of reinforced concrete
columns were subjected to high-speed loading tests with consideration for the shapes of
members used as main reinforcement and the quantity of continuous fiber reinforcements.
It was found that (1) columns with Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main
reinforcement were superior in the properties of bending and slip of main reinforcement
and (2) carbon fiber reinforcing materials were effective in reinforcing deformed steel
bars but their effectiveness was unclear for columns using Column with (longitudinal)
Round Bar.
Literature with Reference No. 39 reported on shear experiments with the test specimens
of reinforced concrete beams without axial force with consideration for the shapes of
members used as main reinforcement, the quantity of continuous fiber reinforcements and
the methods used to adhere sheets in order to clearly understand the effects of continuous
fiber reinforcements according to the shapes of members used as main reinforcement. As
a result, it was found that (1) shear strength significantly increased when the quantity of
continuous fiber reinforcements was increased for beams using deformed steel bars,
however, strength did not increase for beams using Column with (longitudinal) Round
- 74 -
Bar even though more than a certain quantity of continuous fiber reinforcements was
used to reinforce them, (2) the reason for this was that the adhesion of main
reinforcement was lost when the average bonding strength of members was around 0.7
MPa and the mechanism of trussed structures was lost and (3) beams using Column with
(longitudinal) Round Bar as main reinforcement were not effective in reducing ductility
even though continuous fiber reinforcements were used to reinforce them.
Figure 3.1-12 shows the results of experiments based on the Literature with Reference No.
39. In the figure, (a) indicates the comparison between Test Specimen No. 1 (pw = 0.19%)
and Test Specimens Nos. 2 to 4 that were reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements.
The quantity of continuous fiber reinforcements was increased in the order of No. 2, No.
3 and No. 4. One sheet of continuous fiber reinforcements was adhered all around Test
Specimen No. 4. Even though Test Specimens Nos. 2 to 4 had an ultimate shear strength
that was slightly greater than Test Specimen No. 1, there was no significant difference
among Test Specimens Nos. 2 to 4 and strength did not increase when the quantity of
continuous fiber reinforcements was increased. Beams reinforced with continuous fiber
reinforcements were reported to lose the adhesion of main reinforcement when shear
force was around 69 kN (7.0 tf). After that, shear resistant structures seemed to differ
significantly compared to beams using deformed steel bars. In the figure, (b) shows the
comparison of the beams, which have the same shapes, dimensions and quantity of
continuous fiber reinforcements except for the shapes of members used as main
reinforcement. The relationship between shear strength and deformation started to differ
significantly when the adhesion of Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar was lost with
shear force of about 69 kN (7.0 tf) and the ultimate shear strength also reduced for the
test specimens using Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as main reinforcement.
Comparison between
deformed and round
steel bars with sheets
of 7 cm width
Effect of reinforcement
of sheets used for
round steel bars
Deformed steel bar
Maximum load
Maximum load
Breaking of
sheets
Round
steel bar
(a) Comparison of different quantity of

continuous fiber reinforcing materials
when round steel bars are used as main
reinforcement
(b) Comparison of different shapes of members

used as main reinforcement (round and
deformed steel bars) when the quantity of
reinforcing materials is the same
Figure 3.1-12 Comparison of Relationship between Load and Deformation39)
- 75 -
(d) Evaluation of the ultimate shear strength and the ultimate ductility factor in the guideline
In the guideline, we adopted formula (3.1.5) based on the so-called Arakawas Formula in
order to evaluate the shear strength of independent columns and rectangular beams.
Arakawas Formula was proposed40) based on the results of experiments with 156 test
specimens. Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar were used for all the test specimens as
main reinforcement. In Reference 40, the types of failure are reportedly significant as A
great number of short diagonal cracks were generated along axial reinforcing bars and
showed the maximum load when the reinforcing bars and the adhesion of concrete had
failures in the end and There were also diagonal cracks that developed in a similar
manner between the points where force was added and supported. In Arakawas
Formula, consideration was given to the ultimate shear strength, which was generated
when members suffered shear failure, and the shear strength, which was generated when
Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar used as the members of reinforcement had the
deterioration of adhesion. The actual minimum shear span ratio (M/Qd) was 0.475. No
verification was made for members that had extremely small spans beyond the previously
mentioned ratio. However, the deterioration of adhesion of Column with (longitudinal)
Round Bar would not need to be studied as long as shear strength is calculated based on
formula (3.1.5) because shear span ratios are evaluated as 1.0 on the safe side when they
are lower than 1.0 in calculations based on the formula for the ultimate shear strength as
indicated in this section (2), and because shear strength with consideration for bond
failure tends to increase when M/Q d decreases in Arakawas Formula.
Figure 3.1-5 (a) compares the calculated and experimental figures of the ultimate bending
strength based on formulas (3.1.1) to (3.1.4). Figure 3.1-5 (b) compares the calculated
and experimental figures of the ultimate shear strength based on formula (3.1.5). Figure
3.1-6 (b) indicates the relationship between the ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity
and the ultimate ductility factor calculated by formulas (3.1.1) to (3.1.5) along with
figures calculated by formula (3.1.6). The ultimate bending strength of test specimens
using Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar as the members of main reinforcement in
Figure 3.1-5 is evaluated on the safe side by formulas (3.1.1) to (3.1.4), and the ultimate
shear strength by formula (3.1.5). Likewise the ultimate ductility factor of reinforced
members in Figure 3.1-6 is also evaluated on the safe side by formula (3.1.6) with the
ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity calculated by formulas (3.1.1) to (3.1.5).
When the ultimate shear strength is calculated by a method other than formula (3.1.5), the
bond strength of Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar used as the members of main
reinforcement should be studied separately. For such a method, the formula indicated in
Reference 41 could be used to calculate shear strength according to the bond strength of
- 76 -
main reinforcement and calculate by using the bond strength of appropriate Column with
(longitudinal) Round Bar. Even the technical evaluation in Attachment 1 and the
construction method authorized by the Minister adopted this method.
In the guideline, we do not need any special study if formula (3.1.5), which is applicable
to Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar used as the members of main reinforcement, is
used because there is not enough experimental data available on the strength of Column
with (longitudinal) Round Bar used as the members of main reinforcement, ductility and
hysteresis properties. However, in the future, we need to accumulate more data and
establish methods to evaluate strength and toughness based on resistant structures
because the types of failure are not clear and there is a wide variation in evaluation.
(5) Example of calculation for reinforcement
(a) Assumption in calculation:
In order to ensure the ductility index of toughness (F = 2.5) for the column indicated
below, we design strengthening by using carbon fiber sheets (amount of (fiber): 300 g/m2;
thickness of a sheet: 0.167 mm; f = 3400 MPa; E fd = 230 GPa).
fd = 0.007
fd = min. [E fd fd; 2/3 f] = min. [1610, 2267] = 1610 MPa
b D = 700 mm 700 mm, d = 568 mm, h0 = 2,400 mm
Main reinforcement: (SD345, 16-D22)
ag = 387 mm2 16 pieces = 6,192 mm2, y = 345 + 49 = 394 MPa = 0.394 GPa
Shear reinforcement of the existing column: (2-9, SR295@200 mm)
Hoop: 2-9 @200
(SR295)
Main reinforcement:
16-D22
(SD345)
- 77 -
pws = 127 mm2/(700 mm 200 mm) = 0.00091, wys = 295 MPa = 0.295 GPa
Compressive strength of existing concrete: Fc = 21 MPa

Axial force: N = 1,544 kN
(b) Calculation of the ultimate bending strength:
N = 1,544 kN < Nb = 3,698 kN
Therefore, use the following formula.
N
Mu = 0.5ag y g1D + 0.5 N D 1
bDFc
= 0.5 6,192 mm2 0.394 GPa 0.621 700 mm

+ 0.5 1,544 kN 700 mm {11,544 kN/(700 mm 700 mm 0.021 GPa)}
= (530.3 + 459.3) 1,000 kN mm = 989.6 kN m
Qmu = 2Mu/h0 = (2 989.6 kN m)/2.4 m = 824.7 kN
(c) Required shear force:
F=
2 1
= 2.5
0.75(1 0.05)
Therefore, the required ductility factor is = 2.78

Required Qsu is calculated by formula (3.1.6) as follows:
Q
= 10 su 0.9
Q mu
2.78 = 10 (Qsu/824.7-0.9)
Qsu = 971.5 kN
The required shear reinforcement is calculated by formula (3.1.5).
0.053p t 0.23 (17.6 Fc )
0.845 p w wy 0.1 0 b j
Qsu
M /(Qd) 0.12
971,500 N =
[0.053 {387 mm 2 8 pieces /(700mm 568mm)100}0.23 (17.6MPa 21MPa )

1,200mm / 568mm 0.12
+0.845 p w wy + 0.1 3.15] 700 mm 0.8 700 mm
971,500 N/392,000 mm2 = (0.865 + 0.845 p w wy + 0.315) MPa

p w wy = 1.536
(d) Required quantity of reinforcing sheets:

pwwy = pws wys + pwf fd
- 78 -
Therefore, (1.536)2 = 0.00091 295 MPa + pwf 1,610 MPa

pwf = 0.00130
pwf = 2twf/b (twf: required thickness of a sheet in mm)
Therefore, twf = pwf b/2 = 0.00130 700 mm/2 = 0.455 mm
Number of sheets: Nf = twf/tf (tf: thickness of a sheet, 0.167 mm)
= 0.455 mm/0.167 mm = 2.7 sheets 3 sheets
- 79 -

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
Masahiro Kobayashi, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Katsuhiko Nakano, Hiroshi Fukuyama; Experimental

Research on Structural Performance of Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets with Low
Partitions, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 21, No. 3, pp. 1423 - 1428, July 1999
Takahiro Kataoka, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Hiroshi Fukuyama, Ichiro Hashimoto; Experimental Research on
Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets for
Shear, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 18, pp. 1463 - 1468, June 1996
Takahiro Kataoka, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Hiroshi Fukuyama, Nobuhiro Araki; Experimental Research on
Toughness of Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets for Shear,
Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 19, pp. 213 - 218, June 1997
Nobuhiro Araki, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Katsuhiko Nakano, Takahiro Kataoka; Experimental Research on
Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Beams Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets for
Shear, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 19, pp. 207 - 212, June 1997
Takamasa Yanase, Gaku Yanagisawa; Experimental Research on Structural Performance of Columns
Reinforced with Carbon Fiber after the Earthquake, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting
of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 297 - 298, September 1996
Takamasa Yanase, Gaku Yanagisawa; An Experimental Study on Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns
Jacketed with Carbon Fiber Sheets, FRPRCS-3, Vol. 1, pp. 427 - 434, October 1997
Shigeo Watanabe, Tetsuji Kanda, Hiroshi Fujimura, Toshio Omura; Experiment on Seismic Strengthening
of Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets for Shear, Summaries of
Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 223 - 224,
September 1998
Kiyoshige Suzuki, Tomoya Nagasaka, Susumu Okamoto, Masaharu Tanigaki; Experimental Research on
Shear Reinforcement of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Tapes,
No. 1: Summary of Experiments and Results, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 287 - 288, September 1996
Rolando Figueroa, Tomoya Nagasaka; An Experimental Study on the Shear Capacity of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Columns Strengthened with Continuous Fiber Tapes, Summaries of Technical
Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 673 - 674, September 1997
Kiyoshige Suzuki, Tomoya Nagasaka; Experimental Research on Improvement of Toughness of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Tapes, Summaries of Technical Papers
of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 675 - 676, September 1997
Minoru Oda, Susumu Okamoto, Hisayuki Yamanaka, Akira Asakura; Shear Reinforcement of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Aramid Fiber, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute,
Vol. 15, pp. 755 - 760, June 1993
Akira Asakura, Susumu Okamoto, Masaharu Tanigaki, Minoru Oda; Shear Reinforcement of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with High-strength Fiber, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete
Institute, Vol. 16, pp. 1061 - 1066, June 1994
Yasuo Kanno, Takafumi Sato, Masami Hashimoto; Shear Reinforcement of Existing Reinforced Concrete
Columns, Shimizu Corporation Research Report, Vol. 65, pp. 23 -30, April 1997
Hajime Asai, Tomoo Sano, Yasuo Kanno; Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns
Reinforced with Methyl Methacrylate (MMA) and Carbon Fiber Sheets, Summaries of Technical Papers
Takehiko Kato, Norimitsu Hayashida, Chiaki Tsujimura, Tetsuo Toda, Minoru Osa; Research on Seismic
Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, No. 3:
Experiment on Shear Reinforcement, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Minoru Osa, Tetsuo Toda, Takehiko Kato, Norimitsu Hayashida, Chiaki Tsujimura; Research on Seismic
Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, No. 5:
Study on Evaluation Method for Toughness, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Masato Iso, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Yasutoshi Sonobe, Hiroyuki Nakamura; Experimental Research on
Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns with Wing Walls Reinforced with Carbon Fiber
Sheets for Shear, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 19, pp. 225 - 230, June 1997
Yasushi Katsukura, Tatsuyoshi Korenaga, Kazumasa Imai, Junichi Fukushima, Shinichi Takezaki, Keiji
Ogura; Research on Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon
- 80 -
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)
Fiber Sheets, No. 1: Results of Experiments, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Kazumasa Imai, Tatsuyoshi Korenaga, Jun Kobayashi, Junichi Fukushima; Research on Structural
Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, No. 2: Structural
Performance of Columns with Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar and Properties under High Axial
Force, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2,
pp. 681 - 682, September 1997
Kiyoshi Masuo, Toshiya Inoue, Toru Otani; Experiments, and Planning and Results of Experiments:
Shear Reinforcement with Carbon Fiber Sheets for Reinforced Concrete Square Columns, and Columns
with Wing Walls, GBRC, Vol. 84, pp. 30 - 51, October 1996
Kiyoshi Masuo, Toshiya Inoue, Toru Otani, Saneka Ueda, Takumi Uematsu; Structural Performance of
Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, No. 2: Structural Performance of
Columns with Longitudinal Round Bars and Properties under High Axial Force, GBRC, Vol. 88,
September 1997
Hideo Katsumata, Katsuaki Obata, Kazuichi Takeda; Research on Seismic Strengthening of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with New Materials, No. 1: Experiment on Reinforcement of
Round Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber, Bulletin of Technology Research and Development
Institute, Obayashi Corp., Vol. 33, pp. 67 - 71, 1986
Hideo Katsumata, Katsuaki Obata; Seismic Strengthening Method for Existing Reinforced Concrete
Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber, and Cement Concrete, Vol. 497, pp. 20 - 29, July 1988
Hideo Katsumata, Katsuaki Obata, Hisashi Takeda; Research on Seismic Strengthening of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber, No. 2: Experiment on Reinforcement of
Rectangular Columns, Bulletin of Technology Research and Development Institute, Obayashi Corp., Vol.
34, pp. 114 - 118, 1987
Hironari Hagio, Hideo Katsumata, Katsuaki Obata; Research on Seismic Strengthening of Existing
Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Strands, No. 3: Experimental Study on
Bond Splitting Failure, No. 4: Study on Evaluation Methods for Bond Splitting Failure Strength,
Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 669 672, September 1997
Katsuaki Obata, Hideo Katsumata, Tsuneo Tanaka; Seismic Strengthening of Existing Reinforced
Concrete Members Reinforced with Carbon Fiber, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 11,
pp. 861 - 866, June 1989
Hideo Katsumata, Katsuaki Obata; Seismic Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns
Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Strands, No. 2: Experiment of Flexural Shear, and Evaluation of the
Ultimate Joint Translation Angles, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting
of the
Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 243 - 244, August 1995
Katsuaki Obata, Hideo Katsumata, Akira Ohno; Toughness of Existing Reinforced Concrete Piers
Reinforced with CFRP Wrapping Method for Improvement of Seismic Strengthening, Annual Meeting of
the Japan Society of Civil Engineers, No. 49, pp. 918 - 919, September 1994
Hideo Katsumata, Katsuaki Obata; Seismic Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns
Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Strands, No. 1: Effects of Carbon Fiber Strands on Bonding Properties of
Main Reinforcement, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute
of Japan, C-2, September 1994
Koji Mori, Toshiki Nakazawa, Naotaka Sato; Experiment on Shear Strength of Strengthened Concrete
Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets and Steel Plates, No. 1: Summary of the Experiment, No.
2: Study on the Experiment, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural
Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 661 - 664, September 1997
Kazuo Yagishita, Osamu Chiba, Toshio Toya, Shigekazu Yamauchi, Takashi Ohi, Koichi Mukai;
Experimental Research on Seismic Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns, No. 1:
Summary of the Experiment, No. 2: Study on the Experiment, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual
Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 657 - 660, September 1997
The Architectural Institute of Japan: Guideline and Summary for the Ultimate Strength Seismic Design of
Reinforced Concrete Buildings, 1990
Kazuo Ohno, Takashige Hattori, Shuji Ishido; Impact of Adhesion of Longitudinal Bar on Shear
Resistance for Reinforced Concrete Members, The 35th Research Report of the Hokkaido Branch of the
Architectural Institute of Japan, pp. 97 - 100, March 1971
Tadashi Nagazawa, Masaya Hirosawa, Yutaka Shimizu, Hitoshi Takahashi; Comprehensive Research on
Prevention of Collapse for Short Reinforced Concrete Columns, NS 2 Series No. 45: When Column with
- 81 -
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)
40)
41)
(longitudinal) Round Bar Are Used as Main Reinforcement, NS 2 Series No. 46: Study on the Results of
the Experiment, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of
Japan, pp. 1501 - 1504, October 1977
Yasushi Katsukura, Kazumasa Imai, Shinichi Takezaki, Tatsuyoshi Korenaga, Junichi Fukushima, Keiji
Ogura; Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets,
No 1: Results of the Experiment, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Kazumasa Imai, Tatsuyoshi Korenaga, Jun Kobayashi; Evaluation of Toughness of Reinforced Concrete
Columns with Column with (longitudinal) Round Bar Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, Proceedings
of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 19, No. 2, pp. 219 - 224, June 1997
Society for the Study of Construction SR-CF Method: Guideline for Design and Construction of
Reinforced Concrete Columns by SR-CF Method, December 1997
Shigeru Shirato; Experiment of High-speed Loading for Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with
Carbon Fiber Sheets, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of
Japan, C-2, pp. 679 - 680, September 1997
Masahiro Kobayashi, Nobuhiro Araki, Katsuhiko Nakano, Ikuhiko Matsuzaki, Hiroshi Fukuyama;
Experimental Research on Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Beams Reinforced with
Continuous Fiber Sheets for Shear: Adhesion of Main Reinforcement and Impact of Adhesion of Sheets,
Taku Arakawa; Research on Shear Resistance of Reinforced Concrete Beams, Report No. 25, Engineering
Department of Hokkaido University, 1961
The Architectural Institute of Japan: (Proposed) Guideline and Summary for Seismic Design of
Reinforced Concrete Buildings with Guaranteed Toughness, 1997
- 82 -
3.2 Strengthening of Reinforced Concrete Beams

3.2.1
Overview
The method of strengthening existing reinforced concrete beams with continuous fiber
reinforcements aims at mainly preventing shear failure of the beams to increase toughness by
placing continuous fiber reinforcements around the beams, and to improve the ductility index
of the toughness of columns adjacent to the beams.
[Comments]
The strengthening of beams is an effective method of reinforcement for buildings whose

columns are evaluated by the third diagnostics as a shear beam ruling type or whose major
earthquake resistant elements are shear walls attached the shear failure type boundary beams.
The method mainly aims at preventing the shear failure of beams by changing adjoining
columns to a flexural yielding type beams by placing continuous fiber reinforcements
perpendicular to the axes of members, to improve the toughness of buildings and to increase
the value of the ductility index F of toughness.
3.2.2
Strengthening methods and structural details
When continuous fiber reinforcements are used for strengthening beams against shear, fiber
sheets are placed around rectangular beams thoroughly. However, when continuous fiber
reinforcements can not be placed thoroughly around beams because slabs are connected,
attach the ends of the materials to building frames by proper methods and confirm that the
beams have the same effect of strengthening as verified by experiments with the materials
placed around rectangular test specimens.
[Comments]
The strengthening methods and structural details for placing continuous fiber reinforcements
around rectangular beams are the same as described in Section 3.1 for the strengthening of
independent columns.
Reference 1 reported the effect of strengthening by comparing a rectangular reinforced
concrete beam, which has shear reinforcement ratios as experimental variables, and another
beam, which has almost the same sectional shape as the former one, continuous fiber
reinforcements for strengthening against shear, and the quantity of the materials as variable
factors. Figure 3.2-1 indicates the relationship between the quantity of shear reinforcement
and the maximum shear stress during experiments. The quantity of shear reinforcement along
- 83 -
the horizontal axis was derived by adding the quantity of shear reinforcement of existing
reinforce concrete (pws wys) to the figure derived by multiplying the shear reinforcement
ratio (pwf) by the standard tensile strength (f). According to this, the beam, which was
strengthened against shear by thoroughly placed continuous fiber reinforcements, increased
strength as ordinary reinforced concrete beams when the quantity of shear reinforcement was
increased, although the tensile strength for design, which is effective at the time of the
maximum strength, of continuous fiber reinforcements has to be taken into account.
However, in reality, it is difficult to place continuous fiber reinforcements like columns
because slabs are attached to beams in buildings unless the concrete of the slabs is removed.
Maximum shear stress during experiments su (MPa)
Based on past research on the shear reinforcement of beams (T-shaped) with slabs reinforced
with continuous fiber reinforcements, we introduce the types of the construction methods and
the effects of reinforcement.
Rectangular beams strengthened
with reinforcing materials (CFRP)
Rectangular beams
strengthened with
reinforcing materials
(AFRP)
Rectangular shaped reinforced concrete

(without strengthening)
Rectangular shaped CFRP
(with strengthening)
T-shaped AFRP
(with strengthening)
T-shaped reinforced concrete
T-shaped beams
strengthened with the
methods indicated in
Figure 3.2-3 (CFRP)
T-shaped Type I
T-shaped Type II
T-shaped Type III
T-shaped Type IV
Quantity of shear reinforcement pws wys + pwf f (MPa)
Figure 3.2-1 Relationship between the quantity of shear reinforcement

and the ultimate shear stress
- 84 -
Preferable
construction method
In direction
of fiber
Less effective in
strengthening
a. Wrapping in a U-shaped
configuration
b. Wrapping to the underside

of a slab
L-shaped fastener
Flat steel bar
c. Wrapping in a U-shaped
configuration and securing
at the sides of a beam
e. Wrapping to and securing

on the underside of a slab
d. Wrapping to the underside

of a slab and securing at the
sides of a beam
f. Wrapping to and securing

Figure 3.2-2 Method of Adhering Continuous Fiber Reinforcements to T-shaped Beams
Figure 3.2-2 indicated the methods used to adhere continuous fiber reinforcements. The ends
of continuous fiber reinforcements are self-attached without using fasteners in a and b in the
figure. Continuous fiber reinforcements are wrapped in a U-shaped configuration in a in the
figure. The ends of continuous fiber reinforcements are wrapped on the underside of the slab
in b in the figure. Literature with Reference No. 2 reported that its methods were effective in
shear reinforcement to a certain degree but continuous fiber reinforcements peeled off in each
case. If the adhesion of continuous fiber reinforcements affects the shear strength of members,
great shear reinforcement is not expected because the adhesion is minimal in comparison with
the tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements.
Continuous fiber reinforcements are wrapped in a U-shaped configuration and bolted with flat
steel bars in-between on the sides of beams in c in the figure. Like b, d shows continuous fiber
reinforcements wrapped in a U-shaped configuration and bolted with L-shaped fasteners
in-between on the sides of beams. These bolts were secured with chemical anchors first,
followed by mechanically-secured anchors. According to References 3, 4, 5 and 6, these
methods of adhering were effective for shear reinforcement. However, Literature with
References Nos. 2, 7, 8 and 9 reported that continuous fiber reinforcements adhered on the
sides of beams caused splitting failures between slabs and beams as indicated in Figure 3.2-2
on the underside of the beams, x and x, and were not so effective in shear reinforcement. As
indicated above, the results of the experiments were different even though the method of
adhering was the same. In these experiments, test specimens with highly effective
reinforcement had one-way simple loading of a simple-beam type, and test specimens with
- 85 -
splitting failures had repeated loading of an asymmetric-moment type. Because the

construction method in the guideline aims to improve seismic retrofit, it would be more
realistic to experiment with the stress of the latter case. As indicated above, the methods of the
experiments make a difference in the effect of the reinforcement of continuous fiber
reinforcements. The method of wrapping continuous fiber reinforcements to building frames
by fasteners has not yet been established as a viable method of reinforcing. Its effect has to be
verified by experiments before adopting it.
As described above, when continuous fiber reinforcements are used for T-shaped beams to
strengthen them against shear, the ends of the materials have to be adhered to slabs with the
methods e or f as indicated in Figure 3.2-2.
When the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements are adhered by fasteners, specifications
should be made for angles and bolts that fully guarantee that continuous fiber reinforcements
ensure tensile strength against the design shear as described in Section 3.1.3 (2). The number
and strength of bolts should also fully ensure tensile strength against the design shear.
L-shaped fasteners to be installed in inner corners should be designed not to suffer plastic or
rotating deformation caused by the tension force of continuous fiber reinforcements. Since the
inner corners are not necessarily exactly 90 degrees, thorough construction planning is
necessary like the method of installing L-shaped fasteners.
Literature with Reference No. 2 reported that experimental results on continuous fiber
reinforcements placed by the method indicated in Figure 3.2-3 and the effect of strengthening
was verified. Figure 3.2-1 indicates the results of the experiment. The experiments showed
that there was a difference in shear strength according to the methods of adhering the ends of
continuous fiber reinforcements. However, regardless of the respective methods, the degree of
the increase of the ultimate shear strength was small when the quantity of shear reinforcement
was increased. Furthermore, the effect of shear reinforcement was inferior compared to the
reinforcement of rectangular test specimens with continuous fiber reinforcements placed
thoroughly as indicated in the figure.
- 86 -
Type II
Wrapping to a slab
Type I
Wrapping to a U-shaped
configuration
Bolt
Type III
Wrapping to a slab and bolted
on the sides of a beam
Type IV
Wrapping to a slab and bolted
Figure 3.2-3 Method of wrapping continuous fiber reinforcements

as used in Reference 2
Literature with Reference No. 11 introduces an experiment of T-shaped beams by the CF

anchor method as a way to adhere the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements. This is a
method to strengthen beams with slabs or columns with low partitions against shear by
bundling carbon fiber strands, inserting them through small holes in slabs or walls, and
overlaying and adhering carbon fiber sheets on both ends. The characteristics of construction
method is that fasteners are not used but the same continuous fiber reinforcements are used to
secure the ends. The experiment concluded that the maximum strength of all test specimens
strengthened with continuous fiber reinforcements was greater than a test specimen without
strengthening, but the shear reinforcement was not as effective as rectangular beams with
continuous fiber reinforcements placed thoroughly because their strength is affected by the
ultimate bending strength and bond splitting strength. However, the method is highly useful in
that it does not require fasteners but can provide reinforcement similar to that with continuous
fiber reinforcements thoroughly placed around only by using continuous fiber reinforcements.
3.2.3
Evaluation methods for strength

The ultimate bending strength of a reinforced concrete beam is calculated by formula
(3.2.1) as follows:
- 87 -
Mu = 0.9 atyd (N mm)
(3.2.1)
at: Area of tension reinforcement (mm2)

y: Strength of tension reinforcement at the yield point (MPa)
d: Effective whole length of a beam (mm)
The ultimate shear strength of a reinforced concrete beam is calculated by formula
(3.2.2). The tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for designing shear (fd)
should be the same as the one used in 3.1.3. (2).
0.053p t 0.23 (17.6 Fc )
0.845 p ws wys p wf fd b j (N)

Qsu =
M /(Qd) 0.12
(3.2.2)
However, when M/(Q d) is 1 or less, use 1, and when M/(Q d) is 3 or more, use 3.
When pws wys + pwf fd exceeds 10 MPa, use 10 MPa.
where,
pt: Tension reinforcement ratio (%)
Fc: Compressive strength of concrete (MPa)
pws: Shear reinforcement ratio of an existing portion
wys:
Strength at yield point of shear reinforcement of an existing portion
pwf: Shear reinforcement ratio of continuous fiber reinforcements
fd: Tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements for designing shear (MPa)
d:
Effective whole length of a beam
M/Q: Shear span (mm)
However, L0/2 can be used. L0 is the inside dimension between each beam.
j:
Distance between tension and compression resultants (mm) and 7/8d can be used.
[Comments]
In addition to formula (3.2.1), the ultimate bending strength of beams is calculated by formula
(3.1.3) with axial force as 0. In principle, the calculation is based on the effect of the arranged
in middle height of beams with multiple reinforcement arrangement. Because the guideline
deals with rectangular beams, we do not take into account the effect of the reinforcement of
slabs.
- 88 -
Experimental figures of the maximum

strength/Shear force at the time of the maximum
bending strength based on formula (3.2-1)
RC (without
strengthening)
CFRP (with
strengthening)
AFRP (with
strengthening)
Shear strength based on formula (3.2.2)/Shear force at the time

of the maximum bending strength based on formula (3.2.1)
Figure 3.2-4 Comparison between the experimental and calculated figures
of the maximum strength
Figure 3.2-4 compares the experimental and calculated figures of the maximum strength of
rectangular reinforced concrete beams based on the results of past experiments of reinforced
concrete beams using continuous fiber reinforcements to strengthen against shear 1), 3), 4), 10), 12),
13)
. The figure includes the test specimens of reinforced concrete without the reinforcement of
continuous fiber reinforcements. According to this, the ultimate shear strength of the
respective test specimens, which are strengthened against shear, are evaluated on the safe side
by formula (3.2.2) like the reinforced concrete members, which are strengthened against shear
by ordinary stirrups.
At present, when the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements are adhered by fasteners, the
effect of strengthening often decreases in comparison with the method of placing them around
rectangular members. Therefore, various improvements should be made including
construction methods for inner corners. When the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements are
adhered to building frames to strengthen against shear, the effect of strengthening should be
verified by conducting experiments.
The ductility index (F) of the toughness of columns adjacent to beams should follow the
Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity of Reinforced Concrete and Steel Encased
Reinforced Concrete respectively.
- 89 -
Footnote for CGS unit:

Formula (3.2.1):
Mu = 0.9 atyd (kgf cm)
(3.2.1)
where,
at (cm2)
y (kgfcm2)
d (cm)
Formula (3.2.2):
0.053p t 0.23 (180 Fc )
2.7 p ws wys p wf fd b j (kgf)

Qsu =
M /(Qd) 0.12
When pws wys + pwf fd exceeds 100 kgf/cm2, use 100 kgfcm2.
where,
pt (%)
Fc (kgf/cm2)
wys (kgf/cm2)
fd (kgf/cm2)
d (cm)
M/Q (cm)
j (cm)
- 90 -
(3.2.2)

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Mizuki Naoi, Hiroshi Fukuyama, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Nobuhiro Araki, Katsuhiko Nakano: Experimental
Research on Shear Strength of Rectangular Reinforced Concrete Beams Reinforced with Continuous
Fiber Sheets for Shear, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute
of Japan, C-2, pp. 677 - 678, September 1997
Nobuhiro Araki, Hiroshi Fukuyama, Yoshihiro Matsuzaki, Masateru Fujita, Katsuhiko Nakano;
Experimental Research on Structural Performance of T-Shaped Reinforced Concrete Beams Reinforced
with Continuous Fiber Sheets for Shear, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Yuichi Sato, Hideo Katsumata, Katsuaki Obata; Reinforced Concrete Beams Reinforced with CFRP
Sheets for Shear, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of
Michiaki Ito, Kazuyuki Sumi, Tsunehisa Matsuura, Norimitsu Hayashida, Yoshinari Tanaka; Research on
Seismic Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Members Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets,
No. 2: Experiment of Shear Reinforcement of Beams, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting
Munehiro Moui, Yasuo Higashibata, Yasumasa Miyauchi, Kunio Fukuyama, Keiichi Kokubo, Hiroshi
Yamamoto, Tetsuya Uchida; Research on Shear Reinforcement of Reinforced Concrete Beams
Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Tsunehisa Matsuura, Kazuyuki Sumi, Norimitsu Hayashida, Shinichi Iizuka, Hirotsugu Kato; Research on
Seismic Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Members Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets
(No. 3), Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2,
pp. 269 - 270, September 1998
Yoshiaki Aritome, Toshiyuki Kanakubo, Tomoki Furuta, Masaaki Matsui; Research on the Method of
New Seismic Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Structures (No. 3), Toughness of T-Shaped
Beams Reinforced with CFRP Sheets, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Naoto Fujita, Hitoshi Nagai, Toshiyuki Kanakubo, Yoshiaki Aritome, Masaaki Matsui; Research on
Seismic Strengthening of Existing T-Shaped Reinforced Concrete Beams Reinforced with CFRP (No. 1 2), Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp.
183 - 186, September 1998
Hideyuki Suzuki, Hiroshi Nishihara, Tomoo Matsumoto, Taku Tabata; Shear of T-Shaped Beams and
Columns Strengthened with Carbon Fiber Sheets, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 20, No.
3, pp. 1183 - 1188, June 1998
Hiroshi Fukuyama, Masaomi Teshigawara, Hiroshi Noguchi; Shear Reinforcement of Reinforced
Concrete Beams Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual
Hideo Iizuka, Yasuo Kanno, Junichi Iketani, Kido Yabe; Experimental Research on Shear Reinforcement
of T-Shaped Beams Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets and Strands, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete
Institute, Vol. 21, No. 3, pp. 1531 - 1536, July 1999
Hirohumi Kato, Takayuki Kojima, Nobuaki Takagi, Yuzuru Hamada; Experimental Research on Shear
Reinforcement of Reinforced Concrete Beams Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, Proceedings of the
Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 18, No. 2, pp. 101 - 106, June 1996
Kazuyuki Shimoda, Tomoya Nagasaka; Experimental Research on Effects of Aramid Fiber Taping on
Toughness of Existing Reinforced Concrete Beams, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting
- 91 -
3.4 Considerations
3.4.1
Strengthening without Removing Finishing Mortar
(1) Application
This section is applicable to surveying and designing reinforcement for reinforced
concrete and steel encased reinforced concrete rectangular columns by placing
continuous fiber reinforcements thoroughly around without removing finishing mortar.
[Comments]
(a) Past experiments and applicable conditions

In order to solve problems like noise and dust caused by the removal of finishing mortar,
experiments were carried out to determine the effect of strengthening without removing
finishing mortar 1) - 3). According to Reference 1, the experiments were carried out for the
methods of placing carbon fiber sheets thoroughly around columns to determine the
influence of removing finishing mortar, of the strength of finishing mortar and of the
openings in finishing mortar. Figure 3.4.1-1 indicates test specimens and Figure 3.4.1-2
the relationship between load and deformation based on the results of the experiments.
- 92 -
Name of test
specimen
Overlapping
length: 200 mm
Overlapping
length: 200 mm
Without finishing mortar

Strength of
Low
finishing
Ordinary
mortar
Finishing mortar without
adhesives
Finishing mortar with
openings
(Without finishing mortar)
CF-MO
CF-ML
CF-MM
CF-M-B
CF-M-P
Finishing
mortar
Test specimen: CF-MM

Test specimen: CF-MO
(With finishing mortar)
Hoop D6, 120 mm

on center
(135 hook
Extra length 6d)
Main reinforcement 6-D13
(a) With/without finishing mortar
Extent of reinforcement 860
Test specimen with openings

or without adhesives
Test specimen: CF-ML

Test specimen: CF-MO
(b) Low strength of finishing mortar
Test specimen: CF-M-B

Test specimen: CF-M-P

Test specimen
with openings and
without adhesives
(Unit: mm)
Figure 3.4.1-1 Test specimens1)
(c) Finishing mortar with/without adhesives (d) Finishing mortar with openings
Figure 3.4.1-2 Relationship between load and

deformation1)
According to these, when there are remarkable openings in finishing mortar, deformation
started at an early stage in comparison with when the finishing mortar was removed.
When the strength of finishing mortar was low such as about 10 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) or
there was no more adhesive between existing members and finishing mortar, the
relationship between load and deformation was almost the same as that when finishing
mortar was removed.
In addition, experiments were done to determine the impact of finishing tiles1) and the
impact of adhesion between finishing mortar and carbon fiber reinforcing materials2), and
observations were also made by using aramid fiber sheets3).
However, many issues remain unsolved regarding the effect of strengthening when
finishing mortar remains. If strengthening work were done by leaving finishing mortar
without properly repairing cracks caused at finishing mortar or existing members, the
strength would not demonstrate its required effect.
- 93 -
In consideration of these, in principle this guideline requires removal of finishing mortar

when columns are reinforced; only when appropriate construction management is
executed, strengthening work as described in this section is applicable without removing
finishing mortar.
(b) Extent of application
The applicable continuous fiber sheets are carbon and aramid fiber sheets, and columns
applicable to strengthening in this guideline are those planned according to the Standards
for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity of Reinforced Concrete and Steel Encased Reinforced
Concrete4), 5), and this guideline (Figure 3.4.1-3). In other words, the methods of
reinforcement and the quantity of reinforcement for the columns must be known in
advance. The survey and the design of strengthening in this section are applicable to all
columns when finishing mortar remains.
Though there are various finishing materials applied over finishing mortar, this guideline
established the types of finishing materials, and the possibility and conditions of leaving
finishing materials as indicated in Table 3.4.1-1.
Table 3.4.1-1 Types of Finishing Materials, Possibility and Conditions of
Leaving Finishing Materials
Type of finishing materials
Painting and multiple hard

layers of thick painting
materials
Possibility of
leaving
Conditions for possibility of leaving
Conditionally
possible
In addition to the conditions indicated in

Table 3.4.1-4, bond strength must be 1 MPa
or more, and materials should not cause any
chemical reactions with primer or have
adverse effects during strengthening work.
Because of chipping, action should be taken
to improve bond strength.
Not possible
Lithin finish and spraying

Plastering
Finishing tiles
Elastic finishing painting
materials
Wallcovering (fabric
wallcovering, etc.)
Other finishing materials
- 94 -
Start
Survey
(1) Preliminary survey
(2) Detailed survey
(3) Survey of finishing
materials
(4) Survey of the soundness of
existing building frames
Survey
Removing
finishing
mortar
Necessity of
repair work for existing
building frames*
Required
* Make a decision on the necessity of repair work of

existing building frames on each floor where surveys
are made, and remove finishing mortar on the floors
where repair work is decided to be necessary.
Impossible
Repairing
existing
building frames
Removing
finishing
mortar
Impossible
Impossible
Possibility of
leaving finishing mortar during
strengthening work
Necessity of
repair work for finishing
mortar
Judgement and
methods of
processing
Possible
Refer to Table 3.4.1-4.
Required
Repairing finishing mortar
Refer to Figure 3.4.1-6.
Design of reinforced columns without removing finishing mortar
Design
(1) When tm D/15 and the judging conditions as indicated in Table 3.4.1-4 are met,
use the quantity of reinforcement as originally calculated with the condition that
finishing mortar is removed.
(2) When tm > D/15, remove finishing mortar unless a special study is made.
Construction documentation
tm: Thickness of finishing mortar

D: Depth of an existing member
Construction
Construction
(1) Preliminary survey

(2) Construction planning
(3) Execution of
construction
Figure 3.4.1-3 Flow of Strengthening Work without Removing Finishing Mortar
There is concern over low bond resistance between finishing and strengthening materials
when paint or multiple hard layers of thick painting materials are used. However, an
experiment 2) concluded that the effect of strengthening hardly lowered even though the bond
resistance between continuous fiber reinforcements and finishing mortar was removed. Paint
is likely to soften or swell by causing chemical reactions with primer during strengthening
work. In view of these, in addition to the conditions for finishing mortar as indicated in Table
3.4.1-4, we decided that it was possible to leave only such finishing materials with a bond
strength of 1.0 MPa (10 kgf/cm2) or more that do not cause chemical reactions with primer
nor adversely affect the effect of strengthening during strengthening work. However, action
- 95 -
should be taken to improve bond strength as required when there is chipping.

Lithin finish, spraying, plastering and wallcovering have to be removed and the substrate of
mortar has to be exposed to apply strengthening work described in the guideline. The
substrate of mortar has to be removed for finishing tiles unless a special study is made. This is
based on the experiment 1) that concluded that toughness tended to be lower for finishing tiles
and there were still many unsolved factors.
There are plaster finishing 6) materials such as dolomite and gypsum plaster. Sometimes,
fibers for plastering are mixed when undercoats or intermediate coats are applied, but in such
cases the compressive strength is lowered significantly. Therefore, all plaster finishing
materials including undercoats have to be removed for strengthening work.
(2) Surveys
(a) Preliminary survey
A preliminary survey should be conducted to determine the deteriorated condition of
finishing mortar roughly and to plan for the surveys (b) to (d) based on the construction
documents, the maintenance and records of repair work of buildings where work is done.
[Comments]
(i) Extent of preliminary survey

The preliminary survey should be conducted in areas where strengthening work is done;
the following items should be surveyed:
Number of years after completion of construction
Outward conditions
History of repair work
Extent and specifications of finishing mortar
(ii) Specifications of finishing mortar

In general, finishing mortar starts with the application of undercoats onto the concrete
surfaces of building frames, followed by surfacing, intermediate coats and overcoats.6)
Since surfacing is done after undercoating to adjust the unevenness of concrete surfaces,
it may be omitted if the condition of the concrete surface is satisfactory. In mixing
finishing mortar, increase the quantity of cement for undercoats and decrease it for
intermediate coats and overcoats with consideration for workability and to prevent
dryness, shrinkage and cracking. During the application of intermediate coats and
- 96 -
overcoats, admixtures like slaked lime are mixed to improve workability, but caution is
required because compressive strength decreases.
Finishing mortar was a construction method widely used up to the mid-1970s. Since then,
construction methods were improved like plywood forms and monolithic surface finishes
became widely used along with improved craftsmanship of concrete surfaces of building
frames7). Refer to Tables 3.4.1-2 and 3.4.1-3 for the mixing of finishing mortar and the
thickness of coating based on JASS15 8) revised in 1989.
Tables 3.4.1-2 Mixing of Finishing Mortar based on JASS15 8) (revised in 1989)
(To be applied over concrete surfaces)
Undercoating
Ratio of cement
to sand
Surfacing and
intermediate coating
Ratio of cement to sand
Overcoating
Ratio of cement
to sand
Interior wall
1 : 2.5
1:3
1:3
Exterior wall and

other
1 : 2.5
1:3
1 : 3.5
Location of
application
Note: The mix proportion of inorganic additives used for the overcoats on interior walls should be 1 for
Portland cement and about 0.1 to 0.3 for slaked lime, dolomite plaster, pozzolan and light yellow
plaster.
Tables 3.4.1-3 Standard Thicknesses of Coating based on the JASS15 8) (revised in 1989)
(To be applied over concrete surfaces)
(mm)
Location of
application
Undercoating
Surfacing
Intermediate
coating
Overcoating
Interior wall
0-6
Exterior wall and

other
0-9
0-9
(b) Detailed survey

The detailed survey should be conducted to clarify the following items in order to decide
construction documents and the details of strengthening:
a) The types of details of window and finishing materials around columns where
strengthening work is done
b) The conditions of electric outlets and existing plumbing and piping that are
connected to columns where strengthening work is done, and adjacent equipment
- 97 -
(c) Survey of finishing materials

(i) Survey of soundness of finishing mortar
a) Survey of cracks
Check all applicable columns for cracks visually.
b) Survey of loose parts
Check each surface of all applicable columns for loose parts by sounding.
(ii) Survey of strength of finishing mortar
Check all applicable columns by Schmidt hammer tests.
[Comments]
(i) Survey of soundness of finishing mortar

In order to judge the conditions for starting strengthening work without removing
finishing mortar, refer to Table 3.4.1-4 for the conditions that are based on the survey of
cracks. Each surface of all applicable columns should not have any harmful cracks,
damage or any remarkably loose parts 14).
Table 3.4.1-4 Checklist for Surveys of Finishes and Soundness of Existing Members 14)
Surveying item
Survey of finishes
1-1. Survey
of cracks
(1) Survey of
soundness
of finishing 1-2. Survey
mortar
of loose
parts
(2) Survey of strength of

finishing mortar
Survey of soundness of existing

members
Number of locations to
survey
Method of
survey
Conditions of judging the

conditions
for
starting
strengthening work without
removing finishing mortar
All
Visual
inspection
Each surface of all applicable

columns should not have any
harmful cracks or damage.
All
Sounding
Each surface of all applicable

columns should not have any
remarkably loose parts.
All
Schmidt
hammer
test
The scleroscope hardness of

the surfaces of finishing
mortar should be 40 or more
in all areas on applicable
floors to be surveyed.
One or more columns

per every five columns
on each floor where
retrofit work is planned
At least one column
should be surveyed on
each floor.
- 98 -
Visual
inspection
There should be no harmful

cracks, insufficient thickness
of cover concrete, or exposed
and rusty reinforcing bars in
all areas on applicable floors
to be surveyed.
Harmful cracks and damage mean the cracks of finishing mortar, which are caused by the
cracks or damage of existing members, by the cracks in the surfaces of finishing mortar
with an opening width of 0.5 mm or more, or by rusty reinforcing bars. The reason why
the cracks in the surfaces of finishing mortar with an opening width of 0.5 mm or more
are included is that cracks with an opening width of 0.3 mm or more are most likely to
appear in the concrete of existing members even though it is difficult to generalize. The
harmful cracks in existing members are caused by earthquakes, the corrosion of
reinforcing bars, uneven settlement, fires, alkali-aggregate reactions, chemical reactions
caused by acid and salt, and insufficient sectional areas and reinforcing bars10).
The remarkably loose parts of finishing mortar mean such parts that are easily peeled off
like chipping (Figure 3.4.1-6).
Check the finishing mortar for loose parts as follows9):
Hit lightly the surface of the finishing mortar by hammer, check loose parts and mark
around the areas of loose parts.

When there is a loose part, bore one or more holes into the mortar with a diameter of
about 50 mm on each floor, measure the thickness of the finishing mortar, insert a
music wire into the hole and check the width of the loose part and the interior
conditions of the loose part.
After boring, fill the hole according to (b) Repairs of finishing mortar in (3)
Judgement and procedures.
(ii) Survey of strength of finishing mortar
In order to survey the strength of finishing mortar, measure the scleroscope hardness of
the surfaces of finishing mortar by using Schmidt rebound hammers11) (NR type) for
ordinary concrete.
Measure at one or more locations per each column about one meter high above the
floor. Verify that areas to be measured are free from any loose parts in finishing
mortar.
Measure at even and dry surfaces.
When paint or Zoracoat is used for finishing surfaces, measure the scleroscope
hardness of the surfaces without removing the finishes. However, when wallcovering
is used, remove it to expose the surfaces of finishing mortar.
Measure 20 areas of about 30 cm by 30 cm that are 5 cm or more away from the
corners of columns and 5 cm or more apart from each other.
Calculate the arithmetic average of the scleroscope hardness (R) measured at all points
- 99 -
in each area. However, any value, which is considered abnormal or whose deviation is
20% or more, should be replaced to get the average value.
(d) Survey of soundness of existing members
For this survey, remove finishing mortar partially, check the concrete surfaces of existing
building forms for any defective construction such as harmful cracks and honeycombs
and exposed or rusty reinforcing bars, and measure the thickness of cover concrete.
If there is any defective construction like honeycombs, check the degree and repairing
conditions of the defect.
Select areas to be surveyed evenly and check at least one or more columns per each five
columns on each floor.
[Comments]
(i) Areas to be surveyed

In principle, check the lower parts of columns up to about 30 cm above the floor across
the widths of the columns, where construction defects are easily caused like honeycombs,
by removing finishing mortar. The number of columns to be checked is based on JASS5
that requires quality inspections be conducted for every 150 m3 volume of concrete as
follows:
If the unit weight of the reinforced concrete of columns is 24 kN/m3 and the weight of the
reinforced concrete of building frames is 9 kN/m2, the floor area equivalent to the volume
of the concrete of columns is 400 m2 (150 24/9). If the floor area that one column
carries is 36 m2, there will be 11.1 columns in 400 m2 (400/36). The number of columns
to be checked was decided on the assumption that about 40% of these columns are
strengthened.
However, if the actual conditions differ significantly from the above conditions, change
the number of columns to be surveyed. When the concrete surfaces of existing members
are visually observed through shaft space of access panels at ceilings, check those
conditions also.
(ii) Exposed and rusty reinforcing bars
When reinforcing bars are exposed through the concrete surfaces of existing members or
there are stains caused by rusty reinforcing bars, the required effect of strengthening is
- 100 -
not attained if strengthening work is done without taking any action. In such a case,
check the conditions thoroughly and take appropriate action.
(3) Judgement and procedures
(a) Judging the possibility of strengthening work without removing finishing mortar
Make a judgement after examining each item that is surveyed as indicated in (2). Only
when all conditions are met, execute strengthening work without removing finishing
mortar.
[Comments]
(i) Basic items

Judge the necessity of repair of existing members on each floor. When existing members
are deemed to require repairs on any floor, do not execute strengthening work for any of
the columns, which require strengthening, without removing finishing mortar (Figure
3.4.1-3). On such a floor, remove finishing mortar from all the columns that require
strengthening, verify the soundness of existing building forms and execute the required
strengthening work (as indicated in (c)).
When the finishing mortar surfaces of the columns on any floor that require strengthening,
have a scleroscope hardness of less than 40, do not execute strengthening work without
removing the finishing mortar of all the columns on the floor that require strengthening
work. This was decided based on the workmanship of finishing mortar and the reliability
of the scleroscope hardness measured by Schmidt rebound hammers. However, when
columns with a scleroscope hardness of 40 or less are confirmed to be confined to a
certain area, they are not subject to this rule.
(ii) Values for judging scleroscope hardness
As indicated in Table 3.4.1-4, strengthening work can be executed without removing
mortar when the scleroscope hardness of finishing mortar surfaces is 40 or more. This is
based on the fact that the compressive strength of 10 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) or more is
ensured when the scleroscope hardness of finishing mortar surfaces is 40 or more and that
even mortar with low strength of about 10 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) does not significantly
lower the ultimate strength and the toughness of columns without removing finishing
mortar in comparison with columns without finishing mortar. 1), 2)
- 101 -
Compressive strength (kgf/cm2)

Fco = 13R 184
Formula to evaluate lower limits

Fmo = 15R 425
(Formula by the
Society of Materials
Science, Japan)
Fm = a Fmo = 10R 270

(a = 0.63)
Concrete:
Concrete
Finishing mortar
Material age of 20 to 50
years old
Core strength7)
Finishing mortar: Material age of 7 to 90 days
Cylinder strength
Number of data
Average value
Fc = a Fco
(a = 0.63)
Wall
Column
Number of locations = 1,732

Average value = 50
Standard deviation = 4.1
Coefficient of variation
= 8.1%
Scleroscope hardness
Scleroscope hardness (R)
Figure 3.4.1-4 Relationship between Compressive
Figure 3.4.1-5 Histogram of
Strength and Scleroscope Hardness of
Sclero-scope Hardness
12)
Existing Concrete and Finishing Mortar
of Finishing Mortar12)
Figure 3.4.1-4 indicates the relationship between the compressive strength and
scleroscope hardness of finishing mortar of up to 90 days old that was applied in
laboratories. The figure also indicates the results13) of the measurements of the concrete
of existing reinforced concrete buildings that were built 20 to 50 years ago. According to
the results of the experiments, a compressive strength of 100 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) is
ensured for the aged finishing mortar when scleroscope hardness is 40 or more. As
indicated in Figure 3.4.1-512), 5% to 10% of existing reinforced concrete buildings had a
scleroscope hardness of finishing mortar of less than 40.
According to Literature with References Nos. 1 to 3, the compressive strength of the
concrete of existing members exceeds 24 MPa (240 kgf/cm2), which was considered the
maximum value of the strength for the design standard before 1981, and the compressive
strength of finishing mortar was lower than the actual compressive strength of the
concrete of existing members. Therefore, we considered it appropriate that the
compressive strength of finishing mortar is about 10 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) when the
strength of the concrete of existing members for the design standard is up to about 24
MPa (240 kgf/cm2). As indicated in Figure 3.4.1-4, we provided some leeway for the
values of judging scleroscope hardness when compressive strength is 10 MPa (100
kgf/cm2).
(iii) Factors affecting scleroscope hardness
As indicated in Figure 3.4.1-2, the compressive strength, which is evaluated based on the
scleroscope hardness of finishing mortar surfaces (overcoats), seems to be lower than the
compressive strength of undercoats because the quantity of cement used for the overcoats
is reduced compared to the undercoats. However, the impact is small according the
- 102 -
results of some experiments12). According to another survey12) of the actual conditions of

finishing mortar in existing buildings, no interrelation was found among the scleroscope
hardness of finishing mortar, the compressive strength and the depth of the neutralization
of the concrete of existing members, and the thickness of finishing mortar. Therefore, the
strength of finishing mortar can be judged appropriately based on the scleroscope
hardness of finishing mortar surfaces regardless of the compressive strength of the
concrete of existing members, or the thickness of finishing mortar.
The impact of material age is taken into account for the lower limit (40) of scleroscope
hardness by multiplying the correction coefficients n (= 0.63)11) of material age.
(b) Repairs of finishing mortar
1) Judge the necessity of repair of finishing mortar according to Figure 3.4.1-6.
2) When finishing mortar has cracks, chipping or loose parts, select the appropriate
methods of repair work suitable for the degree of the condition according to Section
4.2.6 and plan the repairs.
[Comments]
Caution is required when finishing mortar is repaired as follows:

1) When there are both cracks and loose parts, remove finishing mortar partially and apply
finishing mortar newly in the same way as missing finishing mortar is replaced.
2) When loose parts have worsened, or the corners of columns have loose parts, remove
mortar and apply finishing mortar newly in the same way as replacing missing finishing
mortar.
3) When finishing mortar is newly applied, use materials that do not lower the strength of
columns.
- 103 -
Start
Cracks
Missing
Worsened *
Yes
0.3 mm wide
or less
Repair not
required
No
Cement rendering
method
Repairing cracks
Automatic low-pressure epoxy
resin injection method
Yes
Remove finishing mortar

partially and repair in the
same way as replacing
missing finishing mortar
with new.
*: Worsened loosen parts are easily peeled off like

chipping.
Loose parts
Ordinary
Width
of a loose
1 mm or more
Repair by the polymer

cement slurry injection
method.***
Small**
No
Repair by the
epoxy resin
injection method
with pins.
Repair not
required
**: Small loosen parts have a width of less than 1

mm, an area of about 0.1 m2 or less, and a total
area of 20% or less of the total area of a column.
*** If a loosen part has a width of 3 mm or less, repair
by the epoxy resin injection method with pins.
Figure 3.4.1-6 Flow of Selection of Methods for Repairing Finishing Mortar 14)
(c) Repair of existing members

When the soundness of existing members is ruined, plan appropriately for repairs suitable
for the damaged conditions according to Section 4.2.7.
[Comments]
(i) Basic policy of repairing existing members

Because damaged existing members may ruin the seismic performance of building
structures, and there is a wide variety of damage, it is difficult to decide standardized
methods for repairs. Therefore, when repairs are made on existing members, make a
careful study according to the degree of damage each time and plan appropriately for
repairs.
(ii) Damage that requires repair
Damage that requires repair is as follows:
Harmful cracks
Cracks caused by an earthquake

Cracks caused by insufficient reinforcing bars
Cracks caused by corroded reinforcing bars
Cracks caused by uneven settlement, a fire, alkali-aggregate reactions and chemical
reactions caused by acid and salt
- 104 -
Defective construction such as honeycombs

Insufficient thickness of cover concrete
Corrosion of reinforcing bars
(4) Design of reinforcement for columns without removing finishing mortar

In order to design reinforcement for columns, calculate the ultimate strength and
toughness of columns in consideration of the impact of finishing mortar.
(a) When tm D/15 and the conditions of judging are met for the survey of finishing
materials as indicated in (c) Survey of finishing materials in (2) Surveys, use the
quantity of reinforcement as originally calculated on condition that finishing mortar is
removed.
(b) When tm > D/15, remove finishing mortar unless a special study is made.
where,
tm: Thickness of finishing mortar
D: Depth of an existing member
[Comments]
Experiments1) - 3) of reinforcing columns without removing finishing mortar confirmed that

such columns had almost the same ultimate strength and toughness as columns whose mortar
had been removed, even though the finishing mortar had low strength or adhesion was lost
except that there were remarkable openings in finishing materials. The ratio of the thickness
of finishing mortar to the depth of an existing member (tm/D) was set as 1/15 for the test
specimens used in the experiments to simulate standard columns. When tm is thinner than
D/15, the impact of finishing mortar on the ultimate strength and toughness of strengthened
columns seems to decrease. Therefore, when tm D/15 and the conditions of judging are
met as indicated in Table 3.4.1-4, the ultimate strength and toughness of strengthened
columns are calculated based on the depth of existing member in the same way as columns
whose finishing mortar has been removed.
When tm exceeds D/15, toughness is most likely to decrease when the ultimate flexural
strength increases. Since its impact is not fully understood, we decided to remove finishing
mortar when columns are strengthened unless a special study is made. Although detailed
experimental verification has not been made, Literature with Reference No. 14 proposed
methods of calculating the additional quantity of reinforcement to ensure toughness for the
situation as mentioned above.
- 105 -
Li
Average value
Number of data
T
Number of locations = 290
Average value = 28 mm
Standard deviation = 10 mm
Coefficient of variation = 36.9%
Mo + Li: Lithin finish over mortar

Mo + T: Spraying finish over mortar
Mo + P: Paint finish over mortar
(Paint finish: Multi-colored patterned
paint or latex coating)
Mo:
Mortar finish
or more
Thickness of finishes
Figure 3.4.1-7 Histogram of Thickness of Finishing Mortar 12)
According to the survey12) of the actual conditions of finishing mortar in existing buildings,
the thickness of finishing mortar varied from 7 mm to 80 mm and the average value was
about 30 mm.
<References for Section 3.4.1>

1)
Kiyoshi Masuo, Toshiya Inoue, Kazutoshi Sugimoto, Toru Otani and Takumi Uematsu; Experiment on
Impact of Finishing Mortar on Effect of Strengthening Steel Plates and CFRP of Existing Reinforced
Concrete Columns, GBRC, No. 92, pp. 13 - 24, October 1998
2) Hiroshi Fukuyama, Kenji Motohashi, Isao Fujimoto, Hiroyuki Nakamura, Hisayoshi Ishibashi, Yoshinobu
Asano, Hideyuki Suzuki; Theses for Symposium on Strengthening of Columns Strengthened with
Continuous Fiber Sheets, and on Concrete Reinforced with Continuous Fiber, Japan Concrete Institute, pp.
133 - 140, May 1998
3) Kiyoshi Masuo, Kazutoshi Sugimoto, Masaharu Tanigaki, Atsushi Shimida, Takumi Uematsu;
Experiment on Effect of Strengthening on Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with
Aramid Fiber Sheets, GBRC, No. 94, pp. 12 - 26, April 1999
4) Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association: Guideline and Summary for Improvement of Seismic
Retrofit for Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings, December 1990
5) Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association: Guideline and Summary for Improvement of Seismic
Retrofit for Existing Steel Encased Reinforced Concrete Buildings, December 1997
6) Kiyoshi Okada, Hiroshi Muguruma; Newly Revised Handbook of Engineering, Part 35, pp. 1312 1330,
Published by Asakura Shoten, September 1981
7) The Housing and Urban Development Corporation: Transition in Materials of Public Housing (Transition
and Maintenance Technology of Interior and Exterior Housing Parts)
8) The Architectural Institute of Japan: Architectural Construction Standard Specifications JASS15,
Plastering Standard Specifications, Revised in February 1989
9) The Housing and Urban Development Corporation: Common Specifications for Maintenance
Construction, Architectural Volume, 1998
10) Japan Institute of Construction Engineering, Committee on Improvement and Technological Promotion
for Durability of Buildings: Technology for Improvement of Durability for Reinforced Concrete
Buildings, Published by Gihodo
11) The Society of Materials Science, Japan, Committee on Methods of Judging Concrete Strength: Guideline
for Methods of Judging Compression Strength of Concrete by Schmidt Rebound Hammers, Revised in
October 1971
12) Kiyoshi Masuo, Toshikazu Sugimoto, Toshiaki Komiya, Toshiya Inoue, Toru Otani; Methods of
Simplified Evaluating and Judging of Compression Strength of Finishing Mortar of Reinforced Concrete
Buildings: Reference for Designing for Seismic Strengthening, GBRC, No. 93, pp. 10 21, January 1999
- 106 -
13) Yoshitsugu Nozaki, Tomozo Toyoda, Koichi Kobayashi; Application of Ultrasonic Wave Method,
Scleroscope Hardness Method and Combined Method to Existing Buildings, Method of Evaluating
Strength of Structural Concrete by Nondestructive Tests (No. 2), Structural Theses of the Architectural
Institute of Japan, No. 444, pp. 1 6, February 1993
14) Kiyoshi Masuo; Guideline for Strengthening of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns without
Removing Finishing Mortar, GBRC, No. 95, July 1999
- 107 -
3.4.2
Adhesion of Ends of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements
In principle, in order to wrap continuous fiber reinforcements, use a method to place and
adhere the materials thoroughly around members. If it is impossible to do so, use a method to
place the materials partially and adhere the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements
thoroughly.
(1) Adhesion of ends of continuous fiber reinforcements to independent columns
In order to adhere the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements to independent columns,
place the materials around and overlap the ends. Table 3.4.2-1 indicates the overlapping
lengths of continuous fiber reinforcements.
Table 3.4.2-1 Types and Overlapping Lengths of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements
Types of sheets
Overlapping length
(mm)
Carbon fiber:
Epoxy resin method
Amount of fiber: 200 g

200 or more
200 or more
Carbon fiber:
Methacrylic resin method

200 or more
200 or more
Aramid fiber:
Epoxy resin method
40 ton class
60 ton class
90 ton class
200 or more
200 or more
300 or more
Types of construction methods
(2) Adhesion of ends of continuous fiber reinforcements to other members

In order to reinforce T-shaped beams, columns with wing walls and shear walls by
continuous fiber reinforcements, place the materials around them partially and adhere the
ends of the materials by fasteners and anchors to adhere thoroughly. Because the methods
of adhering the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements to these members have many
unresolved structural issues, verify the effect of strengthening by experiments.
[Comments]
A wide variety of methods are used to wrap continuous fiber reinforcements according to the
members to be reinforced and the purpose of reinforcement. The methods of placing
continuous fiber reinforcements are roughly divided into two as indicated in Figure 3.4.2-1.
The first method is used for independent columns or rectangular beams to wrap them around
thoroughly with continuous fiber reinforcements to strengthen against shear (Figure 3.4.2-1
(a)). In this case, the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements are overlapped.
- 108 -
The second method used for almost all types of T-shaped beams, columns with wing walls
and shear walls is to place continuous fiber reinforcements partially (Figure 3.4.2-1 (b)).
Because the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements are not overlapped with each other
around the members, adhere the ends to part of the members. Although many methods have
been proposed to secure the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements by fasteners and anchors,
there are still many unresolved structural issues. Therefore, verify the effect of strengthening
by experiments when using any method.
Continuous
fiber
reinforcing
materials
Anchor
Overlapping
Wrapping thoroughly
around an independent
column
Continuous
fiber
reinforcing
materials
Continuous
fiber
reinforcing
materials
Fastner
(b1) Wrapping partially (b2) Wrapping partially

around a T-shaped
around a T-shaped
beam with fasteners
beam
and anchors
(a) Thoroughly placing type
(b) Partially placing type
Figure 3.4.2-1 Method of Wrapping and Adhering Continuous Fiber Reinforcements
(1) Adhesion of ends of continuous fiber reinforcements to independent columns

Figure 3.4.2-2 indicates typical methods to place and adhere around independent
reinforced concrete and steel encased reinforced concrete columns. In the figure, (a)
indicates an example of wrapping around a column with continuous fiber reinforcements
overlapping with each other, and (b) indicates an example of using continuous fiber
reinforcing tapes continuously. Although continuous fiber reinforcements do not
necessarily overlap with each other in (b), the materials are thoroughly wound around a
column. Therefore, (b) is considered one of the methods as indicated in (a).
According to the methods of wrapping as indicated in the figure, continuous fiber
reinforcements are formed in the configuration of hoops. In this case, the adhesion of
overlapping sections affects the effect of strengthening. The types of adhesives and
overlapping lengths affect adhesion the most. Some high-quality adhesives have been
developed and many experiments have been also conducted for the overlapping lengths.
- 109 -
Continuous fiber
reinforcements
Continuous fiber
reinforcements
Overlapping
length
Overlapping
length
(a1) Wrapping around

and overlapping at
two locations
Continuous fiber
reinforcements
(a2) Wrapping around

and overlapping at
one location
Winding with tapes
(b) Taping type
(a) Overlapping type
Figure 3.4.2-2 Method of Wrapping Continuous Fiber Reinforcements

around Independent Columns
Recently various strengthening methods have been proposed regarding proper overlapping
lengths and they are technically and generally highly regarded. In general, for the use of
carbon fiber reinforcing materials, some experiments have already concluded that an
overlapping length of 100 mm is sufficient. However, many guidelines provide some leeway
on the safe said and recommend 200 mm1) - 3). Figures 3.4.2-3 and 3.4.2-4 indicate examples
of the experiments of these overlapping lengths.
Figure 3.4.2-31) indicates an adhesion test with a carbon fiber sheet wrapped around and
adhered to a concrete block and another carbon fiber sheet wrapped and adhered again to test
the adhesion strength of overlapping. The parameters of three lengths were set to overlap
carbon fiber sheets (40 mm, 100 mm and 160 mm). Only the test specimen with 40-mm-long
overlapping caused continuous fiber reinforcements to peel off and collapse with the low
maximum load. But both the test specimens with 100-mm-long and 160-mm-long overlapping
caused continuous fiber reinforcements to rupture with almost the same maximum load (about
1,700 kgf) and the experiment concluded that there was no difference in the effect between
both lengths.
Figure 3.4.2-42) indicates an adhesion test with five kinds of parameter (20 mm, 30 mm, 50
mm, 100 mm and 150 mm) for the overlapping lengths of carbon fiber sheets. Only
continuous fiber reinforcements were used for the adhesion test without simulated concrete.
As indicated in the figure, the overlapping length of 50 mm was verified to have an
overlapping strength that exceeded the designed strength.
Similar experiments were conducted for aramid fiber sheets, and concluded that appropriate
overlapping lengths were 200 mm or more, or 300 mm or more4), 5). For the use of continuous
fiber reinforcing tapes, the experiments required to wrap both ends of the tapes around
members once or more.
- 110 -
Table 3.4.2-1 indicates overlapping lengths, which are based on these experiments and should
be used in the guideline. The overlapping length for carbon fiber sheets should be 200 mm or
more and the overlapping length for aramid fiber sheets 200 mm or more, or 300 mm or more.
Since they are used with impregnated adhesives, related regulations in Part 4: Construction
for Strengthening should be also carefully examined.
Side
Front
List of test results

Reinforcing
materials
Overlapping
length Lj
(mm)
Maximum
load*1
(kgf)
Average bond
stress*2
(kgf/cm2)
Conditions of
failures
40
1,200
37.5
Peeled strengthening
materials
100
1,680
Ruptured strengthening
materials
160
1,660
Ruptured strengthening
materials
Notch
Reinforcing
materials
Reinforcing
bar, D 22
Shape and dimensions of a

test specimen (mm)
*1: Average value of two specimens

*2: Value derived by dividing the maximum load by the areas
(2 surfaces) of adhesion
Figure 3.4.2-3 Overlapping Length of Carbon Fiber Sheets (1)1)
Overlapping strength (kgf/cm )
Overlapping strength
Designed tensile strength
Allowable tensile stress

(long-term)
Overlapping length (L) (mm)

Figure 3.4.2-4 Overlapping Length of Carbon Fiber Sheets (2)2)
- 111 -
(2) Adhesion of ends of continuous fiber reinforcements to other members

In order to adhere continuous fiber reinforcements to T-shaped beams (attached to slabs),
columns with wing walls and shear walls, methods have to be such that the materials are
partially wrapped around and adhered to them. Figure 3.4.2-5 indicates an example of
adhering to T-shaped beams. There are construction methods to place and adhere
continuous fiber reinforcements to the sides of beams, to extend and adhere to the
underside of slabs and to use both fasteners and mechanically-secured anchors in order to
increase the effect of adhesion at the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements.
In direction
of fiber
Less effective in
strengthening
a. Wrapping in a U-shaped
configuration
Flat steel bar
c. Wrapping in a U-shaped
configuration and securing
at the sides of a beam
b. Wrapping to the underside

of a slab
Preferable
construction method
e. Wrapping to and
securing on the
underside of a slab
L-shaped fastener
d. Wrapping to the
underside of a slab and
securing at the sides of
a beam
f. Wrapping to and
securing on the
underside of a slab
and a beam
Figure 3.4.2-5 Method of Adhering Ends of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements

to T-shaped Beams
In order to obtain reference data for designing these methods of strengthening, various
experiments have been conducted to test the bond strength of continuous fiber reinforcements
and concrete and for overlapping lengths. In general, the experiments verified that
strengthening materials with short overlapping lengths tended to peel off and collapse and that
strengthening materials with longer overlapping lengths tended to rupture1), 3). Some
experiments concluded that the bond strength of strengthening materials and concrete was
improved by roughening the concrete surfaces6). However, other experiments concluded that
adhesive strength was limited in strengthening without causing reinforcing materials to
rupture even though overlapping lengths were elongated7), and that strengthening materials
gradually started peeling off around the ends, where the materials were pulled, when
bond stress exceeded 2 N/mm2 (20 kgf/cm2)8) and the materials were not able to carry loads
- 112 -
any more. Therefore, it is difficult to improve adhesion only by adhering strengthening

materials.
In order to improve bond strength, a method has been studied in which the ends of
strengthening materials are properly reinforced and secured. Specifically, a method of using
fasteners and anchor bolts to mechanically secure them has been studied6), 8), 9).
Figures 3.4.2-6 and 3.4.2-7 indicate examples of past methods to test securing the ends of
reinforcing materials by fasteners and anchor bolts. Figure 3.4.2-66), 8) indicates a test method
to wrap strengthening materials to a flat surface and secure the ends by fasteners and anchor
bolts. Figure 3.4.2-76), 9) indicates a test method to simulate a column with a wing wall, and an
inner corner made with a slab and a beam. These tests showed that tensile force was sustained
in the end by the adhesion of fasteners and strengthening materials at the ends, and by the
friction of tightened anchor bolts when reinforcing materials were secured on a flat surface by
fasteners and anchors6), that the tightening strength of anchor bolts greatly affected the
maximum strength6), 8), and that the thicknesses of angles affected the bond strength of
strengthening materials when the angles were used to secure reinforcing materials at the inner
corner9). Because there are still many unresolved structural issues for securing the ends of
continuous fiber reinforcements to T-shaped beams, wing walls and shear walls, verify the
effect of strengthening by experiments when using any methods.
Steel plate (200 115, PL 2.3)

Steel plate (595 130, PL 2.3)
Carbon fiber sheet
Carbon fiber sheet
Steel pipe
Section to
add loads
Section to
be tested
Deformed steel bar, D32

(Adhesion lost)
Securing length
Length of
adhesion
Hole to install channel steel,

20 mm dia.
Flat bar, PL 70
Length of adhesion
Section to
secure
Steel plate, PL 12
Anchor bolt and flat bar
(b) Test method b 8)
(a) Test method a 6)
Figure 3.4.2-6 Test Method of Securing the Ends of Reinforcing Materials

by Fasteners and Anchor Bolts (1)
(When continuous fiber reinforcements are wrapped on flat surfaces)
- 113 -
Steel plate
(gripping part)
CFRP sheet
Deformed steel bar
Carbon fiber sheet
Angle
Steel pipe
Steel plate, PL 20
Concrete
Base metal
Section to
add loads
Anchor bolt
Anchor to be
mechanically
installed
Angle
Device to fasten
a test specimen
Section to
be tested
Adhesion on 2
surfaces
Section to
secure
Section to
secure
Anchor bolt and angle
Deformed steel bar, D32

(Adhesion lost)
(b) Test method b 8)
(a) Test method a 6)
Figure 3.4.2-7 Test Method of Securing The Ends of Reinforcing Materials

by Fasteners and Anchor Bolts (2)
(When strengthening materials are wrapped to a column with a wing wall, and to an inner corner)
For further information on the methods of securing the ends of reinforcing materials when the
materials are partially placed, refer to other sections in Part 3: Design of Reinforcing
Members and Parts for the reinforcement of various members.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Motoyuki Okano, Kozo Kimura, Katsuaki Obata; Research on Reinforcement of Existing Members
Reinforced with Carbon Fiber, No. 1: Basic Experiment on Carbon Fiber Reinforcing Sheets, Bulletin of
Technology Research and Development Institute, Obayashi Corp., Vol. 43, pp. 29 - 32, August 1991
Hideo Iizuka, Kido Yabe, Jun Kobayashi, Munehiro Kei, Shigeo Watanabe, Kanji Yamada; Construction
Method for Seismic Strengthening of Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets,
Theses for Symposium on Concrete Reinforced with Continuous Fiber, Japan Concrete Institute, pp. 187 192, May 1998
Shoji Umemura, Yoshihisa Atobe, Seiken Kumada, Chiaki Tsujimura; Research on Seismic Strengthening
of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, No. 1: Test Result of
Material Characteristics, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural
Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 153 - 154, September 1996
Report of the Research Committee on Concrete Strengthened with Continuous Fiber, Japan Concrete
Institute, July 1997
Report of the Research Committee on Concrete Strengthened with Continuous Fiber (II), Japan Concrete
Institute, May 1998
Akira Watanabe, Gaku Yanagisawa; Experimental Research on Securing Ends of Carbon Fiber Sheets,
Kozo Kimura, Katsuaki Obata, Akira Ohno; Research on Adhesive Properties of Carbon Fiber Sheets and
Concrete, Theses on Structural Engineering Vol. 41B, pp. 527 - 536, March 1995
- 114 -
8)
9)
Shoji Umemura, Yoshihisa Atobe, Kotaro Inoue, Norimitsu Hayashida, Kazuyuki Sumi; Research on
No. 3: Test Result of Adhesion of Ends, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
Yoshiaki Aritomo, Toshiyuki Kanakubo, Naoto Fujita, Takumi Uematsu, Masaaki Matsui; Research on
Adhesion of Ends of Continuous Fiber Sheets, No. 1: Securing CFRP Sheets by Angles, Summaries of
Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 199 - 200,
September 1998
- 115 -
3.4.3
Strengthening of Columns with Wing Walls
(1) Strengthening of columns with wing walls that adjoin away from the corners of columns
In order to strengthen columns with wing walls against shear when the wing walls adjoin
away from the corners of columns, evaluate the wings walls properly. When columns are
reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements to strengthen against shear between the
columns and adjoining wing walls, in principle, provide slits in wing walls adjacent to
columns, or fur out wing walls with concrete to align with columns and reinforce
columns by placing continuous fiber reinforcements thoroughly around them.
[Comments]
As already seen in damage caused by an earthquake, columns with wing walls become brittle
and collapse if reinforcing materials are not sufficient against shear because columns with
wing walls, which have short shear spans with high stiffness, are inclined to receive
concentrated force. Besides, there are more columns with wing walls, low partitions or fascias
than mere independent columns. Since the Great Hanshin Awaji Earthquake, studies have
been conducted to use continuous fiber reinforcements effectively to reinforce these columns
with wing walls as reinforcing materials to strengthen them against shear.
Continuous fiber reinforcements are most effective when placed thoroughly around members
without dents. If there are any wing walls attached to columns, continuous fiber
reinforcements can not be placed thoroughly around the columns. Therefore, the latest
research recommends providing slits in wings walls adjacent to columns, to place reinforcing
materials thoroughly around the independent columns, to fur out wing walls with concrete to
align with columns for reinforcement, or to secure the ends of reinforcing sheets as indicated
in Section 3.4.2.
The fracture mode of columns adjacent to wing walls is mostly shear failure when wing walls
are long relative to the lengths of columns. In these cases, in order to change the fracture
mode to the ultimate bending strength by strengthening columns and wings walls against
shear, use a large quantity of reinforcing materials against shear or devise methods of
strengthening columns and wing walls.
The purposes of reinforcing columns adjacent to wing walls by using continuous fiber
reinforcements are indicated below from (a) to (c) with their respective major characteristics
based on past research.
- 116 -
(a) To improve the ultimate shear strength

To improve the ultimate shear strength, one method is to adhere continuous fiber
reinforcements in the direction of the hoops of columns or the horizontal reinforcement of
wing walls, and to secure the ends of the reinforcing materials with fasteners and
bolts1),2),3). In this case, there are two main purposes. Firstly, when buildings are strength
resistant type, increase of strength is required. Secondly, the ultimate shear strength of
columns with wing walls is turned to be beams yield prior to columns. The ductility index
(F) of toughness is 1.5 in the case of columns with shear failure type beams, and 3.0,
columns with flexural yielding type beams. However, when structural conditions require
a ductility index (F) of 1.0 with the shear span ratio of 1 or less, verify the performance in
detail by experiments.
(b) To improve ductility
There are three examples of past research to improve ductility as follows:
(i) Construction method to provide slits between columns and wing walls to separate
them from each other and place continuous fiber reinforcements thoroughly around
the columns and wing walls by treating them as independent columns4), 5), 6).
(ii) Construction method to provide slits at the top and the bottom of wing walls adjacent
to beams and along floor slabs, and to evaluate the wing walls as columns5).
(iii) Construction method to bore holes in columns adjacent to wing walls, insert carbon
fiber strands through the holes, open them in a fan-shaped manner, overlap them at
carbon fiber sheets, which are adhered in advance on the columns, and to evaluate
the columns as independent columns with reinforcing materials wrapped thoroughly
around them6), 7).
When slits are provided, the stiffness and ultimate strength often decrease compared to
those without them, but the required ductility index (F) of toughness is easily ensured.
However, when slits are problematic because of weathering or fire compartments, fill the
slits with proper fillers and take care not to ruin their performance as independent
columns.
(c) To improve the ultimate shear strength and ductility
To improve the ultimate shear strength and ductility, there is a construction method to fur
out wing walls in alignment with concrete and place continuous fiber reinforcements
thoroughly around them4). If necessary, it is possible to add anchoring reinforcement and
flexural reinforcement and set the ultimate shear strength and the ultimate flexural
strength arbitrarily. However, since this construction method increases the weight to be
- 117 -
sustained by the foundation and also reduces the effect of strengthening because of
flattened columns after furring out the wing walls, it is suitable for wing walls with
relatively short lengths.
Figures 3.4.3-1 to 3.4.3-3 indicate construction methods and effects that improved toughness
among construction methods previously reported for reinforcing columns with wing walls
reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements.
Little research has been done on columns with wing walls reinforced with continuous fiber
reinforcements. There is one research on the use of aramid fiber but all other researches are
related to strengthening with carbon fiber sheets. Therefore, we need to accumulate more data
on evaluation methods used when continuous fiber reinforcements can not be placed
thoroughly around members. Since most of the construction methods have filed applications
for patents and require that applications be filed for licensing, caution is required when
adopting them. Great caution is also required when the parts of columns away from the
corners of the columns are reinforced partially by reinforcing materials because the other
parts of the columns are not strengthened sufficiently against shear.
No. 13 (Literature 1)
Slit
Wing wall
Shear force (kN)
Carbon fiber sheet
Relative displacement
Q envelope
(Column with an isolated wing wall by slit)
Figure 3.4.3-1 Result of Experiment For Slits Provided at the Bottom of a Wing Wall5)
- 118 -
Test specimen: C
Test specimen: C + CFRP
[Series 1: Square column]
Shrinkage-compensating
grout mortar
(1) Series 1: Square column
Test specimen: C + W
Test specimen: C + W + CFRP
[Series 2: Column with wing walls]
Slit
(2) Series 2: Column with wing walls
Test specimen: C + WS
Test specimen: C + WS + CFRP
[Series 3: Column with wing walls (with slits)]
Shrinkage-compensating grout concrete
(3) Series 3: Column with wing walls with slits
Test specimen: C + WR + CFRP
Test specimen: C + CR + CFRP
[Series 4: Column with wing walls [Series 5: Square column (to be

(to be furred out to strengthen)]
furred out to strengthen)]
Overview of test specimens
(4) Series 4: Column with wing walls to be

furred out to strengthen
(5) Series 5: Square column to be

furred out to strengthen
Relationship between load and deformation, and the conditions of failures
Figure 3.4.3-2 Result of the Experiments for Slits Provided between Columns and Wing
Walls, and for Furred-out Wing Walls and Columns4)
- 119 -
Loaded beam
(stub)
Direction
loading
(a) Test specimen of Series CF
Main reinforcement: 16 mm to 19 mm dia.
Hoop: 6 mm dia., 300 on center
Wall reinforcement: 2 mm to 6 mm dia., 200
mm on center lengthwise and crosswise
Shear force (tf)
Joint translation angle
Column with wing walls: mortar
Footing beam
(stub)
Overview of test specimens
Horizontal deformation (mm)
Shear force (tf)
Shear force (tf)
Shear force (tf)
Shear force (tf)
No
reinforcement
(b) Test specimen of Series CW
Only 2 stories of
columns reinforced
without mortar
Column with wing

walls without
mortar
Column with wing

walls without
mortar
Relationship between shear force and joint translation angle
Figure 3.4.3-3 Result of Experiment for Carbon Fiber Strands7)
(2) Reinforcement of columns with wing walls that align with columns on one side
In order to evaluate columns with wing walls, which align with columns on one side,
treat them as independent columns with disregard for the wing walls. In principle, in
order to reinforce the columns with wing walls, which align with columns on one side,
with continuous fiber reinforcements, provide slits in the wing walls and place the
materials thoroughly around the columns.
[Comments]
According to the current Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity, the wing walls, which
align with columns on one side, are disregarded and columns are treated as independent
rectangular walls. In principle, in order to strengthen the columns against shear by using
continuous fiber reinforcements, provide slits in wing walls and place the materials
thoroughly around the columns. However, since the provision of slits involves extensive work,
fasteners and bolts are often used to secure the ends of the materials as described in Section
3.4.2, or carbon fiber strands are also often used as described in (1). Past studies verified
experimentally that ductility was ensured to a certain degree by using fasteners effectively
without placing reinforcing materials thoroughly around columns, which had wing walls in
- 120 -
alignment with the columns on one side2), 8), 9), 10). In particular, Literature with Reference No.
10 showed that the same ductility was attained as independent columns, around which
reinforcing materials were thoroughly placed, by using fasteners effectively as indicated in
Figure 3.4.3-4. However, since its applicability and evaluation methods have not been
clarified, in principle this guideline requires slits be provided for columns, which have wing
walls in alignment with the columns on one side, and reinforcing materials be placed
thoroughly around the columns.
Rounded corner with a
diameter of 20 mm
Axial force
Main
reinforcement
Positive
loading
Location of adjoining
walls at right angles
L-shaped fastener
Hoop
M16 7
Shear force Q (kN)
Negative
loading
Direction of
loading
Direction f fiber
Direction of
loading
Direction f fiber
Direction f fiber
Cracks in
resin mortar
Shapes of test specimens
Story deformation angle R ( 10-2 rad)
Tensile
force of
bolt
Resin mortar
Carbon fiber
sheet
Shear force Q (kN)
Bolt, M16 bolt
Cracks in
resin mortar
Tensile force of sheet
Story deformation angle R ( 10-2 rad)
Detail of L-shaped
fastener
Detail of inner corner
Relationship between shear force (Q)

and story deformation angle
Figure 3.4.3-4 Result of Experiment and Shapes of Test Specimens of Walls

with Walls Adjoining at Right Angles10)
- 121 -

1)
Masayuki Watanabe, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Yasutoshi Sonobe, Hiroyuki Nakamura, Masato Iso;
Experimental Research on Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns with Wing Walls
Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets for Shear, No. 1: Summary of the Experiment, No. 2: Study on the
Experiment, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan,
C-2, pp. 647 - 650, September 1997
2) Yasumasa Miyauchi, Yasuo Higashibata, Munehiro Moui; Research on Shear Strength of Reinforced
Concrete Columns with Wing Walls, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
3) Kazuo Yagishita, Osamu Chiba, Gaku Yanagisawa, Kazuyuki Sumi, Norimitsu Hayashida; Research on
No. 5: Experiment on Shear Reinforcement of Columns with Wing Walls, Summaries of Technical Papers
4) Kiyoshi Masuo, Toshiya Inoue, Toru Otani; Effect of Strengthening of Structural Slits and Carbon Fiber
on Reinforced Concrete Columns with Wing Walls, No. 1: Planning of the Experiment, No. 2: Results of
5) Masabumi Toyoda, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Yasutoshi Sonobe, Hiroyuki Nakamura, Masato Iso, Masayuki
Watanabe; Experimental Research on Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns with Wing
Walls Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets for Shear, No. 1: Summary of the Experiment, No. 2:
Study on the Experiment, No. 3: Study on the Effect of Strengthening, Summaries of Technical Papers of
Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 211 - 216, September 1998
6) Shigeji Hayashi, Tomoo Sano, Yasuo Kanno, Hideo Iizuka; Structural Performance of Columns with
Wing Walls Reinforced with Methyl Methacrylate (MMA) Resin and Carbon Fiber Sheets for Shear,
7) Hideo Iizuka, Yasuo Kanno; Structural Performance of Reinforced Concrete Columns and Columns with
Wing Walls Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets for Shear, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual
8) Yasuo Kanno, Takufumi Sato, Yuichi Takase, Toru Myojo; Research on Reinforcement of Reinforced
Concrete Structures Designed by the Old Standards, No. 2: Reinforcement of Columns Reinforced with
Carbon Fiber Sheets and Steel Plates, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the
9) Hideyuki Suzuki, Akira Nishihara, Tomoo Matsumoto, Taku Tabata; Shear of T-Shaped Beams and
Columns Reinforced with Carbon Fiber Sheets, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 20, No.
3, pp. 1183 - 1188, July 1998
10) Hiroshi Fukuyama, Isao Fujimoto, Hiroyuki Nakamura, Hideyuki Suzuki; Experimental Research on
Columns Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets in Existing Buildings, No. 5: Effect of Strengthening
of Columns with Adjoining Walls at Right Angles, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting
- 122 -
3.4.4
Strengthening of Columns with Low Partitions
(1) Strengthening of columns with low partitions or fascias that adjoin away from the corners
of columns
In order to strengthen columns, which are inclined to suffer shear failure and which have
low partitions or fascias adjoining away from the corners of columns, with continuous
fiber reinforcements, provide the same quantity of strengthening for the whole columns
in principle.
[Comments]
Reinforced concrete columns, which have low partitions or fascias adjoining away from the
corners of columns, have small shear span ratios and are inclined to suffer shear failure. In
particular, when shear span ratios are 1 or less, design the columns in the same way as
designing extremely short columns, and when the columns are inclined to suffer shear failure,
design the columns in the same way as designing extremely brittle columns. If columns suffer
shear failure, they are treated as Class 2 if the columns do not have adjoining walls or beams,
which sustain axial force exerted on the columns. Therefore, extra caution is required for
columns that have low partitions or fascias adjoining away from the corners of columns and
are inclined to suffer shear failure.
There are three main kinds of measures for columns that have low partitions or fascias
adjoining away from the corners of columns and are inclined to suffer shear failure. The first
method is to strengthen columns against shear with continuous fiber reinforcements. When
columns are strengthened against shear, the columns tend to suffer bending failure, or beams
tend to suffer yield after the ultimate shear strength of columns is increased. The second
method is to provide slits in low partitions or fascias to avoid shear failure. Slits should
strengthen columns to ensure the ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity and the whole
columns should be strengthened with continuous fiber if the slits do not provide sufficient
margin ratio of shear capacity to flexural capacity. The third method is to fur out wing walls
and fascias to shorten the lengths of columns so that the lengths of the flexible parts of the
columns are shortened, the shear strength and resistance of the columns are increased and
beams are designed to yield. Columns are also treated as walls by closing off openings.
Caution is required when clear span of column is calculated for the ultimate shear or bending
strength of columns that have low partitions or fascias adjoining away from the corners of
columns. According to the Guideline for the Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity of
Reinforced Concrete, the effective clear span of columns is designated as half the height of a
column. According to the Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity of Steel Encased
- 123 -
Reinforced Concrete, the effective clear span of columns vertically is designated as a quarter
of the height of a low partition or a fascia. Among past researches, Literature with Reference
No. 1 proposes a formula to evaluate the effective clear span of columns based on regression
analysis of the data of past experiments. Literature with Reference No. 2 proposes a formula
with assumed stress distribution in consideration of the impact of the compressive strength of
concrete and the thicknesses of low partitions. Caution is required when these formulas are
used to calculate the ultimate shear or bending strength because the ultimate strength often
becomes smaller than the actual value if clear span of column is used. When columns have
low partitions or fascias, the ductility index of toughness (F) is often overestimated if the
calculated values of the ultimate ductility factor are based on the ratio of shear capacity to
flexural capacity. The ductility index of toughness (F) should be calculated by standardizing
the ultimate ductility factor based on story height.
According to past research of columns with low partitions strengthened with continuous fiber
reinforcements2), columns that have low partitions or fascias adjoining away from the corners
of columns will not have any problem with the reinforcement of the whole columns if the
independent sections of columns are properly designed for strengthening (Figure 3.4.4-1). The
reason for this is that thick low partitions or fascias with high rigidity allow the behavior of
the independent sections of columns to dominate, so that the reinforcement of the independent
sections of columns will suffice. On the contrary, thin, breakable, low partitions or fascias
collapse after deformation and create diagonal cracks in columns adjacent to the low
partitions or fascias. However, if the low partitions or fascias collapse, the lengths of the
flexible parts of the columns increase with lowered strength but ductility increases.
Based on the results of research, in principle, the guideline requires the whole columns be
strengthened against shear with continuous fiber reinforcements. The reason for this is that
diagonal cracks created in low partitions and fascias may significantly lower strength and that
the applicable thicknesses and locations of low partitions and fascias has not been studied
sufficiently.
Like columns with wing walls adjoining away from the corners of columns, there are
problems with the methods of securing continuous fiber reinforcements used to strengthen
columns with low partitions or fascias against shear. Therefore, great caution and verification
by experiments are required.
- 124 -
Direction of
loading
Stub
CF sheet
Crushed
concrete
Low partition
(b) Conditions of ultimate failure
(a) At the time of maximum loading
Conditions of failures
Main reinforcement of columns: Tensile yield
Story shear force (kN)
Main reinforcement of
columns: Compressive yield
Flexural cracks
Maximum loading?
columns: Tensile yield
Shear reinforcement yield
columns: Tensile yield
Flexural cracks
Shear cracks
(diagonal cracks)
columns: Compressive yield
Maximum loading?
Story joint translation angle (rad)
(a) SS00 (without strengthening)
Story joint translation angle (rad)
(b) SS15b
Figure 3.4.4-1 Conditions of Failures and Results of Experiment of Columns

with Low Partitions2)
(2) Reinforcement of columns with low partitions or fascias that align with columns on one
side
In order to evaluate columns with low partitions or fascias, which align with columns on
one side, treat them as independent columns and ignore the low partitions or fascias. In
principle, provide the low partitions and fascias with the same quantity of reinforcement
as for the columns to strengthen against shear with continuous fiber reinforcements.
[Comments]
According to the current Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity, columns with low
partitions or fascias that align with columns on one side should be treated as independent
columns from the top of a floor slab to the underside of the beam above. If low partitions and
fascias are not strengthened against shear with the same quantity of reinforcement, shear
failure will occur in columns adjacent to the low partitions and fascias.
Like the columns with wing walls that align with columns on one side, there are problems
with the methods of securing continuous fiber reinforcements used to strengthen columns
with low partitions or fascias against shear. Therefore, great caution and verification by
experiments are required.
- 125 -
Very little research has been done on columns that have low partitions or fascias in alignment
with columns on one side, reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements. However,
according to Reference 3 as indicated in Figure 3.4.4-2, when the columns, which were
inclined to suffer shear failure, were reinforced only for the sections of the columns free from
low partitions and fascias, and the low partitions and fascias were left without reinforcement,
the sections of the columns adjacent to the low partitions and fascias failed after deformation.
In particular, if the low partitions and fascias that align with adjoining columns on one side,
are thick and the columns have eccentricity, the columns are restrained by the low partitions
and fascias and the parts of the columns adjacent to the low partitions and fascias are pushed
out at the time of shear failure. Therefore, effective ways to strengthen low partitions and
fascias against shear are necessary. It is important to strengthen the columns against shear in
either case when they have low partitions and fascias away from the corners of the columns,
or when they have low partitions and fascias in alignment with the columns on one side. In
principle, the whole columns should be strengthened against shear with continuous fiber
reinforcements.
When columns have thick low partitions and fascias with eccentricity, the ultimate bending
moment should be properly evaluated in consideration of the stirrups for the low partitions
and fascias.
- 126 -
Conditions of the ultimate failures
Test specimen without

strengthening
Test specimen only reinforced for the

parts of columns without low partitions
Test specimen reinforced throughout

the whole height of a column
Figure 3.4.4-2 Conditions of Failure and Results of Experiments of Columns with

Adjoining Low Partitions at Right Angles3)

1)
2)
3)
Takuma Hisatoku, Ikuo Tokuhiro; Research on the Impact of Structural Factors on the Ultimate Strength
of Reinforced Concrete Fascias and Low Partitions, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting
of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 395 - 396, August 1986
Hitoshi Shiobara, Fumio Kusuhara, Shigeru Shirato, Shinichi Suenaga, Ryoji Horyo, Hiroyuki Nakamura;
Theses for Symposium on Seismic Strengthening with Carbon Fiber Sheets for Strengthened Concrete
Columns Shortened by Low Partitions, and on Concrete Reinforced with Continuous Fiber, Japan
Concrete Institute, pp. 149 - 156, May 1998
Masahiro Kobayashi, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Katsuhiko Nakano, Hiroshi Fukuyama; Experimental
Research on Structural Performance of Columns with Low Partitions Strengthened with Carbon Fiber
Sheets, Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 21, No. 3, pp. 1417 - 1422, July 1999
- 127 -
3.4.5
Strengthening of Reinforced Concrete Walls
Establish proper evaluation and construction methods for the methods and effects of
reinforcement for reinforced concrete shear walls and nonstructural walls based on
experiments.
[Comments]
Existing buildings are often altered to improve seismic retrofit by adding shear walls or by
increasing the thicknesses of walls. Instead of the method to improve strength by increasing
the thicknesses of existing walls, some researches have been conducted on simpler
construction methods to adhere continuous fiber sheets to existing walls. The researches
showed that the shear strength was increased by about 10% to 30% by reinforcing with
continuous fiber reinforcements but the nature of failure and shear strength varied according
to the methods of adhering continuous fiber sheets and the use of fasteners at the ends of the
materials. The nature of failure varied from the partial peeling of continuous fiber
reinforcements and concrete, shear failure because of crushed concrete wall panels, punching
shear failure of walls, punching shear failure of columns and flexural failure, and indicated
that they were greatly influenced by the use of fasteners for the ends of continuous fiber
reinforcements and by the methods of securing. Therefore, when walls are strengthened with
continuous fiber reinforcements, detailed studies should be made to evaluate the methods of
wrapping continuous fiber sheets, the methods of securing the ends of reinforcing materials,
tensile strength for designing continuous fiber reinforcements that are used for calculating the
ultimate shear strength of walls, and the scope of the retrofit methods. The following shows
the results of past researches, an overview of the method of strengthening and examples of
evaluating the effect of strengthening:
(1) Results of past experiments on reinforcement of shear walls
Experimental researches on shear walls reinforced with continuous fiber reinforcements
were only reported in References 1 to 5 with a total of 16 test specimens (of which only 4
were reinforced concrete test specimens used as standards).
Table 3.4.5-1 indicates a list of test specimens used in respective literature and an
overview of experimental factors. Carbon fiber sheets were used for all the experiments.
The experiments aimed to identify the effects of improving the ultimate shear strength by
using continuous fiber reinforcements and the effects of improving the strength and the
nature of failure caused by securing the ends of the materials. The major experimental
factors were (1) the use and methods of wrapping the ends of sheets, (2) the locations and
- 128 -
methods of adhering sheets, (3) the availability of restraint around the corners of rooms,
(4) the availability of reinforcement for column capitals and bases, and (5) the impact of
cracks at an early stage.
Table 3.4.5-2 indicates the shapes of test specimens and an overview of the experiments,
and Table 3.4.5-3 the characteristics of continuous fiber reinforcements.
Table 3.4.5-4 indicates the results of the experiments. Though the methods of
experiments, the methods of strengthening continuous fiber reinforcements and the
methods of securing the ends of the materials vary according to the respective literature,
the maximum strength of the test specimens after reinforcement increased from 10% to
32% in comparison with the standard reinforced concrete test specimens. The test
specimens with continuous fiber sheets adhered to walls and secured at the ends tended to
have greater strength compared to the test specimens with continuous fiber sheets only
adhered to walls. However, deformation at the time of maximum strength was not
significantly improved overall. None of the literature reported that there was any rupture
of carbon fiber reinforcing materials used to strengthen walls at the time of maximum
strength, but some reported partial rupture.
Table 3.4.5-1 List of Test Specimens Used in Literature and an Overview
of Experimental Factors
Literature
Literature 1
Name of test
specimen
Methods of adhering continuous fiber sheets

and securing the ends
Overview of experimental
factors
RC
Without strengthening.
Reinforced concrete test

specimen set up as a standard
WCF
1 layer attached to the whole surface lengthwise

and crosswise on the front and the back sides
Without any mechanically

operated fastener at the ends
WCF-WA

and secured to walls with flat bars at the ends
Secured mechanically to walls
WCF-CA

and secured to walls with angles at the ends
Secured mechanically to
columns and beams
W1

W3
After cracking 1 layer wrapped to the whole

surface lengthwise and crosswise on the front
and the back sides
Reinforcement provided after

cracking at an early stage
W4


Literature 2
- 129 -
Literature
Name of test
specimen
Overview of experimental
factors
RC

W1CF
1 layer wrapped to the whole surface

lengthwise and crosswise on the front and the
back sides

W2CF
Columns strengthened with 1 layer wrapped to

the whole surface lengthwise and crosswise on
the front and the back sides
Same as W1CF. In addition,

the column was strengthened
against shear and the ends of
continuous fiber sheets were
overlapped.
W3CF
2 layers wrapped in parallel crosses on the front

and the back sides
Wrapped in parallel crosses

and mechanically secured at
the ends
W4CF

back sides

concrete was restrained at part
of the corners of concrete.
W5CF

back sides, 2 layers wrapped to column capital
and base in the width of a column

concrete was restrained at part
of the corners of concrete,
column capitals and bases
were strengthened.
W-1

W-2
2 layers wrapped in X-shaped crosses on the

front and the back sides
Wrapped in X-shaped crosses

the ends
W-3
2 layers wrapped in parallel crosses on the front

and the back sides
Wrapped in parallel crosses

the ends
Literature 3
Literature 5
Methods of adhering continuous fiber sheets

and securing the ends
Literature 4
- 130 -
Table 3.4.5-2 Shapes of Test Specimens and an Overview of the Experiments
Literature
Column
Section (mm)
Quantity of main
reinforcement
Arrangement of
hoops
Wall
Dimension (mm)
Thickness (mm)
Arrangement of
wall reinforcement
Literature 1
200 200
12-D13
4@150
1,100 1,480
70
D6@100
Literature 2
150 150
6-D10
D6@150
850 850
45
D6@100
Literature 3
and 5
240 240
12-D13
D6@150 - 200
1,400 1,760
60
D6@200
Literature 4
180 180
6-D13
D6@50
1,020 1,020
60
D6@100
Compressive
strength of
concrete
(MPa)
Axial
stress of a
column
(MPa)
Method of
loading
26.0
3.1
Cantilever with
reversed cyclic
loading
28.1
One-way
diagonal simple
loading
24.5
4.1
Cantilever with
reversed cyclic
loading
30.6
One-way
diagonal simple
loading
Table 3.4.5-3 Characteristics of Continuous Fiber Reinforcements

Literature
No.
Type of continuous fiber sheet
Quantity of
amount of fiber
(g/m2)
Youngs modulus
(GPa)
Tensile strength
(MPa)
Literature 1
Carbon fiber sheet
100
295
4,790
Literature 2
Carbon fiber sheet
300
244
(nominal value)
2,550
(nominal value)
300
237
3,710
300
245
3,570
300
237
3,710
Literature 3
Literature 5
Literature 6
Carbon fiber sheet

Carbon fiber sheet
The strain of carbon fiber reinforcing materials adhered to walls at the time of the maximum
strength was about 5,000 at the top in the vertical direction and about 2,200 at the center in
the horizontal direction according to Reference 1, 1,500 at the ends and about 2,000 at the
center according to Reference 2, about 1,500 to 1,600 near the ends according to Reference
3, and about 2,700 to 3,000 at the center and the ends according to Reference 4. Overall,
the values vary widely but are lower in comparison with the strain of carbon fiber reinforcing
materials at the time of the standardized tensile strength. The test specimens, which had the
ends of reinforcing materials secured, had greater strain at the center of walls. The methods of
adhering and the locations of sheets, and the locations (at ends and center) of measuring strain
were different in each literature.
- 131 -
Table 3.4.5-4 Results of Experiments

Ultimate
shear
strength
(kN)
Strength ratio to
the standard
reinforced concrete
test specimen
Deformation
angle (rad)
Type of failure
RC
805
1.00
3.1/1000
Shear failure through a column
WCF
883
1.10
3.5/1000
Punching shear failure, and

shear failure of a column
WCF-WA
1000
1.24
4.0/1000
Punching shear failure of a

wall panel
WCF-CA
1000
1.24
4.0/1000
Punching shear failure of a

wall panel
W1
371
1.00
3.4/1000
W3
358
0.97
3.0/1000
Partial peeling at the ends of

sheets
W4
462
1.25
3.1/1000
Partial peeling at the ends of

sheets
RC
931
1.00
4.5/1000
Crushed concrete and

punching shear of a column
W1CF
1060
1.14
3.5/1000

Literature 3 W2CF
and 5
W3CF
1111
1.19
4.8/1000
Crushed concrete
1230
1.32
4.3/1000
Crushed concrete and flexural

failure
W4CF
1083
1.16
5.1/1000

W5CF
1081
1.16
5.1/1000
Crushed concrete
W-1
486
1.00
5.2/1000
Shear failure
W-2
577
1.19
8.2/1000
Cracks of loading
W-3
620
1.28
7.4/1000
Cracks of loading
Literature
Literature 1
Literature 2
Literature 4
Name of
test
specimen
(2) Reinforcing methods and structural details

Many past experiments adopted the method of wrapping continuous fiber reinforcing
sheets lengthwise and crosswise in two directions to increase wall reinforcement. Though
some test specimens had continuous fiber reinforcements secured at the ends or restrained
concrete at the corners of walls, or reinforced columns in addition to continuous fiber
reinforcements wrapped, the methods of wrapping continuous fiber sheets are classified
as follows. In any of the methods, continuous fiber sheets were wrapped to both sides of
walls.
Method to wrap lengthwise and crosswise in two directions to the whole surface
Method to wrap in parallel crosses lengthwise and crosswise in two directions to part
of walls
- 132 -
Method to wrap in X-shaped crosses in diagonal directions to part of walls

Columns strengthened against shear in addition to the method indicated in
Column capitals and bases strengthened (for prevention of punching shear of
columns) in addition to the method indicated in
Corners of walls strengthened (for prevention of crushed concrete) in addition to the
method indicated in
According to the results of the experiments, any of the methods of wrapping increased the
ultimate shear strength of the walls that were strengthened. However, because the
increased quantity of ultimate shear strength and the types of failure were different
according to the methods of securing the ends or reinforcing materials, it is necessary to
evaluate in consideration of both the methods of wrapping continuous fiber sheets and the
impact of securing the ends. Figure 3.4.5-1 indicates the methods of wrapping continuous
fiber sheets adopted in the past experiments.
Angle or flat bar
Continuous fiber sheets

adhered lengthwise and
crosswise
Restrained concrete at part of a wall

crosswise

crosswise
Restrained concrete at part of a wall
and columns strengthened at column
capitals and bases

crosswise
Figure 3.4.5-1 Methods of Wrapping Continuous Fiber Sheets Adopted in Past Researches
Because continuous fiber sheets are adhered on surfaces to strengthen walls unlike
independent columns, around which continuous fiber sheets are wrapped thoroughly, many of
the test specimens in the past researches had the reinforcing materials secured at the ends by
angles, or flat bars and bolts (like mechanically secured anchors) in order to prevent the ends
from peeling off.
The methods to use fasteners to secure the ends of continuous fiber reinforcements
mechanically are either used to secure to walls, or to columns and beams by fastening bolts.
Some test specimens had restrained concrete at the corners of walls. In addition, some had
column capitals and bases strengthened. The following indicates the classification of securing
the ends in the past researches, and Figure 3.4.5-2 indicates some examples of the methods of
securing the ends in the past researches.
- 133 -
(a) Method to secure the ends of continuous fiber sheets wrapped on walls to the wall by
angles, or flat bars and bolts
(b) Method to secure the ends of continuous fiber sheets wrapped on walls to columns and
beams by angles, or flat bars and bolts
(c) Method to restrain compressed concrete at the corners of walls by continuous fiber
reinforcements, or by flat bars and bolts
(d) Method to secure the ends of continuous fiber sheets wrapped on walls to the wall
proportionally by angles and bolts
(e) Method to secure the ends of continuous fiber sheets wrapped on walls by overlapping
another continuous fiber sheets placed on columns
(f) Method to restrain compressed concrete at the corners of walls by continuous fiber
reinforcements, or by flat bars and bolts, and to strengthen with continuous fiber
reinforcements at column capitals and bases in the width of a column
The results of past experiments showed that the test specimens, which had the ends of
continuous fiber reinforcements secured by fasteners, had increased shear strength in
comparison with the test specimens without fasteners, and that the secured ends and the
restrained corners of walls impacted the conditions of failures. For instance, some researches
reported that concrete restrained by bolts at the corners of walls eased the reduction of
strength after the maximum strength5). However, since there is insufficient data on the
dimensions of fasteners, the diameters and spacing of bolts, appropriate methods should be
determined based on experiments.
- 134 -
Beam
Beam
Continuous fiber sheet
Column
Beam
Column
Column
Beam
Beam
Beam
Angle or flat bar
Angle
Bolt

or flat steel bar
Bolt
(a) Example of the end of a continuous

fiber sheet secured to a wall
(WCF-WA of Literature 1)
(b) Example of the end of a

continuous fiber sheet secured
to a column and beams
(WCF-CA of Literature 1)
Beam
Bolt
(c) Example of constrained

corners of a wall
(W4CF of Literature 5)
Beam
Column
Beam
Column
Column
Beam
Beam
Angle or flat bar
Beam
Sheet

or flat steel bar
Bolt
Bolt
(d) Example of the end of a continuous

fiber sheet secured to a wall
(W-2 and W-3 of Literature 4)
(e) Example of a column and a

wall strengthened with
continuous fiber sheets, the
ends of which are
overlapped and secured
(f) Example of a wall strengthened

with continuous fiber sheets with
constrained corners, and a column
strengthened with continuous fiber
sheets at the top and base of a
column
Figure 3.4.5-2 Examples of Methods of Securing the Ends of Continuous Fiber

Reinforcements in Past Researches
(3) Evaluation of strength and toughness

Few data are available on experiments of shear walls strengthened with continuous fiber
reinforcements. As an example of a formula to calculate the ductility index of strength,
we made a comparison study of experimental and calculated figures derived by the
formula of the ultimate shear strength for the wall with columns on both sides, which was
based on the Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity of Reinforced Concrete. The
results of the study are shown in Figure 3.4.5-3. The effects of continuous fiber
reinforcements are treated in the same way as the one of wall reinforcement, and the
tensile strength of 390 MPa for designing continuous fiber reinforcements was used in
- 135 -
Experimental figure/Calculated figure
lieu of yield points. The value was derived on the assumption that the maximum strain of
continuous fiber reinforcements was about 0.2% at the time of the maximum strength
based on the results of experiments.
Without strengthening sheets

With strengthening sheets
Calculated figure: Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity of
Reinforced Concrete
pf: Equivalent horizontal reinforcement ratio of continuous fiber
reinforcing materials
f: Tensile strength for designing carbon fiber sheets (f = 390 MPa)
Quantity of reinforcement (ps swy + pf f)
Figure 3.4.5-3 Comparison between Experimental and Calculated Figure
Table 3.4.5-5: Ductility index (F) of Toughness for the Second and Third Diagnostics
Ductility index (F) of toughness
Analysis in use
Flexural wall
1.0 - 2.0
Second and third analyses
Shear wall
1.0
Second and third analyses
Rotational wall
3.0
Third diagnostics
As a result, the past experiments verified that all experimental figures exceeded
calculated figures, and that the values derived by dividing the experimental figures by the
calculated figures were about the same as those without continuous fiber reinforcements.
However, since the evaluation was made based on the limited results of the experiments,
the types of failure may be different from the past experiments under different conditions
if the strength of surrounding frames like columns and beams is relatively low, the
quantities of the reinforcement of continuous fiber reinforcements are significantly
different or the methods of securing the ends are different. In order to propose evaluation
formulas for these various conditions and to verify their validity, further detailed research
is required.
- 136 -
As regards the ductility indexes of toughness, the past experiments showed that ductility
was slightly improved when fasteners were used to secure the ends of continuous fiber
reinforcements because concrete in the corners of walls was restrained from drastic
crushing. However, since the effect is difficult to evaluate at present and the effect is
considered to be due to fasteners instead of continuous fiber reinforcements, further
detailed studies are required. For the time being, the regulated values of the Standards for
Evaluation of Seismic Capacity for the ductility index of toughness should be complied
with as indicated in Table 3.4.5-5.
(4) Controlling damage of nonstructural walls
In the past, the problems of nonstructural walls attracted much attention from the
viewpoint of safety in an earthquake. The identified problems included the fact that
nonstructural walls furthered the shear failure of columns, etc. because the shear spans of
structural members were reduced when nonstructural walls were rigidly connected to
subsidiary rigid frames, and that the means of egress were not ensured because
nonstructural walls caused deformation and damage to openings in the walls. Therefore,
measures were taken to provide structural slits between nonstructural and structural
members. However, other problems surfaced after the Great Hanshin Awaji Earthquake in
1995 because improperly provided structural slits caused damage to frames and
nonstructural walls themselves, and the cracks in nonstructural walls (1) were expensive
to repair, (2) caused insecurity to residents in buildings with such cracks and (3) caused
problems in durability. Hence, it is necessary to control damage caused by nonstructural
walls. It is possible for continuous fiber sheets to reduce the widths of cracks in
nonstructural walls because they are adhered to concrete surfaces with resin. In
consideration of these, an experiment was conducted on nonstructural walls strengthened
with continuous fiber reinforcements as outlined below6):
The test specimens used in the experiment simulated the corridor wall of an apartment
house with the locations and shapes of openings and the methods of adhering continuous
fiber sheets as the parameters of the experiment. Figure 3.4.5-4 indicates the conditions
of failure at the end of the experiment (story deformation angle = 1/25 rad). Though test
specimens without strengthening had big shear cracks in the corners of openings followed
by the shear failure of the adjoining walls around the openings, cracks were decentralized
and the widths of cracks were reduced after reinforcing with carbon fiber reinforcing
materials. Shear failure of the walls around the openings was also prevented. Figure
3.4.5-5 indicates the relationship between the deformation angle of openings and the
average shear stress of nonstructural walls. In the figure, fs-l, fs-s and wc are the
long-term and the short-term shear stress of concrete, and the ultimate shear stress based
- 137 -
on the Standards for Evaluation of Seismic Capacity respectively. The deformation angle
of the openings of the nonstructural walls indicated a difference between test specimens
with and without strengthening above the average shear stress, which was approximately
the long-term allowable shear stress of concrete. The displacement of openings reduced
after reinforcing with continuous fiber reinforcements. Figure 3.4.5-6 indicates the
relationship between the widths of shear cracks at the time of unloading and the
maximum story deformation angle just before that. A comparison of the shear cracks,
which formed at the same locations, showed that the widths of shear cracks were reduced
by strengthening with continuous fiber reinforcements
Reinforced concrete test specimen

without strengthening
Test specimen strengthened with a single

layer of carbon fiber reinforcing materials
(shaded area) on one side
Figure 3.4.5-4 Conditions of failures6)
Average shear stress
Story deformation angle
fs-s
fs-l
No. 5: Without strengthening

No. 6: Type 1 with 1 layer
Deformation angle of an opening D
Figure 3.4.5-5 Relationship between Average Shear Stress and Story Deformation
Angle of an Opening6)
- 138 -
Without reinforcement
Crack width (mm)
Type 1 with 1 layer
Analyzed shear cracks
Story deformation angle (rad)
Figure 3.4.5-6 Relationship between Widths of Shear Cracks and Story Deformation
Angle at the Time of Unloading6)
As a result, it was found that the deformation around door openings in nonstructural walls and
the widths of shear cracks were reduced, and the conditions of failures were improved by
adhering continuous fiber sheets to nonstructural walls. Reference 6 showed that these effects
are controlled by the quantity of continuous fiber sheets to be wrapped and the location of
wrapping. However, since there are still few data to make a general evaluation, further
research is required.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Hideo Katsumata, Hironari Hagio, Kozo Kimura, Katsuro Obata; Experimental Research on Shear Walls
Reinforced with Carbon Fiber, No. 1: Summary of the Experiment, No. 2: Results of the Experiment,
Tsukasa Iwasaki, Yasuo Higashibata, Munehiro Kei, Yasumasa Miyauchi, Yoshihiro Ota; Experimental
Research on Repairs and Reinforcement of Reinforced Concrete Shear Walls, Summaries of Technical
Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 331 - 332, September 1996
Kei Horie, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Hiroshi Fukuyama, Masato Iso, Norio Yoshida, Norimitsu Hayashida;
Experimental Research on Reinforcement of Shear Walls Reinforced with Continuous Fiber Sheets, No.
1: Summary and Results of the Experiment, No. 2: Study on the Conditions of Failures, No. 3: Study on
Strength, Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2,
pp. 595 - 600, September 1997
Norimitsu Hayashida, Kiyoshi Shimakawa, Kei Horie, Kazuyuki Sumi, Yoshinari Tanaka; Research on
No. 1: Results of the Experiment of Reinforced Concrete Walls, Summaries of Technical Papers of
Annual Meeting of the Architectural Institute of Japan, C-2, pp. 601 - 602, September 1997
Norio Yoshida, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Hiroshi Fukuyama, Norimitsu Hayashida, Hiroyuki Nakamura,
Masato Iso, Kei Horie; Experimental Research on Reinforcement of Shear Walls Reinforced with
Continuous Fiber Sheets, No. 4: Summary and Results of the Experiment, No. 5: Study of the Results of
Tomoaki Sugiyama, Yasuhiro Matsuzaki, Katsuhiko Nakano, Hiroshi Fukuyama; Experimental Research
on Performance of Nonstructural Reinforced Concrete Walls Strengthened with Carbon Fiber Sheets,
Proceedings of the Japan Concrete Institute, Vol. 21, No. 3, pp. 1423 - 1428, July 1999
- 139 -
Chapter 4
Construction of Strengthening Work
Chapter 4
Construction of Strengthening Work
4.1 Work specifications

4.1.1
General
The continuous fiber reinforcement described in this guideline is used for the rehabilitation
work aimed to increase earthquake-resistant performance. This rehabilitation work is done
using the following three work methods, each of which has a different combination of
continuous fibers and impregnate adhesive resin.
(1) Carbon fiber/epoxy resin work method
(2) Carbon fiber/methacrylate resin work method
(3) Aramid fiber/epoxy resin work method
Specifications of each work method are illustrated in 4.1.2, 4.1.3 and 4.1.4.
If it is demonstrated through studies that a different work method can produce the same or
better results, this method can be adopted with the approval of people involved in the project.
[Comment]
For the seismic retrofit work described in this guideline, carbon fibers (CF) or aramid fibers
(AF) are used as continuous fibers. Epoxy or methacrylate resin (MMA) is used as
impregnate adhesive resin. Since there is not track record of the combination of AF and
MMA is available, this particular combination is not dealt with in this guideline.
This chapter describes the specifications of all resin-related work processes from primer
application and wrapping of continuous fiber sheets to air release and finish coating.
Standard construction procedures of each work method are described under 4.2. To have a
better understanding of the specifications of each work method described in the following,
refer to the standard work construction flow shown in Figure 4.2.3-1.
- 141 -
Continuous fiber
sheet
Continuous
fiber tape
Lapped portion
(distributed on
each plane)
Adhesion at
the corner
Adhesion at
the corner
To be wrapped for each level in a horizontal position
(a) Sheet method (carbon and aramid fibers)
To be wound consecutively in a spiral
(b) Tape method (aramid fibers)
Fig. 4.1.1-1 Continuous Fiber Reinforcement Wrapping (Winding) Method
The continuous fiber reinforcements can be wrapped or wound using the sheet method or tape
method. The sheet method is used for both carbon and aramid fibers but the tape method is
used only for aramid fibers under the circumstances. In the following sections, the sheet
method is mainly referred to.
If new materials or work methods made possible by technical advances can be used to make
quality improvements or to streamline the work process, they can be adopted with the
approval of a party placing the order, designers and staff in charge of work and, if necessary,
with the evaluation by an inspection or certification body.
- 142 -
4.1.2
Carbon fiber/epoxy resin work method
The specifications of the work method for embedding carbon fiber sheets with epoxy resin are
shown in Table 4.1.2-1.
Table 4.1.2-1 Carbon Fiber/Epoxy Resin Work Method
Process
Material
Required
weight
Work description
Process interval
(kg/m )
1
Primer application
Marking
Impregnate
adhesive resin
undercoating
4
Sheet
wrapp-i
ng
5
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Base
hardener
0.2 0.3
A premixed primer is
evenly applied with a
roller brush.
Marking based on the

layout drawing
Base
hardener
0.4 0.5
Sheet pasting
CF sheet
1.15m2/m2
Impregnate
adhesive resin
overcoating
Base
hardener
0.3 0.4
Air release
4 hours or longer,
within 3 days
-
Premixed epoxy resin is

Immediately
roller brush.
After a sheet is pasted,
an air release roller is
pressed on and held to
it until impregnate
adhesive resin oozes.
2 minutes or
longer (for fabric
type), 20 minutes
or longer (pre-preg
type), within 90
minutes
Premixed epoxy resin is

Immediately
roller brush.
An air release roller is
applied in the direction
of fiber orientation to
release air.
4 hours or longer,
within 3 days
The required amount of impregnate adhesive resin in the table shows the amount needed when wrapping a
sheet of 300 g/m2 in weight per unit length.
In the required weight of a sheet, the lapped portion and some losses are included.
After embedding a sheet, leave it until the impregnate adhesive resin undercoating starts to ooze.
When embedding plural sheets on top of one another, repeat steps 3 through 6 four hours after air is
released or at intervals within three days.
A days work must be finished at step 1 or 2 or must proceed to and finished at step 6.
[Comment]
Carbon fiber (CF) sheets come in two types: one of 200 g/m2 and the other of 300 g/m2 in
weight per unit length. The required amount of impregnate adhesive resin varies, depending
on weight per unit length. Table 4.1.2-2 shows the required amount for each weight per unit
length. As shown in this table, the larger the weight per unit length, the larger the required
amount of impregnate adhesive resin undercoating becomes. This is because epoxy resin
impregnates into the sheet from below and eventually functions to force air out.
- 143 -
Table 4.1.2-2 Weight per Unit Length of The Sheet and Required Amount of Impregnate
Adhesive Resin
2
Weight per unit length (g/m )
Required amount of impregnate adhesive resin (kg/m2)

Undercoating
Overcoating
200
0.3 - 0.4
0.2 - 0.3
300
0.4 - 0.5
0.3 - 0.4
The time that a resin undercoating requires before exuding from the CF sheet varies,
depending on the type of CF sheet. In the case of the fabric type, it starts to ooze one to two
minutes after the sheet is installed and an air release roller is pressed on it. In the case of the
pre-preg type, approximately 20 minutes are required.
The speed of epoxy resin hardening varies, depending on temperature, The process interval
time shown in Table 4.1.2-1 is based on standard temperature of 20C. Because the process
interval time differs, depending on the product, the specifications must be examined carefully.
Finish conditions must be inspected each time after the installation one layer of sheets is
completed to ensure that there is no such defects as floating, bulging or residual resin. If
defects are found, repairs must be made and sheets must be wrapped again. Defects should
be repaired as shown below:
Floating, bulging:
Inject epoxy resin.
Peeling:
Remove the peeling part. Paste the CF sheet in such a way that it
overlaps the existing sheet by more than 200 mm on both sides. When
removing the sheet, special care should be taken not to damage the
sheets in the next lower layer.
Residual resin:
Because residual resin causes wrapped sheets to float, it must be

removed using a sander. Scrape off only the residual resin, special
care should be taken not to damage the sheet.
- 144 -
4.1.3
Carbon fiber/methacrylate resin work method
The specifications of the work method for wrapping carbon fiber sheets with methacrylate
resin are shown in Tables 4.1.3-1, 4.1.3-2 and 4.1.3-3.
In principle, the fabric-type carbon fiber sheet must be used because it is not processed by a
sizing agent and is easily impregnated with resin.
Table 4.1.3-1 Specifications of The A/B/A Work Method Using Two-Part Methacrylate Resin
Process
Material
Required
weight
Work description
Process
interval
Mix premixed primers A

and B. Apply them
evenly using a roller brush.
60 minutes
or longer
(kg/m2)
1
Primer application
Marking
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
0.3 - 0.4
Impregnate
adhesive resin
undercoating
Resin A
0.2 -0.3
Sheet wrapping
CF sheet
1.15m2/m2
Impregnate
adhesive resin
intercoating
Resin B
Impregnate
adhesive resin
overcoating
Resin A
Rolling a roller
(mixing and air
release)
Impregnate adhesive resin

finish coating
1)
Primer
Sheet
wrapp-i
ng

layout drawing
Apply premixed resin A

using a roller brush.
Within 10
minutes
Paste a sheet quickly.

Press the sheet and ensure
that it adheres securely.
Within 10
minutes
0.3 -0.4
Apply premixed resin B

using a roller brush.
Within 10
minutes
0.2 -0.3
The same as in step 3.
Within 10
minutes
While lightly pressing and

holding the sheet with an
air release roller, mix
resins A and B and release
air.
60 minutes
or longer
Mix the same amount of

premixed resins A and B
and apply them quickly.
60 minutes
or longer
Resin A
0.15
Resin B
0.15
The required amount of impregnate adhesive resin in the table shows the amount needed when winding a
sheet of 300 g/m2 in weight per unit length.
Additional impregnate adhesive resin A for undercoating must be applied to the lapped portion.
Steps 3 through 7 are one flow process and must be finished within 15 minutes.
In step 7, a roller is used to allow the CF sheet to be well impregnated with resin liquid and resin liquid to
be uniformly distributed in the CF sheet. Methacrylate resin used in this work process is low in viscosity
and therefore has good impregnating ability and air release characteristics. So you do not need to press
the sheet with a roller strongly.
When pasting plural sheets on top of one another, repeat steps 3 through 7 after impregnate adhesive resin
hardens.
- 145 -
Table 4.1.3-2 Specifications of The Work Method Using Two-Part Methacrylate Resin
Process
Material
Required
weight
Work description
Process
interval
Mix premixed primers in

equal proportions and
apply them evenly using a
roller brush.
60 minutes
or longer
(kg/m2)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Primer application
Marking
Primer
0.075 0.1

layout drawing
Impregnate
adhesive resin
undercoating
Resin A,
Resin B
0.4 0.5
Mix resin A and B in equal

proportions and apply them
5 minutes
or longer
Sheet wrapping
CF sheet
1.15m2/m2
Wrap a sheet quickly.

Within 10
minutes
Impregnate
adhesive resin
overcoating
Resin A,
Resin B
0.4 0.5
Within 10
minutes
Rolling a roller
Sheet
wrapp-i
ng
Lightly press the sheet with 60 minutes

an air release roller.
or longer
The required weight of impregnate adhesive resin shown in this table shows the amount needed when
wrapping a sheet of 300 g/m2 in weight per unit length.
In the required weight of a sheet, the weight of the lapped portion and some losses are included.
When pasting plural sheets on top of one another, repeat steps 2 through 6 after impregnate adhesive resin
hardens.
After a sheet is pasted, leave it for about 5 minutes. When the impregnate adhesive resin oozes to the
surface, release air using a roller brush and apply the impregnate adhesive resin overcoating.
- 146 -
Table 4.1.3-3 Specifications of The Work Method Using One-Part Methacrylate Resin
Process
Material
Required
weight
Work description
(kg/m2)
1
Primer application
Marking
Impregnate
adhesive resin
undercoating
Resin
Sheet wrapping
CF sheet
Impregnate
adhesive resin
overcoating
Resin
Sheet
wrapp-i
ng
2)
3)
4)
1)
Primer
Rolling a roller
0.15
Apply premixed primers

evenly with a roller brush.
layout drawing
Process
interval
120
minutes or
longer
-
0.4 0.5
Apply premixed
impregnate adhesive resin
evenly with a roller brush.
Within 10
minutes
1.15m2/m2
Wrap a sheet quickly.

Within 30
minutes
Within 10
minutes
0.4 0.5
120
Lightly press the sheet with
minutes or
an air release roller.
longer
The required weight of impregnate adhesive resin shown in this table shows the amount needed when
wrapping a sheet of 300 g/m2 in weight per unit length.
In the required weight of a sheet, the weight of the lapped portion and some losses are included.
When wrapping plural sheets on top of one another, repeat steps 3 through 6 after impregnate adhesive
resin hardens.
[Comment]
(1) Primer
Coat a primer uniformly using a roller brush. Make sure that the concrete substrate is
well impregnated and there is no part remaining uncoated. The weight of a primer to be
used for a standard concrete ground is 0.3 kg/cm2. If the substrate is more absorbent,
additional coats of a primer should be applied, as necessary.
(2) Sheet installation
The CF sheet used for the CM/MMA resin work method is a normal fabric-type sheet.
Because no sizing materials are used, it has superior resin absorbing characteristics and is
smoothly impregnated with resin after resin is coated and air between this sheet and the
substrate is released.
- 147 -
Because the fabric-type sheet has the property of absorbing resin, resin must be coated a
few times until the sheet no longer absorbs it.
In the case of the A/B/A work method using two-part resin, the CF sheet is first attached
and then coating is done. After coating, a hardening agent in the coating material and a
promoter in the undercoating material react together, causing the viscosity to start
increasing in about 10 minutes. If a resin liquid A is coated after viscosity starts
increasing, it will not well mix with intercoating resin and the overcoated resin cannot
harden properly. The process from coating to overcoating and roller rolling must be
performed with dexterity. It is recommended that a unit construction area of 3 m2 to 5
m2 is completely and accurately finished.
In the case of the work method using one-part resin, the hardening speed is faster and
sheet pasting (one sheet each) and overcoating must be done at the same time. If
undercoating or sheet pasting is done first, undercoats and sheets remain exposed to air
till the start of overcoating and they quickly harden. As a result, sheets cannot be well
impregnated with overcoating resin and they may float or develop air bubbles.
(3) Finish coating
With the A/B/A work method using two-part resin, a resin liquid A or B sticking out of
overlaid sheets sometimes stay outside the overlaid structure and remain fluid. If
additional sheets are installed to the overlaid structure having this resin liquid that does
not harden, it may harden when it mixes with a resin liquid applied in the next step. If
this resin liquid sticks out of the uppermost layer, it remains un-hardened. In this case, a
mixture of A and B resin must be applied so that the resin liquid and A/B resin harden all
together.
- 148 -
4.1.4
Aramid fiber/epoxy resin work method
Table 4.1.4-1 shows the specifications of the work method for pasting aramid fiber sheets
using epoxy resin.
Table 4.1.4-1 Specifications of The Aramid Fiber/Epoxy Resin Work Method
Process
Material
Required
weight
Work description
(kg/m2)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Primer application
Marking
Main
hardening
agent
-
0.2 0.3
Apply a premixed primer

4 hours or
longer
Within 3 days
Marking based on the layout

drawing
0.4 0.5
Apply premixed epoxy resin

Immediately
20 minutes or
longer
Within 50
minutes
Impregnate
adhesive resin
undercoating
Sheet
wrapping
AF sheet
1.15m /m
Wrap a sheet quickly. Press

and hold it until you see the
oozing to the surface.
Impregnate
adhesive resin
overcoating
Main
hardening
agent
0.3 0.4
Apply premixed epoxy resin

Immediately
Air release
Roll a roller in the direction

of fiber orientation to release
air.
4 hours or
longer
Within 3 days
Sheet
wrapp-i
ng
Main
hardening
agent
Process
interval
The required amount of impregnate adhesive resin in the table shows the amount needed when pasting
60t-class sheets.
After wrapping a sheet, leave it until the impregnate adhesive resin undercoating starts to ooze.
When wrapping plural sheets on top of one another, repeat steps 3 through 6 after impregnate adhesive
resin hardens.
[Comment]
There are three types of aramid fiber sheets which have different weight per unit length
respectively: 40t class, 60t class and 90t class. The required weight of impregnate adhesive
resin varies, depending on each type. Table 4.1.4-2 shows the required weight of impregnate
adhesive resin for each type. The greater the sheet strength (the larger the weight per unit
length), the larger the required weight of impregnate adhesive resin becomes, as shown in the
table. This means that more epoxy resin is needed for higher-strength sheets in the process
of soaking into sheets and forcing air bubbles out.
- 149 -
Table 4.1.4-2 Required Weight of Impregnate Adhesive Resin for Each Sheet
Sheet type
Required weight of impregnate adhesive resin (kg/cm2)

Undercoating
Overcoating
40t class
0.3 - 0.4
0.2 - 0.3
60t class
0.4 - 0.5
0.3 - 0.4
90t class
0.6 - 0.7
0.3 - 0.4
Epoxy resin hardens at different speeds, depending on temperature. The process interval
time shown in the table is based on the temperature of 20C. Also, each epoxy resin product
has different hardening speeds, specifications of each product must be examined carefully.
4.2 Construction procedure
4.2.1
(1)
General
General information
This construction procedure applies to the seismic retrofit work of building which is done
using continuous fiber reinforcements. This work must be executed in accordance with the
following literature and this procedure:
1) On-site instruction books and related literature
2) Special specifications
3) Drawings
4) Common building improvement work specifications or equivalent specifications
Items not described in this procedure should be dealt with according to related laws and
regulations and through consultations of designers and those who execute the work.
[Comment]
(a) This construction procedure applies to the seismic retrofit work of building which is
done by attaching continuous fiber reinforcements to pillars, beams and other
members of a building structure.
As continuous fiber reinforcements, carbon fiber (CF) sheets or aramid fiber (AF)
sheets are used. As impregnate adhesive resin, epoxy resin or methacrylate (MMA)
- 150 -
resin is used. In this guideline, three work methods are described based on the
combinations shown in Section 4.1. The AF-MMA combination, however, is
excluded.
Buildings to be rehabilitated are existing steel encased reinforced concrete buildings
for which deterioration with aging is found. This construction procedure does not
apply to buildings heavily damaged by salt air, buildings with concrete members
considerably degraded through the alkali-aggregate reaction or buildings damaged by
fires. For all these buildings, proper measures must be taken to remedy the
deterioration and damage.
(b) If there are doubts as to the content of any design literature or if it is difficult to
perform the procedure specified in design literature or if performing the procedure
causes inconvenience for reasons of on-site fitting or connection, designers and those
who execute the work should determine proper countermeasures through mutual
consultations. Also, if there are matters that are not covered in design literature and
need to be clarified, they should determine how to handle them through mutual
consultations.
(2)
Qualifications of those who execute the work
(a) Construction management engineer

In principle, those who manage the seismic retrofit work of building using
continuous fiber reinforcements must have the skills for controlling the work in
compliance with this guideline. Specifically, they must be the second-grade
building construction management engineer qualified by the Minister for
Construction based on the Contractors Law or they must have equivalent or higher
qualifications.
(b) Construction technician
Those who execute the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber
reinforcements must have specified construction techniques.
(c) Handling of organic solvents
Organic solvents must be handled by qualified workers in accordance with the
measures and work management system which comply with the organic solvent
poisoning prevention rules.
- 151 -
[Comment]
(a) In the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber reinforcements,
impregnation of continuous fiber sheets with resin and resulting adhesion have a
great influence on strengthening effects. Therefore, a good understanding of
techniques used in this work is required, and an engineer who has overall
construction management techniques must supervise the work.
The construction management engineer must be the second-grade building
construction management engineer qualified under the technical certification system
based on the Contractors Law, article 27 or he must have equivalent or higher
management techniques.
In the case of a work method proposed by Japan Building Disaster Prevention
Association, the construction management engineer and construction technician must
meet not only material-related requirements but also certain technical requirements
which they can learn only by attending a special technical course. Therefore, they
are required to have a good familiarity with technical details of this work method in
addition to the skill and knowledge required for the second-grade building
construction management engineer.
By the time a national organization is established in the future to provide training to
construction technicians and construction management engineers, it is desirable that
the earthquake-resistant building rehabilitation work be done by those who are
qualified by such an organization.
(b) At this moment, there is no public system for qualifying construction technicians
who engage in the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber
reinforcements. Manufacturers and organizations concerned in the work now
provide professional training to nurture construction technicians. The Reinforced
Fiber Sheet Construction Technician Qualification System is one example.
Because a public qualification system is not yet established, the work must be
basically done by those who have received training given by such voluntary
organizations and acquired a certain level of techniques.
In executing the work, it is important to know the characteristics of materials used.
Methacrylate resin in particular reacts in ways completely different from epoxy resin.
Technicians who execute the work using methacrylate resin are required to have
attended a technical course devoted to the work using methacrylate resin.
- 152 -
(c) Organic solvents must be handled and stored by qualified workers in accordance
with related laws and regulations. Storage of organic solvents must be in
accordance with the Fire Services Act and work done using them must be in
accordance with the notification No. 442 issued by the Labour Standards Inspection
Office on June 5, 1976 (preventing health hazards caused by hardening agents of
epoxy resin).
4.2.2
Construction plan
(1) A proper construction plan must be prepared based on design literature and other data
to allow the seismic retrofit work of building to produce expected results.
Before the construction plan is prepared, a field survey of the building should be
made to verify construction conditions and reflect them in the construction plan.
(2) An construction procedure describing practical work methods must be prepared.
(3) The seismic retrofit work of building must be done in accordance with the
construction plan and construction procedure.
[Comment]
(1) Preparing the construction plan

In executing the earthquake-resistant building rehabilitation work, delivery of materials
and equipment, setting up of work scaffolds, curing methods and overall planning and
progress of rehabilitation work are conditioned by the site conditions, the environment
surrounding the site and the time of construction. Therefore, enough preliminary studies
should be made and the results should be reflected in the construction plan. The
construction plan should include important points to note in executing the work and be
prepared prior to the start of the work.
A proper work period must be determined so that each adopted material can be handled
based on respective process interval times. In the case of the work method using epoxy
resin, considerable differences in the process interval time arise due to the effect of
temperature. Therefore, the work period should be determined after due consideration
of the process interval time of each product, the season and the temperature environment.
If cement-type cross section repair materials or ground mending materials are used, the
same precautions as noted for epoxy resin should be kept in mind.
- 153 -
(2) Preparing the construction procedure

The construction procedure must describe proper ground treatment methods, selection of
materials and equipment, working procedures, setting up of scaffolds, curing methods
and other practical points.
(3) Executing the work
The work must be executed in accordance with the construction plan and construction
procedure.
Materials must be arranged without delay according to the construction plan and in
consideration of the on-site work progress. Some materials are designated hazardous
materials, such as impregnate adhesive resin (class-4 hazardous material) and the
hardening agent used in methacrylate resin (class-5 hazardous material). A stock of
these hazardous materials at the work site should be checked before additional materials
are delivered there.
In the seismic retrofit work of building, more than one work area is sometimes
established in different locations in the same building. Ongoing works in each work
area must be monitored and coordinated with each other. In planning and managing the
process, due care should be exercised to prevent and to avoid damage to continuous fiber
reinforcements being cured.
- 154 -
4.2.3
Construction procedure
In principle, the construction procedure of this work method must be performed in accordance
with the standard construction flow shown in Figure 4.2.3-1.
Preparation
Temporary work
Removing and relocating finish materials and others
Cross section
repairs*
Ground treatment
(including corner chamfering)
Applying a primer
Ground mending
Injection to repair grazing*,

Injection to repair floating mortar*
Ground mending* using mortar
Applying a primer
Marking
Wrapping continuous fiber sheets
Curing
* is the work item to be done
as the need arises.
Finishing
Fig. 4.2.3-1 Standard Construction Flow
[Comment]
The standard construction flow regarding the seismic retrofit work of building using
continuous fiber reinforcements can be used for each work method irrespective of
combinations of carbon fiber, aramid fiber, epoxy resin and methacrylate resin. The ground
treatment work, including cross section repairs, injection to mend crazing and floating mortar
- 155 -
and so forth, must be done prior to all other related works. The ground mending work using
polymer cement mortar must be done prior to primer application. The ground mending work
using epoxy, methacrylate and other resin ground mending materials must be done after a
primer is applied.
If an construction flow different from the standard construction flow shown here is used or if
there are other instructions that are not shown here, such a flow or instructions must be
described in the construction plan or construction procedure and must be followed.
4.2.4
Preparation
Prior to the start of the work, materials and equipment must be arranged, accepted and stored
properly
[Comment]
(1) Preparing materials and equipment

To allow the work to proceed smoothly, materials and equipment (shown in Table
4.2.4-1) to be used at each stage of the work must be prepared. The same implements
and tools can be used for all work methods. They should be prepared with consideration
of material characteristics and the points shown below:
(a) Epoxy resin
Many impregnate adhesive resins have high viscosity. A high-efficiency stirrer that
can stir all corners of a container should be prepared.
(b) Methacrylate resin
When doing the work outdoors, the temperature of the ground of a building structure
is different from the outside temperature. The compounding ratio of a hardening
agent is determined based on the temperature of the ground. Therefore, a
contact-type surface thermometer that can measure the surface of the ground should
be used. A kilogram scale for weighing a resin liquid and a gram scale for weighing
extremely small quantities of hardening and accelerating agents for mixing should be
prepared.
(c) Aramid fiber
Aramid fibers cannot be cut with ordinary cutters or scissors. Special scissors, such
as ceramic scissors, should be used.
- 156 -
(d) Air-release roller

The air-release roller should be of the shape that does not disturb the orientation of a
bundle of fibers pasted on a sheet. The brush-type air-release roller used for the
lining work method using glass mats easily catches on fibers. A roller with grooves
cut on it should be used.
(2) Accepting and storing materials
(a) Accepting materials
Receiving inspection must be performed on delivered materials to verify that
delivered materials meet requirements specified in the construction plan and related
specifications and delivered quantities match those described on orders. Also,
continuous fiber sheets and resin must be checked to confirm that their useful terms
shown on each product do not expire. Details of the quality of delivered materials
should be checked against quality certificates and test reports.
Table 4.2.4-1 Standard Materials and Equipment Used at Each Stage of Construction
Process
Material
Materials, equipment and implements
Cross section repairs
Mortar for repair
Cross section repair implements (plaster work implements, rubber gloves,

safety goggles)
Injection to mend
crazing
Impregnating
agent, sealing agent
Crazing mending implements (injector, rubber gloves, safety goggles and

others)
Chipping implements for removing finish materials (chipper, concrete cutter
and others)
Concrete surface grinding implements (disk sander, concrete plane and others)
Implements for removing grinding dust (air blower, waste cloth, dust collector
and others)
Dust protective mask, safety goggles
Ground treatment
Primer application
Ground mending
Rubber gloves, safety goggles, hygrometer and temperature indicator
Epoxy putty
Rubber spatula, scale, rubber gloves, safety goggles
Marking
Continuous fiber
sheet wrapping
Marking tools (tape measure, leveler, plumb bob, ink pod)

Continuous fiber
sheet impregnate
adhesive resin
Curing
Finishing
Painting implements (roller brush, hand mixer, scale and others)
Solvent for
cleaning a primer
FRP tools (scale, kneading and mixing tool, air-relief roller, roller brush, FRP
roller, rubber spatula and others)
Continuous fiber sheet cutting tools (scissors, cutter knife, celluloid sheet)
Scale, rubber gloves, safety goggles, hygrometer and temperature indicator
Dust and rain protective sheets, heater (when temperature is low)
Paint, mortar and

so forth
Painting tools, plaster work tools
Others (curing,
temporary work)
Ventilation equipment, curing sheets, waste cloth, scaffold members
Safety gear
Helmet, safety belts, dust protective mask, safety goggles, rubber gloves
Implements and tools

for construction
management
R ruler, Pal hammer for sounding, thermometer (for measuring material

temperature, outside air temperature and surface temperature of a ground),
hygrometer, moisture meter, plumb bob, scale, leveler
- 157 -
(b) Storing materials

(i)
Storing resin materials

Points to note when storing resin materials:
Store them in a cool, dark place where they are not exposed to the rain.
Store a specified quantity of hazardous materials designated by the Fire
Services Act in a place there they are protected from heat or flame. If
more than a specified quantity must be stored, follow the Fire Services Act,
articles 10 through 16-9.
Resin materials being used for the work must be stored in a sealed container.
If there is a storage method designated for one work method, that particular
storage method must be used.
Because both epoxy and methacrylate resins are reaction materials, they may
change in the quality if left in the high-temperature open air. They must be
stored in a cool, dark place. Resin products are flammable hazardous
materials and classified into class 1 to class 4 petroleum-base products
according to the flash points of each product. Methacrylate resin is classified
as a water-insoluble liquid in the class 1 petroleum-base products, while epoxy
resin is classified as a water-insoluble liquid in the class 3 petroleum-base
products. Before using the resin product, it is necessary to identify to which
category it belongs to. The hardening agent used in methacrylate resin is
autoreactive. It is a hazardous material and belongs to the class 5
petroleum-base product. These materials must be stored in a place where heat
or flame is strictly prohibited, as designated by the Fire Services Act. In
storing the, the following quantity limits must be observed:
(1)
Water-insoluble liquid in the class 4, category 1 petroleum-base products

Up to 200 liters (such as methacrylate resin and solvent-type epoxy resin
primers)
(2)
Water-insoluble liquid in the class 4, category 3 petroleum-base products

Up to 2,000 liters (epoxy resin)
(3)
Autoreactive materials in the class 5, category 2 petroleum-base products

up to 100 kg (powder hardening agent used in methacrylate resin)
If stored materials have changed in the quality during storage, specifically, if

they have an abnormal level of turbidity , clots, suspended solids or high
viscosity, they must not be used.
- 158 -
(ii)
Storing continuous fiber sheets

Points to note when storing continuous fiber sheets:
Store them where they are not exposed to direct sunlight, heat, flame or
rainwater.
If there is a storage method designated for one work method, that particular
storage method must be used.
Continuous fiber sheets are packed in cardboard boxes. If the cardboard
boxes are exposed to rainwater, they will come unfastened and shifted and
continuous fiber sheets absorb water, resulting in the alteration in the quality.
They must be stored indoors in a place where they are protected from rainwater.
In the case of continuous fiber sheets of the pre-preg type which has epoxy
resin impregnated as a sizing (pasting) material, the resin properties will
change if they are left under high temperature conditions, causing loss of the
flexibility of sheets. Therefore, they must be stored in a cool, dark place. If
sheets that have absorbed water are used, impregnate adhesive resin will not
harden properly and a required level of strength cannot be obtained. Never
use sheets that have absorbed water.
(iii) Storing cement-type materials

Cement-type materials must be stored in a place where they are not exposed to
rainwater and excessive moisture. Wet materials or ones that have absorbed
moisture and solidified must not be used.
4.2.5
Temporary work
(1) Scaffolds and protective members needed to execute the work must be set up with
consideration given to the efficiency and safety of work, dust and noise.
(2) For the members exposed to outside air, consideration must be given to protections
from the wind and rain. Also, protective measures must be taken to prevent them
from being excessively cooled when temperature goes down.
(3) Switches, wall sockets and other pieces of equipment installed on an existing
structure should be temporarily removed or relocated. After the rehabilitation work
is done, they should be put back to their original positions. If it is considered that
adverse effects impairing the strengthening effects are produced if they remain
attached to a structure to be reinforced, designers and those who execute the work
should take proper measures through mutual consultations.
- 159 -
[Comment]
(1) Scaffold
Works to be done for a pillar, the upper part of a wall and beams and under deck slabs are
all high-place works. To ensure the efficiency and safety of work, a scaffold appropriate
for the type of work must be set up. After work is completed, it must be removed.
(See Photo 4.2.5-1.)
(2) Curing
During the work period, chipping, disassembly, surface grinding, resin coating and other
types of work are done. As dust and noise reduction measures, the work area must be
enclosed by protective sheets (Photo 4.2.5-2) or protective boards (Photo 4.2.5-3).
Openings and outlets and inlets of air conditioners in the work area, except the entrance
to the work area, must be sealed up with polyethylene sheets. Also, ventilation
equipment (Photo 4.2.5-4), filters (Photo 4.2.5-5) and lighting equipment must be
installed, as required.
If the work area is extensive, the balance of central air conditioning may be destroyed if
openings are sealed up, as described above. Before sealing up, therefore, this point
should be carefully examined.
(3) Others
In most cases, the seismic retrofit work of building is done while the building is being
used. Equipment in and around the work area must be covered with dust protective
sheets (photo 4.2.5-2). In almost all offices, computers and other office automation
equipment are now installed. Extreme care must be exercised to avoid damage to them.
After the work is completed, clean the work area and remove all remaining materials.
- 160 -
Photo 4.2.5-1 Work being Done on a Scaffold
Dust and noise reduction measures
Photo 4.2.5-2 Protective Vinyl Sheets
Photo 4.2.5-3 Temporary Board Enclosure
Photo 4.2.5-5 Filter
Photo 4.2.5-4 Ventilation Equipment
- 161 -
4.2.6
Removing existing finish materials
The strengthening effect of continuous fiber reinforcements works best if they are affixed
securely to the surface of an existing structure. In principle, finish materials on an existing
structure must be removed to the extent that the surface of an existing structure is exposed.
In removing finish materials, caution should be used not to damage the surface of an existing
structure. There is the case that finish materials are not removed. For information on how
to survey a site and to determine whether they should be removed or not, refer to Section
3.4.1.
[Comment]
(1) Purpose and method of removing existing finish materials

To maximize the strengthening effect of the continuous fiber reinforcement method,
existing finish materials must be removed and a concrete structure must be exposed. If
downspouts, ducts or various wires interfere with the work, they should be temporarily
removed or relocated to secure the work space.
In removing finish materials, motor-driven chippers or small-impact chipping tools
should be used and existing finish materials should be removed carefully. Due care
should be exercised to minimize damage to an existing structure. (See Photo 4.2.6-1.)
Photo 4.2.6-1 Work of Removing Existing Finish Materials
- 162 -
During the work of removing finish materials, dust and noise occur. To keep the impact
on the work and neighboring environments to a minimum, tools should be carefully
selected and consideration must be given to ventilation, noise reduction and working
hours.
During the work of removing finish materials, damaged portions of a structure, improper
concrete placement practices or other construction defects are sometimes found. If
damaged portions of a structure or other structural defects are found, they should be
repaired according to the instructions given in Section 4.2.7.
(2) Case that existing finish materials are not removed
If existing finish materials meet all conditions shown below and if a structure has no
damage or defect, existing finish materials do not need to be removed (see Section 3.4.1):
Finish materials other than tiles, lithin, plaster, cloth or elastic finish coating
Finish materials that adhere to base concrete or mortar with adhesion strength of 1
N/mm2 or greater
Finish materials that can securely adhere to primers and cement-type ground mending
materials used for the strengthening work (1 N/mm2 or greater) and do not dissolve,
soften or swell (lifting) through chemical reactions with solvent components
Finish mortar that has a thickness of D/15 or larger (D: cross section of an existing
pillar), does not have cracking, swelling or deterioration of 0.3 mm or larger in width
and has the scleroscope hardness of 40 or greater (verified by the Schmidt hammer
test)
If continuous fiber reinforcements are used to reinforce bent portions where the transfer
of shearing force along the plane of adhesion is expected to produce strengthening effects,
existing finish materials can be removed irrespective of the conditions described on the
previous page.
When doing the strengthening work without removing existing finish materials, epoxy or
methacrylate resin primers should be applied if the ground surface has no projections or
depressions. If it has projections or depressions, epoxy or methacrylate resin materials
should be applied to mend the ground surface. Adhesion strength between these coating
materials and the existing finish material should be 1.0 N/m2 or greater. The surface of
the existing finish material should be chipped as required.
- 163 -
(3) Repairing finish mortar

If the finish mortar has cracking or swelling of 0.3 mm or larger in width, do not proceed
to the next process without repairing such a defect. Remove the finish mortar or repair
it. (See Figure 4.2.6-1.)
Start
Cracking
Chipping
Swelling
Prominent*
Yes
0.3 mm or larger
in width
Repair
unnecessary
No
Cracking to be repaired
Use the automatic
low-pressure epoxy resin
injection method
Mortar coating
method
Remove part of
the finish mortar
and repair it in
the way as for
chipped parts.
Yes
Moderate
1 mm or
larger in swelling
width
Repair using
the polymer
cement slurry
injection
method.
Slight **
No
Repair using
the epoxy
resin injection
method with
pins.
Repair
unnecessary
*:
**:
Prominent swelling means the swollen part that can easily peel off by chipping.
Slight swelling means the swollen part of 1 mm or smaller in width; the surface area of one swollen part must be 0.1 m2
or smaller and the total surface area of all swollen parts must be 20% or less of the total surface area of a pillar.
***: If the swollen part is 3 mm or smaller in width, the epoxy resin injection method with pins can be used.
Fig. 4.2.6-1 Finish Mortar Repair Method Selection Flow
If a crack has a swelling , remove the mortar of approximately 100 mm in width from the
center of the crack using a diamond cutter and repair the removed portion. If a crack has no
swelling, use the epoxy resin injection method to make direct repairs on the mortar surface.
If the mortar has a swelling, remove the swelling portion of the mortar, depending on the
extent of the swelling, and apply new plaster to the removed portion.
Otherwise, use the anchor/pinning epoxy resin injection method or polymer cement slurry
injection method1), 2) shown in Sections 4.4.10 and 4.4.13 in the common building
rehabilitation work specifications.
- 164 -
4.2.7
Ground treatment
The surface (ground) of an existing concrete structure to which continuous fiber

reinforcements are wrapped must be finished to a smooth, sound surface as shown below:
(1) Cracks in a concrete structure must be repaired using the epoxy resin injection
method. If a chipped part or a honeycomb is found, the weak or defective portions
must be chipped and removed. If there is rust from reinforcing bars, it must be
removed and a rust preventive paint must be applied. Then the portion must be
repaired using the cross section repair material.
(2) Foreign substances that weaken the adhesive strength of continuous fiber
reinforcements, such as laitance, fragile layers, mud, dust, oil and so forth on the
surface, must be completely removed using a grinding tool and other tools.
(3) Protrusions or level differences on the surface which might have been caused by
forms interfere with the work of pasting continuous fiber reinforcements. They
must be finished to a smooth, flat surface by grinding. If a desired smooth, flat
surface cannot be obtained using a grinder or the ground mending material, plaster
must be applied to the entire surface.
(4) Corners of cross sections of members must be rounded to a radius specified for each
type of continuous fiber reinforcement (20 mm or larger for carbon fiber
reinforcements and 10 mm or larger for aramid fiber reinforcements). This rounded
portion must be linearly in alignment with the axial direction of a member.
(5) If the work is executed without removing finish mortar, it must be verified, as
described in Section 4.2.6, that the mortar has no swelling or deterioration and that
the compression strength is not so low, compared with the compression strength of
concrete of a structure. If the mortar has swelling, the swelling portion must be
removed or repaired using a proper method.
(6) Air must be blown on the surface that has been repaired or finished to a defect-free,
smooth surface to remove dust or dirt.
[Comment]
To allow continuous fiber reinforcements to be properly wrapped without causing defects and
to deliver specified performance, it is necessary to maintain the surface of an existing
concrete structure in a good condition. Therefore, repairs should be made, depending on the
condition of the surface (ground). Figure 4.2.7-1 shows how the surface of an existing
- 165 -
concrete structure should be treated and Figure 4.2.7-2 shows the construction procedure from
the ground treatment to primer application to ground mending.
(1) Repairing cracks, chipped portions and honeycomb
If cracks, chipped portions, honeycomb or other defects are found on the surface of a
concrete structure, they must be repaired to restore the surface to normal.
(a) Cracks
Cracks in concrete are caused by outside stress, shrinkage or cold joints. If there is
a crack, strain being transferred is interrupted at a crack and it tends to concentrate
on continuous fiber reinforcements, thus causing loss of the designed structural
strength. In principle, repairs must be made on cracks of 0.3 mm or longer.
Cracks caused by drying and shrinkage should be repaired using different repair
methods, depending on where they occur on the surface of a structure or the extent
(crack depth). For pillars, the portion enclosed by reinforcing bars does not dry nor
shrink. The portion not enclosed by them, however, becomes dry and shrink and
cracks occur in a hexagonal pattern or at corners of a pillar in a horizontal direction.
Because the depth and crack width are usually small, repairs are not required in most
cases. For beams, cracks usually occur in a direction at right angles to the axial
direction of beams and sometimes extend into the slab. For slabs, cracks usually
occur along short sides and sometimes extend from one end through the inside to the
other end.
Cracks that occur from the corrosion of reinforcing bars caused by an insufficient
covering depth should be repaired by removing the concrete covering and rust,
applying a rust preventive paint and repairing the chipped portion with mortar.
Repairs for members with cracks caused by chloride, alkali-aggregate reaction,
freezing and thawing or fires should be studied separately.
A generally used crack repair method is the epoxy resin injection method (Photo
4.2.7-1). In principle, the automatic low-pressure epoxy resin injection method and
the rigid-type, low-viscosity resin specified in JIS A6024 (injection epoxy resin for
building repairs) should be used. For details of the construction, refer to Section
4.3.4 Resin injection method in the common building rehabilitation work
specifications.
- 166 -
It is difficult to inject epoxy resin into cracks that have free lime. These cracks
must be cut to a U-shape and epoxy putty must be filled in the U-shape portion.
After injecting epoxy resin, remove the sealing material and the injected resin that
has leaked and hardened using a disk sander to finish the surface to a smooth surface.
When smoothing the surface with a disk sander, cutting chips enter and clog cracks,
causing the work of resin injection to be suspended. Therefore, crack repairs must
be done before resin injection.
In the case of the building rehabilitation work using methacrylate resin, the resin may
not properly harden because it reacts with epoxy resin. Therefore, the same
methacrylate resin must be used to repair cracks.
(b) Chipped parts and honeycomb
Repair cracks and chipped parts caused by rusting on reinforcing bars by first
chipping concrete coverings and surroundings, then applying a rust preventive paint
on reinforcing bars. For other defects and honeycomb, remove defective parts
completely. To repair cross sections, use the epoxy resin mortar polymer cement
mortar. Good-quality cross section repair materials should be used. For details of
the construction, refer to Section 4.3.7 Filling method in the common building
rehabilitation work specifications.
The epoxy resin mortar is superior to other generally used polymer cement mortar in
that the adhesive strength is stable, formability is good when it is liberally applied
and the curing period is short. On the other hand, it is inferior in that Youngs
modulus of compression is low. In ordinary repair work, epoxy resin mortar is used
to repair chipped parts on a concrete structure. It is also used to improve the
seismic retrofit resistance of a building or to strengthen the structure of a building.
In the present construction method which is discussed in this guideline, epoxy resin
mortar can be used as the cross section repair material.
If a cross section is very deep, the use of epoxy resin mortar should be avoided.
Instead, the shrinkage-compensating mortar that has compression strength and
Youngs modulus of compression equal to or higher than concrete and can be
liberally applied or cement-type materials including shrinkage-compensating groute
materials must be used to make repairs.
In either case, the repaired surface should be finished to a smooth, flat surface using
the polymer cement mortar or epoxy putty.
- 167 -
One thing to note about using the methacrylate resin work method is that this resin
may react with epoxy resin or a polymer dispersion agent (admixture) contained in
the cross section repair material, preventing the methacrylate resin from hardening
properly. In principle, a methacrylate-type cross section repair material should be
used. If epoxy resin mortar or polymer cement mortar is used, a barrier primer must
be applied.
(2) Removing foreign substances
To ensure that continuous fiber reinforcements adhere securely to the surface of a
structure, laitance, weak layers, mud, dust, oil and other foreign substances that may
interfere with firm adhesion of continuous fiber reinforcements must be removed.
In principle, a disk sander and a similar grinding tool should be used to remove them.
Because a great deal of dust is produced during the grinding work, proper means for
preventing it from scattering should be used after due consideration of the conditions
surrounding the work area. Although air or high-pressure water may be blasted, the
inside of a building is limited in space and using such methods may be difficult. After
grinding foreign substances, remove all remaining cutting chips from the surface.
(3) Smoothing the surface
If the surface is not smooth or if it has protrusions or level differences, continuous fiber
reinforcements become crinkled or deformed and expected strengthening effects cannot
be obtained. Remove protrusions from the surface.
If there is a large level difference, it must be ground so that it is 1 mm or smaller. Also,
the surface should be ground to achieve this smoothness of 1 mm or smaller. To this
work, use a disk sander or a concrete plane.
In principle, the surface smoothness must be 5 mm or smaller at any chosen point along a
length of 1,000 m (1/200) and no depressions are allowed. If this requirement cannot be
met, the surface must be ground or the ground repair material must be used to obtain this
level of smoothness. (See Photos 4.2.7-2 and 4.2.7-3.)
If the surface conditions are very bad and cannot be rectified using the grinding method
or epoxy resin putty or mortar, apply plaster to the entire surface. The following
materials must be used:
Cement-type ground repair coating material to be applied to a thickness of 1 to 3 mm
Cement mortar for thin coating to be applied to a thickness of 3 to 7 mm
- 168 -
The quality standards for materials are to be in accordance with Section 2 Materials in
general in the handbook JASS 15 Plastering of the standard construction work
specifications. Details of the construction are to be in accordance with Application of
premixed cement mortar to ground concrete which appears in Section 6 of the standard
construction work specifications.
(4) Handling of corners
Corners that have a rectangular cross section should be rounded to a radius specified for
each type of continuous fiber reinforcement (20 mm or larger for carbon fiber
reinforcements and 10 mm or larger for aramid fiber reinforcements). They should be
rounded using any of the methods shown in the following:
Grinding
protrusions
Repairing
cracks
Chamfering a corner to R20 for

CFRP and R10 or larger for AFRP
Applying a primer
Repairing
rusted
reinforcing
bar
Filling
depressions
with mortar
Struc-t
ure
Structure
Mortar filled into
a depression
Applying mortar for

perpendicularity
Applying mortar for
perpendicularity
Fig. 4.2.7-1 Ground Treatment 2)
- 169 -
Using putty to repair

slight depressions or
air bubbles
Removing existing finish materials
Surveying the conditions of the surface of a structure
Satisfactory
Smoothness on
the surface of a
structure
R-chamfering (use a proper combination

of methods shown below):
Scrape off concrete by chipping.
Grind concrete.
Apply mortar.
Unsatisfactory
R-chamfering (use a proper combination

of methods shown below):
Scrape off concrete by chipping.
Apply mortar.
Mend the surface using mortar.
Applying a primer
Applying a primer
Yes
Unevenness
No
Mending the surface using putty
Next process
Fig. 4.2.7-2 Flow of Ground Treatment, Primer Application and Ground Mending 2)
- 170 -
Photo 4.2.7-1 Repairing Cracks
Photo 4.2.7-2 Smoothing The Surface

(Ground) with Epoxy Resin Putty
Photo 4.2.7-4 Chamfering Corners Using

a Sander with a Dust Collector
Photo 4.2.7-3 Smoothing The Surface

(Ground) with Resin Mortar
Photo 4.2.7-5 Chamfering Corners Using

a Trowel WITH A Rounded Face
- 171 -
Chip corners and round them using the cross section repair material and a towel with a
round face. Use the same materials as used to repair chipped parts.
Grind them with a concrete cutter or a disk sander (see Photo 4.2.7-4). Check to
confirm that corners are finished to the specified roundness value and are linearly in
alignment with the axial direction of members with a precision of 1/200 or less. If
the precision of rounded corners is not appropriate, a gap may result in the corner
section and reinforcement materials may become deformed.
If corners are rounded
using mortar (see Photo 4.2.7-5), a higher level of precision can be obtained. If they
are rounded by sand blasting or high-pressure water jetting, the rounded surface
becomes rough. Therefore, these two methods are not suitable for use with the
ground treatment which is discussed in this guideline.
(5) If existing finish materials are not removed
If the work is done without removing existing finish materials, follow instructions give in
Section 4.2.6.
(6) Cleaning
Dust that remains on the surface of a structure after scraping interferes with the adhesion
of a primer. Clean the surface by air blowing or a similar means to remove dust
completely.
4.2.8
Applying a primer
A primer must be applied by following the procedure below:

(1) Confirm that the surface is dry and sound and free of stains.
(2) Confirm that the temperature, humidity and weather conditions when the work is to
be executed meet specified requirements.
(3) Weigh and mix amounts of materials appropriate for the area to work on.
(4) Apply required amounts using a roller brush.
[Comment]
A primer is applied to improve adhesion of continuous fiber reinforcements to concrete.
- 172 -
(1) Checking the conditions of the surface

Before applying a primer, check the surface to confirm the following points:
The surface moisture content is below 8%. (Use a mortar moisture meter.)
Cement-type cross section repair and ground mending materials are past the useful life
and dry.
Weak parts are scraped off, cracks are filled with appropriate materials, mortar
swellings are filled with appropriate materials, oil and dust are removed, corners are
rounded and other works to be done prior to applying a primer are completed.
(2) Check the weather when the work is to be done
The weather during the period when the work is under way and during the curing period
after the work is completed must be estimated.
A primer can be applied under the following weather conditions:
Temperature must be in the specified temperature range shown below:
Epoxy resin primer:
5C or higher
Methacrylate resin primer:
-10C or higher
Some methacrylate resin primers must be used below a specified upper-limit

temperature, so check the application condition carefully. Also, ambient temperature
at the start of work must be measured and the compounding ratio of a hardening agent
must be determined accordingly.
Humidity must be below the level where condensation occurs (less than 85%).
If the work is done outdoors, there must be no rainfall during the curing period. The
time needed for an applied primer to become immune to rainfall varies, depending on
the type of material and product. The time shown below is generally accepted:
Epoxy resin primer:
about 12 hours (on the condition that temperature is

above 20C)
Methacrylate resin primer: 1 to 3 hours

If the epoxy resin primer is exposed to rain before it fully hardens, the coated film may
be discolored white and does not harden properly (amine blanching).
- 173 -
(3) Mixing materials

(a) Epoxy resin primer
An epoxy resin primer is a two-part mixture, namely, a base material and a hardening
agent. Primer products are usually made as sets with different mixing ratios. If
they are made in small amounts, the weight of each material must be weighed
accurately using a scale. In mixing materials to make the epoxy resin primer, use
only amounts that can be used up within the useful life of each material. Mix them
at a speed matching the speed of the work of applying a primer to prevent materials
from remaining unused or from being used past the useful life. If large amounts are
mixed in a large container at one time, the heat of reaction will accumulate and
temperature will rise very quickly, consequently the useful life will become short.
A container of less than 10-liter capacity should be used to mix materials. When
mixing materials, do not produce too many bubbles by stirring too much. Also, do
not adjust the viscosity by diluting the mixture with a thinner.
The speed epoxy resin primers harden in summer is different from that they harden
in winter and the useful time will also change, depending on in which season they are
mainly used. This should also be taken into consideration when mixing materials.
(b) Methacrylate resin primer
Methacrylate resin primers are classified into three types shown below.
be made using a specific mixing method.
(i)
Each must
Two-part primer which is made at a work site by mixing a promoter assistant

and a hardening agent
This primer is composed of the A and B primers. Mixing is done as follows:
Calculate amounts needed to complete mixing within 6 hours. Weigh the
primers A and B to prepare required amounts.
Add a specified amount of a promoter assistant (naphthenic acid cobalt
solution) to the primer A and stir this mixture thoroughly.
Add an amount of a hardening agent specified for working temperature to
the primer B and stir this mixture thoroughly.
Take the primers A and B in equal proportions which can be used up in 5 to
10 minutes and put them in a roller bucket. Lightly stir this mixture with a
stirring rod to mix both primers well. When weighing the primers A and B,
use ladles or measuring cups of the same size. Because the useful life of
- 174 -
the primers A and B is within 10 minutes, they must be mixed in small

amounts at a time and applied quickly, taking care not to use them past the
useful life.
(ii)
Two-part primer which has a promoter and a hardening agent already mixed
This primer is composed of the primers A and B. A promoter and a hardening
agent are already mixed. Mix the primers A and B in specified proportions, as
in the case of the epoxy resin primer. The mixing ratio is usually 1 to 1.
Because their useful life is within 30 minutes, mixing an amount of this primer
that cannot be used up within this time period must be avoided.
(iii) One part primer

Only one type of primer is used. Prepare amounts of a hardening agent and a
promoter that match the mixing ratio specified for working temperature and
mix them immediately before the start of work.
Because the useful life of this primer is within 20 minutes, a hardening agent
and a promoter should be weighed and mixed in small amount at a time.
(c) Construction of work
Apply a primer evenly using a roller brush (Photo 4.2.8-1). The surface (ground) is
usually uneven and the way it absorbs a primer
becomes nonuniform. After applying a primer,
check the conditions of the surface. If a good
primer film cannot be formed due to nonuniform
absorption, an additional primer must be applied.
A primer should usually be applied one to three
times. If a primer drops from a roller and
adheres to the lower portion of the surface, it
coagulates and causes the floating of sheets. To
avoid this, before applying a primer, press a roller
brush lightly against a net to remove an excess of
the impregnating primer. The following points
should be noted when applying a primer:
Before applying a primer, install various anchors
(for installing finish materials, sashes, equipment
and pipes or for seismic strengthening).
- 175 -
Photo 4.2.8-1
Applying a Primer
Use up all amounts of mixed materials. Do not use materials past the useful life.
Do not mix materials past the useful life with newly mixed materials. The useful
time is controlled in terms of time. The useful time of mixed materials that are
generating heat and have increased viscosity should be considered to have expired.
Stop using such materials.
Keep a container and a roller brush clean so that adhering debris or materials past the
useful life do not mix with newly mixed materials.
When applying a primer, wear protective masks, safety goggles and protective gloves
to prevent a primer from coming in direct contact with the skin or eyes. Also, due
attention should be paid to ventilation and sources of heat.
Remaining materials may generate heat if large amounts are left in a container.
Divide them into parts, put sand or earth into them to inhibit heat generation and
dispose of them as industrial waste.
After applying a primer, protect the surface from rainwater or dust. If condensation
is estimated to occur according to a weather forecast, it is necessary to keep the
surface warm.
In the case that an epoxy resin primer is applied, the surface is discolored white
(blanching) if moisture adheres to it before the primer hardens. In this case, contact
the primer manufacturer and obtain advice. The surface may have to be wiped with a
special thinner or polished by sand paper.
4.2.9
Ground mending
Unevenness, level differences, pinholes and other minor defects on the ground (surface) of a
structure must be mended using resin-type ground mending materials as follows:
(1) Check the conditions of the applied primer to confirm that it has been applied and
hardened properly.
(2) Verify that the temperature, humidity and weather conditions when the work is to be
executed meet specified requirements.
(3) Weigh and mix materials.
(4) Apply putty using a trowel or a putty spatula to finish the ground to a smooth
surface.
- 176 -
[Comment]
Pinholes on the surface of a structure cause continuous fiber reinforcements to swell.

Unevenness or level differences cause them to float or become displaced off a straight line.
They also cause the stress being applied to a structure to concentrate on continuous fiber
reinforcements. Therefore, the surface must be finished to a smooth, flat surface using the
resin-type ground mending material. The resin-type ground mending material is made
highly viscous to prevent the sagging of continuous fiber sheets and its adhesive strength is
naturally not very strong when it is used on concrete or mortar. Therefore, it must be used to
mend the surface after a primer is applied. (See Photo 4.2.9-1.)
Photo 4.2.9-1 Ground Mending
(1) Check the conditions of a primer to verify that it has been applied and hardened properly
Before mending the surface with the resin-type ground mending material, check the
following points:
Conditions of a hardened primer
Epoxy resin primer:
No finger print must remain on the surface if you touch

it with your hand (to be dry to the touch).
Methacrylate resin primer:
No scratches are made on the surface if you scratch it

with your nails (completely hardened condition).
The primer surface is not wet with rainwater or dew condensation.

There are no protrusions resulting from a puddle formed by drips of a primer.
A primer is coated evenly on the entire surface and no one part remains uncoated.
- 177 -
(2) Check the weather when the work is done

The work of mending the surface with the resin-type ground mending material can be
done under the same weather and temperature conditions as for the work of applying a
primer which is described in Section 4.2.8.
(3) Using the ground mending material
(a) Mixing and using the epoxy resin ground mending material
(i)
The epoxy resin ground mending material is a two-part liquid, namely, a base
material and a hardening agent. When mixing them, the same precautions as
described in Section 4.2.8 must be followed. Ground mending products are
usually made as sets with different mixing ratios. If they are made in small
amounts, the weight of each material must be weighed accurately using a scale.
The base material and hardening agent have different colors so that the
conditions of mixing can be visually identified. Stir and mix them until the
color becomes uniform. If you use a container, they tend to mix poorly at
corners. Make sure that they mix well uniformly throughout the inside of a
container. Mix amounts that can be used up within the useful life of materials.
Use caution not to leave them over or not to use them past the useful life.
As in the case of the epoxy resin primer, the epoxy resin ground mending
material suitable for use in winter or summer should be made by mixing
materials with different mixing ratios.
(ii)
Construction
Use a rubber trowel or spatula to mend unevenness or pinholes on the surface.
Although a standard amount of the ground mending material to be applied is
0.5 to 1.0 kg/m2, it varies, depending on the conditions of the surface. Finish
the surface to a smooth, flat surface, taking care not to leave trowel marks
which may result in the floating of sheets. If trowel marks remain on the
surface, scrape them off using a sheet of sand paper. The resin-type ground
mending material is used to mend small defects of several millimeters in size.
Before the work of mending using this mending material begins, large defects
must already be repaired using the cement-type ground treatment material, as
described in Section 4.2.7.
- 178 -
(b) Mixing and using the methacrylate resin ground mending material
(i)
Mixing materials
The methacrylate resin ground mending materials are classified into two types
shown below. Each must be mixed with a different mixing method.
1) Two-part ground mending material which is made at a work site by mixing
a promoter assistant and a hardening agent
This material is composed of the ground mending materials A and B which
should be mixed as follows:
Calculate amounts needed to complete mixing within 6 hours. Weigh
the ground mending materials A and B to prepare required amounts.
Add a specified amount of a promoter assistant (naphthenic acid cobalt
solution) to the ground mending material A and stir this mixture
thoroughly.
Add an amount of a hardening agent specified for working temperature
to the ground mending material B and stir this mixture thoroughly.
Material do not mix well at corners of a container. Due care should be
exercised, as in the case of the epoxy resin mending material.
Take the mixed ground mending materials A and B in equal proportions
on a plaster work plate or something similar and mix them until the
color becomes uniform. This A/B mixture must be used up in 5 to 10
minutes. When taking the ground mending materials A and B in equal
proportions on a plaster work plate, you do not need to weigh them
using a scale; you can simply take an appropriate amount at a rough
estimate.
2) Mixing the two-part ground mending material which has a promoter and a
hardening agent already mixed
This two-part ground mending material is composed of the ground
mending materials A and B. A promoter and a hardening agent are
already mixed. As in the case of the epoxy resin ground mending
material, A and B should be mixed in specified proportions. The mixing
ratio is usually 1 to 1. Because the useful life of this A/B mixture is
within 30 minutes, care should be taken not to mix amounts that cannot be
used up within the useful life. The ground mending material suitable for
- 179 -
use in winter, spring and autumn, or summer should be made by mixing

materials with different mixing ratios.
(ii)
Construction
Use the two-part mending material by following the same procedure as for the
epoxy resin ground mending material.
4.2.10
Marking
Based on the working drawing, markings must be drawn on the surface of a structure to show
positions where continuous fiber reinforcements are to be attached.
[Comment]
If continuous fiber reinforcements meander or are

displaced out of position, expected strengthening
effects cannot be obtained. Markings must be drawn
to indicate the start position where the first-layer
continuous fiber reinforcements are to be wrapped and
positions where subsequent layers of continuous fiber
reinforcements can be wrapped in straight alignment
with each other (a baseline drawn in the direction of the
fiber orientation).
Figure 4.2.10-1 shows an example of markings drawn
on a pillar.
Horizontal lines show the direction of fiber orientation
and the interval between horizontal lines shows the
width of a reinforcing material. If continuous fiber
reinforcements are attached horizontally to compensate
for construction errors, the interval between horizontal
lines is a value obtained by subtracting the overlap
width from the width of a reinforcing material.
Fig. 4.2.10-1 Marking

(vertical lines show the position where continuous
fiber reinforcements start and the position where
they wrap. The overlapping position must be
displaced by 90 degrees per layer)
A vertical line drawn for each layer shows the start

position where continuous fiber reinforcements are
wrapped in each layer and, at the same time, it indicates the start position where continuous
fiber reinforcements are overlapped in the direction of fiber orientation. Vertical lines must
be displaced by 90 degrees per layer to prevent overlapping positions from being located on
- 180 -
one side. If the overlapping positions are established not on one side but on all sides, a
higher level of structural safety can be achieved. Also, considering that protrusions may
occur where continuous fiber reinforcements warp each other (thickness doubled), resin
pooling, air bubbles and other work-related defects can be prevented by establishing
overlapping positions on all side.
Use a marking color that can be easily distinguished when impregnate adhesive resin is
applied.
At the stage of construction planning, the continuous fiber reinforcement layout drawing
(Figure 4.2.10-2) should be prepared to plan the wrapping work. A reinforcement material is
usually wrapped full circle around a structure and both ends of this material are overlapped on
each other. The length of a reinforcement material, therefore, is its length wound full circle
around a structure plus the length of the overlapped portion.
12th row
4th row
1st row
13th row
3rd row
11th row
2nd row
10th row
Wrapping start position (= position where

both ends overlap each other)
Llap or longer
Llap = 20 to 30 cm
1st row
2nd row
H: Height of slope
hs: Height of a reinforcement material in the first row
hl: Overlap width in a vertical direction
Llap: Length of the overlapped portion

Note: hs + hl = the width of a reinforcement material
Fig. 4.2.10-2 Example of the Continuous Fiber Reinforcement Layout Drawing

(If continuous fiber reinforcements are wrapped in two rows) 2)
- 181 -
4.2.11
Continuous fiber sheets are wrapped in accordance with the following procedure:
(1) Check the conditions of a primer or ground mending material to confirm that it has
hardened properly.
(2) Confirm that the temperature, humidity and weather conditions when the work is to
be executed meet specified requirements.
(3) Cut continuous fiber sheets.
(4) Weigh and mix amounts of materials appropriate for the area to work on.
(5) Apply an impregnate adhesive resin undercoating.
(6) Wrap continuous fiber sheets.
(7) Apply an impregnate adhesive resin overcoating.
(8) Release air.
[Comment]
The work of wrapping continuous fiber sheets is a series of works that start with material
preparation and ends with air release. Sufficient preparations must be made so that the work
will not be discontinued halfway. Job functions must be clearly defined to allow the work to
proceed efficiently; workers are assigned to the work of mixing and carrying materials, the
work of wrapping continuous fiber sheets and the work of checking the finish and controlling
the overall work flow.
Figure 4.2.11-1 shows the overall work procedure and Figure 4.2.11-2 shows the wrapping
work procedure.
- 182 -
Preparatory work (preparing the layout drawing, cutting sheets, checking to see if the surface is dry)
Mixing resin
Applying the resin undercoating*
If additional
resin is needed
Wrapping sheets, impregnating them with resin,
making sheets adhere to each other
Applying the resin overcoating, releasing air*
If the work of wrapping

continues from one row to the
next row without a pause, the
resin overcoating in one row is
sometimes overlaid on the
resin undercoating in the next
row.
Pasting sheets
No
Initial curing
Inspection, repair
Fig. 4.2.11-1 Continuous Fiber Sheet Wrapping Procedure 2)
- 183 -
Yes
Be sure to apply impregnate

adhesive resin to the
overlapped potion.
Position where wrapping of a

continuous fiber sheet starts
(check the position carefully)
Apply the impregnate adhesive

resin undercoating to the area
where a continuous fiber sheet is
to be wrapped.
that has already been
wrapped.
(1) Impregnate adhesive resin undercoating
Overlapping
in up and
down
directions
Wrap a continuous fiber sheet

while pulling on it lightly and
aligning it horizontally.
(2) Start position
Stroke a continuous fiber sheet

to remove creases, swellings
and air bubbles.
Direction in which a
continuous fiber sheet is
stroked (basic direction).
Wrap another continuous
fiber sheet by making it
adhere to the surface.
Make a continuous fiber sheet

adhere to the surface of a
structure, particularly to corners.
(3) Try to make a continuous fiber sheet
adhere to the surface of a structure.
(4) Wrapping another continuous

fiber sheet on the other face
Apply impregnate adhesive

resin to the overlapped portion.
Wrap one end on top of the

other and make both adhere
to each other firmly.
(6) Wrapping one end on top the other
(5) Undercoating at the overlapped portion
Fig. 4.2.11-2 Continuous Fiber Sheet Wrapping Procedure 2)
(1) Checking a primer or ground mending material to see if it has hardened properly
(a) Conditions of hardening and finish of an applied primer
Check the applied primer in the same way as described in Section 4.2.9. If it is an
epoxy resin primer, it must be dry by the touch. If it is a methacrylate resin primer,
it must be hardened completely. No dust or moisture must adhere to the applied
primer. Also, no primer pooling or protrusions must be found on the surface.
(b) Conditions of hardening and finish of a resin-type ground mending material
Check the applied resin-type ground mending material and confirm the following
points:
- 184 -
Conditions of hardening
The epoxy resin ground mending material must be dry by the touch.
The methacrylate resin ground mending material must be completely hardened.
The surface of the ground mending material must not be wet with rain or dew
condensation. No dust must adhere to it.
No protrusions caused by uneven application of the ground mending material are
allowed.
(2) Checking the temperature and weather conditions when the work is executed
The temperature and weather when the work of pasting continuous fiber sheets is done
must be the same as described in Section 4.2.8 Applying a primer. Impregnate
adhesive resin must be applied at the following recommended temperature:
Epoxy resin to be applied at 5C or higher
Methacrylate resin to be applied at -10C or higher (some methacrylate resin
products have upper-limit temperatures)
Humidity must be below the level where condensation occurs (less than 85%).
If a sudden change in weather is expected, preparations for curing must be made.
(3) Cutting continuous fiber sheets
Do the work of cutting continuous fiber sheets on a clean, flat place where sheets will not
be blown off by the wind or dust will not scatter. Place floor plates to set up a
workplace where continuous fiber sheets can be spread. Because carbon fiber sheets are
electrically conductive, particles of cut carbon fibers float around and may cause shorts to
electrical equipment. Therefore, cut them in a place where there is no electrical
equipment. The following precautions must be kept in mind when cutting continuous
fiber sheets:
Check the size and the quantity of sheets based on the layout drawing. The length of
each sheet should be the length of a sheet to be wound full circle around a structure
plus the overlapped portion, which is shown in Section 3.4.2 and Table 4.2.11-1.
Cut sheets with a cutter knife or scissors. Cut pre-preg type carbon fiber sheets with
a cutter knife or scissors.
Cut fabric-type carbon sheets with scissors.
aramid fiber sheets, use special ceramic scissors.
- 185 -
To cut
To prevent sheets from creasing, do not fold or wind them. Also, to prevent them
from being broken, be careful not to let them catch on protrusions.
When carrying them, take due care not to let fibers come apart, break them or twist
them.
Be careful that dust or moisture does not adhere to cut sheets.
Photo 4.2.11-1 Cutting Continuous Fiber Sheets
(4) Length of the overlapped portion of continuous fiber sheets

The length of the overlapped portion of continuous fiber sheets is slightly different
according to types of sheet, as described in Section 3.4.2 and shown in Table 4.2.11-1.
The overlapped portion should be set to an appropriate length so that a continuous fiber
sheet is not broken at the overlapped portion. According to experiments, a continuous
fiber sheet was not broken at the overlapped portion when the length was set to about 100
mm. Considering a good safety margin for actual construction, it was decided that the
length be 200 mm. Because 90t-class aramid fiber sheets have greater sheet strength,
the length of the overlapped portion must be more than 300 mm.
Table 4.2.11-1 Type of Sheet and The Length of Overlapped Portions
Type of sheet
Carbon fiber
Aramid fiber
Length of the overlapped portion (mm)
200 g in weight per unit length
More than 200
300 g in weight per unit length
More than 200
40t class
More than 200
60t class
More than 200
90t class
More than 300
- 186 -
(5) Wrapping continuous fiber sheets using the carbon fiber/epoxy resin method
(a) Mixing epoxy resin
Epoxy resin is the two-part resin which is available as a set of a base material and a
hardening agent, as in the case of a primer. It comes in two different types: one for
use in summer and the other for use in winter. Although the mixing ratio of a base
material and a hardening agent differs, depending on each product, the same mixing
ratio is used irrespective of temperature when the work is executed. Epoxy resin is
higher in viscosity that a primer and need to be stirred thoroughly and uniformly.
If it is stirred in a rectangular container, resin at corners may remain unmixed. Use
a round container. Mix amounts that can be used up within the useful life. The
same procedure as used to mix epoxy resin primers should be used when mixing
epoxy resin.
(b) Applying epoxy resin undercoating
Apply mixed epoxy resin evenly with a roller brush.
The amount to be applied is slightly different, depending on conditions of the surface.
First keep in mind the specification and then consider an amount required to have a
carbon fiber sheet impregnated plus an amount required to allow the undercoating to
adhere securely to the sheet despite minute projections and depression. The area to
work on at one time is defined as an area where carbon fiber sheets can be pasted
during the useful life of epoxy resin and resin impregnation is completed.
When applying epoxy resin, due care should be taken to prevent it from dropping to
the lower part of the surface and pooling there.
(c) Wrapping sheets
Start the work of applying sheets immediately after applying epoxy resin. The
sheet pasting procedure is as follows:
Fix one end of a sheet at a marked position.
Set the bottom edge of a sheet in an upper row in contact with the top edge of a
sheet in a lower row. Or overlap the edges of both sheets. If edges are set in
contact, the clearance between them resulting from work-related errors should be
5 mm or smaller.
- 187 -
While applying tensile force to a sheet, wrap the beginning edge full circle to the
end edge round a structure, taking care not to go out of a straight line or develop
creases.
If a pre-preg sheet with a backing paper is used, the backing paper must first be
removed.
Apply additional epoxy resin to the overlapped portion.
To prevent a sheet from floating, press the surface lightly with an air release roller
or a rubber spatula. Press in the direction of the fiber orientation. If a sheet is
pressed in the direction at right angles to the fiber orientation, it may be deformed.
Leave a sheet until the epoxy resin undercoating oozes and a sheet does not move
off position when touched lightly. The pre-preg type sheet should be left for
about 20 minutes and the fabric-type sheet should be left only for a very short
time.
(d) Applying epoxy resin overcoating
After confirming that the epoxy resin undercoating oozes, apply additional epoxy
resin with a roller brush.
A required amount of epoxy resin is different, depending on each product or the
weight per unit length of a sheet. Check the specification carefully before starting
the work. Apply epoxy resin in the direction parallel to the fiber orientation. Take
care not to disturb the lay of a sheet.
(e) Releasing air
To integrate the epoxy resin undercoating with the overcoating by releasing air inside
a sheet, press the surface a sheet lightly using an air release roller. As the reaction
of epoxy resin develops, the viscosity will increase and it will become difficult to
release air. This work, therefore, must be finished quickly. Roll an air release
roller in the direction parallel to the fiber orientation.
(f) Wrapping sheets in rows
When wrapping sheets in rows, repeat steps (a) through (e).
(g) Repairs
After the initial stage of hardening, check the conditions of work done and make
repairs, as necessary. (The initial stage of hardening can be checked by scratching
- 188 -
resin with fingernails. If no marks remain on the surface, the resin is past the initial
stage of hardening. It takes 12 to 24 hours for epoxy resin to reach this initial stage
of hardening.)
Figure 4.2.11-3 shows swelling, crease, air bubble, resin pooling and other
work-related defects.
Structure
Air gap of
approximately
3 cm in
diameter
Air gap
Resin
Continuous
fiber sheet
(1) Swelling, crease

Swelling:
Crease:
Air bubble:
Resin pooling:
(2) Air bubble
(3) Resin pooling
An air gap that has developed two-dimensionally. (If small, it is called blistering.)
An air gap that has developed one-dimensionally.
An air bubble that is approximately 3 cm or smaller in diameter and circular (oval) in shape.
The same size as an air gap but resin is filled in the air gap.
Fig. 4.2.11-3 Work-Related Defects Which may Occur on Wrapping of

Continuous Fiber Sheets 2)
(6) Wrapping sheets using the carbon fiber/methacrylate resin method

(a) Mixing methacrylate resin
Methacrylate resin comes in three different types, as in the case of a primer:
Two-part methacrylate resin which is made at a work site by mixing a promoter
assistant and a hardening agent. It is provided as a set of resin liquids A and B.
Tow-part methacrylate resin which has a promoter and a hardening agent already
mixed. It is provided as a set of resin liquids A and B.
One-part-methacrylate resin which is made at a work site by mixing a promoter
assistant and a hardening agent. Only one resin liquid is used.
Each resin should be mixed according the procedure shown below:
(i)
Two-part methacrylate resin which is made at a work site by mixing a

hardening agent
Calculate amounts that can be used within 6 hours and weigh required
amounts of resin liquids A and B.
- 189 -
Add specified amounts of a promoter assistant (naphthenic acid cobalt

solution) and a colorant (toner) to the resin liquid A. Stir this mixture
thoroughly. If temperature is lower than 5C, add additional amounts of a
promoter.
Add amounts of a hardening agent and a colorant appropriate for the
working temperature to the resin liquid B. Stir this mixture thoroughly.
Check the mixing ratio of a hardening agent by referring to the mixing ratio
table.
(ii)
Mixing the two-part methacrylate resin which has a hardening agent and a
promoter already mixed
A hardening agent and a promoter are already mixed as the resins A and B
respectively. As in the case of epoxy resin, A and B must be mixed in
specified proportions. They are usually mixed at the mixing ration of 1 to 1.
Although the time needed to harden is longer than when mixing a hardening
agent at a work site, the mixture of A and B must be applied quickly and used
up within the useful life.
(iii) Mixing the one-part methacrylate resin

Only one type of resin is used. This resin is mixed by adding amounts of a
hardening agent and a promoter appropriate for the working temperature.
Mix it by following the same procedure as for the one-part methacrylate resin
primer.
(b) Wrapping sheets
(i)
A/B/A method using the two-part methacrylate resin

Using this method, methacrylate resins A and B are applied to and mixed on a
sheet. The procedure of applying materials and releasing air is basically the
same as for epoxy resin. The process and process interval time, however, are
different. This work must be done consecutively from undercoating to air
release without a pause.
1) Applying the resin A undercoating
Apply the mixed resin A using a roller brush. The same precautions as
for epoxy resin here apply.
2) Wrapping sheets
After applying the resin undercoating, paste a sheet immediately.
Because the methacrylate resin used for this method is low in viscosity and
- 190 -
superior in sheet impregnation characteristics, there is no need to wait until

the epoxy undercoating oozes. The same precautions about wrapping as
for epoxy resin here apply. Apply additional methacrylate resin A to the
overlapped portion to allow a sheet to be securely retained in position.
3) Applying the resin B undercoating
After wrapping a sheet, apply the mixed resin B intercoating immediately.
The amount of this resin B to be applied is different, depending on the
weight per unit length of a sheet. Check the specification carefully
before starting the work.
4) Applying the resin A overcoating
After applying the resin B, apply the resin A immediately.
5) Releasing air
Press the surface of a sheet with an air release roller to release air bubbles.
(ii)
Wrapping sheets using the two-part methacrylate resin

Using this method, a mixture of methacrylate resins A and B mixed
immediately before the start of work is used. Because a mixture of A and B is
applied, the process is identical to that of the epoxy resin method. This resin
hardens rather slowly compared with the A/B/A mixing method but it hardens
faster than epoxy resin. Therefore, pay attention to the process interval time
and do the work with dexterity. This resin is available as resins for use in
summer, spring and autumn and winter. It is necessary to use the most
appropriate type in each season.
1) Applying the methacrylate resin undercoating
Apply mixed methacrylate resin using a roller brush. The same
precautions about applying resin as for epoxy resin should be observed.
2) Wrapping sheets
After applying the methacrylate resin, wrap a sheet immediately. The
same precautions about pasting as for the epoxy resin method should be
observed. Apply additional methacrylate resin to the overlapped portion
to retain a sheet in position. After wrapping a sheet, leave it for 5 to 10
minutes until the resin undercoating oozes and a sheet does not move when
touched lightly.
3) Applying the methacrylate resin overcoating
Apply the mixed methacrylate resin overcoating.
- 191 -
4) Releasing air
Press the surface of a sheet lightly with an air release roller to release air
bubbles.
(7) Pasting sheets using the aramid fiber/epoxy resin method
(a) Mixing epoxy resin
Mix epoxy resin by following the same procedure as for the carbon fiber/epoxy resin
method.
(b) Applying the epoxy resin undercoating
Although the same procedure as for the carbon fiber/epoxy resin method must be
followed, the required amount of the undercoating is different. Check the
specification carefully before starting the work.
(c) Wrapping sheets
The same precautions about wrapping as for carbon fiber sheets should be observed.
The aramid fiber wound to a roll of tape of 10 cm or smaller in width are also
available. This aramid fiber is used for pillar strengthening work in a way that it is
wound on a structure in a spiral. When using this type of aramid fiber, the
following precautions should be noted (Figure 4.2.11-4):
Pillars
axial
direction
Pitch of
winding
Direction of the axis of a roll

of tape
Direction at right angles to the pillars
axial direction
Portion where
the tape is not
wound
Depth of a pillar
Depth of a pillar
Fig. 4.2.11-4 Winding a Roll of Aramid Fiber Tape in a Spiral
- 192 -
An construction plan and procedure different from that for wrapping aramid fiber
sheets is used. Characteristics of tape-type aramid fiber reinforcements should
be used to advantage.
The angle that the axis of aramid fiber tape forms with the axial direction of a
pillar should be tan 1/15.
When winding aramid fiber tape in a spiral with a unwound space between tape
rows, this unwound space (open space) should be less than 10 cm. If it is more
than 10 cm, additional reinforcements should be made.
At the top of a pillar where winding starts and at the bottom where winding ends,
the tape should be wound twice around a pillar.
(8) Precautions about handling impregnate adhesive resin
In principle, the useful life should be measured in terms of time. If mixed materials
in a container are generating heat or if the viscosity is increasing, impregnating ability
is deteriorating. Do not use such impregnate adhesive resin.
Keep a container and a roller brush clean to prevent materials past the useful life from
mixing with newly mixed materials.
Wear protective masks, safety goggles and protective gloves to prevent impregnate
adhesive resin from sticking to the skin or entering the eyes.
If a large quantity of remaining materials are left in a container, they may generate
heat. Divide them into small parts, inhibit heat generation by putting sand or earth
and dispose of them as industrial waste.
- 193 -
(a) Using a rubber spatula
(b) Air release roller
Photo 4.2.11-2 Wrapping Sheets
(c) Wrapping sheets in rows
(9) Strengthening an area around buried structures or openings

If there are openings or buried structures such as wall sockets on the surface of concrete,
continuous fiber reinforcements should be attached clear of them. Stress concentrates
on an area around such buried structures or openings and cracks may occur there. To
reinforce this weak area, additional continuous fiber reinforcements should be attached.
As shown in Figure 4.2.11-5, horizontal, vertical or oblique reinforcements or a
combination thereof are attached. Specific reinforcement specifications should be
obtained from a designer.
For such a small-size buried structure as anchor bolts, the effect of missing
reinforcements in an area around it will be minimal and, therefore, additional
reinforcements are not attached in most cases.
Carbon fiber sheets are electrically conductive. When attaching them to an area around
buried structures, do not let them come into contact with iron parts or apply epoxy resin
to the interface or use other means for electrical insulation.
- 194 -
More than 200 mm
More than 200 mm
More than 200 mm
More than 200 mm
(a) Horizontal reinforcement
(b) Vertical reinforcement
More than
200 mm
(c) Oblique reinforcement
Fig. 4.2.11-5 Example of Reinforcements around Buried Structures

4.1.12
Curing
After continuous fiber sheets are wrapped, they must be subjected to a curing process to
obtain designed performance. The following points must be noted to allow them to cure
properly:
(1) If rainfall is expected when curing is not yet completed, vinyl sheets must be set up
to protect pasted continuous fiber sheets.
(2) If temperature falls below the specified working temperature, the working area must
be warmed up.
(3) Pasted continuous fiber sheets must be protected during the curing period,
specifically a fence or something similar must be installed to prevent scratching or
entry of third persons into the working area.
(4) If continuous fiber sheets were pasted using odorous materials, odor reduction
measures must be taken during the work and after the work is done.
- 195 -
[Comment]
(1) It takes 12 to 24 hours at 20C for epoxy resin to complete the initial hardening process.
(Check the extent of hardening by scratching the surface with your fingernails. If your
fingernail marks do not remain on the surface, the pasted continuous fiber sheets are
considered complete of the initial hardening process.) This time for initial hardening is
much longer than that for methacrylate resin (1 to 3 hours). If epoxy resin is exposed to
rainwater while in the process of hardening and if condensation occurs due to excessive
moisture, amine which is an hardening agent, reacts with moisture and amine blanching
occurs. If rainfall is expected when the work is still being done, stop the work
immediately and set up sheets to protect the pasted continuous fiber sheets from
rainwater.
(2) Although temperature falls, the performance of epoxy resin does not change but it only
takes a longer time to harden. If temperature falls below 5C, however, the hardening
reactions of epoxy resin can hardly develop, which may affect the progress of the work
process. Also, it is not desirable with respect to the process management that it is left to
stand in a half-hardened state for hours. In this case, the working area should be
warmed up to facilitate hardening.
Although methacrylate resin can be used at temperature high than -10C, some products
have upper-limit temperatures. Check respective specifications carefully.
(3) If a sharp-edged object hits wrapped continuous fiber sheets, they may be damaged.
Install a fence and post a sign calling attention to them.
(4) A solvent-type epoxy primer or methacrylate resin has an odor. If the odor may leak
outside and cause nuisance to third persons, enclose the working area with boards or
sheets, seal up openings with tape and use adequate ventilation to remove the odor.
Methacrylate resin materials are particularly odorous.
4.2.13
Finishing
After impregnate adhesive resin has completed the initial hardening process, mortar must be
applied, boards must be set up or paint must be coated, as required, for fire prevention,
surface protection or design.
- 196 -
[Comment]
It is demonstrated through outdoor exposure and accelerated exposure tests that continuous
fiber reinforcements are superior in durability and do not need protective finishes to provide
for deterioration with age. However, impregnate adhesive resin is not flameproof and the
surface may deteriorate or be blanched if exposed to ultraviolet rays and ozone, thus spoiling
the appearance of a reinforced structure. To protect the surface and the appearance, finish
materials are used, namely, mortar is applied, boards are attached or paint is coated on the
surface. In either case, the work must be done after ensuring that the reinforced structure is
not adversely affected and that such finish materials do not peel off and other relevant defects
do not occur.
If a dry method is used, a lightweight steel framework is set up, as in the case of other dry
methods (Photo 4.2.13-1). If welding is necessary, pasted continuous fiber sheets must be
protected to prevent them from being exposed to welding sparks. Mortar is sometimes
applied to continuous fiber sheets to protect them during the work of pasting and a finish
material is further applied to the mortar using a dry method. Or mortar can be applied using
a wet method without applying any other finish material.
Because impregnate adhesive resin is present on the surface of continuous fiber
reinforcements, a material for improving adhesion of mortar to continuous fiber
reinforcements must be bonded to continuous fiber reinforcements using adhesive material.
As adhesive material, use the impregnate adhesive resin or adhesive material of the same kind.
As a material for improving adhesion of motor to continuous fiber reinforcements, use silica
sand No. 3 (Photo 4.2.13-2) or steric woven cloth made of polypropylene (Photo 4.2.13-3).
When using silica sand, choose silica sand No. 3 or No. 4 and apply approximately 1.0 kg/m2.
Some steric woven cloths are attached to the surface of a structure to prevent tiles from falling.
Although they are a little expensive, they can absorb distortion of a structure and prevent
mortar from developing cracks. To paste the steric woven cloths, use resin that is mixed
with 4 to 7% of a thickener. The amount to be applied is 0.6 kg/m2 or larger.
There is also a method of using metal laths to prevent mortar from peeling off.
- 197 -
(a) Setting up a lightweight
(b) Wrapping boards
(c) Painting
steel framework
Photo 4.2.13-1 Setting up a Lightweight Steel Framework and Attaching Boards
Photo 4.2.13-2
Applying Silica Sand to Mortar
Photo 4.2.13-3
Attaching Steric Woven

Cloths (Base Net) to Mortar
- 198 -
4.3 Safety, health and quality management during construction

4.3.1
General rules
In executing the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber reinforcements, it is
required that in addition to ordinary work-related safety and health management and quality
management, management of unique materials and construction methods used for the work
method discussed in this guideline must be implemented to ensure the safety and quality of
reinforced structures.
[Comment]
Generally practiced works and works done using unique materials, such as continuous fibers
and impregnate adhesive resin, are included in the seismic retrofit work of building.
Therefore, consideration must be given to not only the safety, health and quality management
related to generally practiced works but also that related to works done using these special
materials.
4.3.2
Construction management system
In order to execute work safely and achieve a proper level of work quality, a system in which
a route of communication is established must be organized and operated efficiently by all
concerned workers.
[Comment]
In order to execute special, unique seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber
reinforcements and achieve a proper level of work quality, a system in which a route of
communication and a liaison conference are established must be organized by the work
administrator and concerned specialty contractors so that questions regarding the construction
of work can be discussed, directions and information can be broadcast smoothly and the
system can be operated efficiently.
If the work administrator has questions regarding the construction of work, he should consult
designers or managers and take appropriate measures.
Also, there are questions regarding the unique work methods related to continuous fiber
reinforcements, a concerned association that developed them should be consulted.
- 199 -
Workers
Work administrator
Designers, managers
<Liaison conference>
Specialty contractors
Work method association
Fig. 4.3.2-1 Construction Management System
4.3.3
Safety and health management
In executing the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber reinforcements,
characteristics of each material must be completely understood and proper working conditions
and surroundings must be established based on the Industrial Safety and Health Law and
Industrial Safety and Health Regulations to ensure the safety work.
[Comment]
Materials used for the earthquake-resistant building rehabilitation work include primers,
impregnate adhesive resin, continuous fiber sheets, finish materials and a wide variety of
other materials. In order to do the work safely, characteristics of each material must be
completely understood and the Industrial Safety and Health Law, Industrial Safety and
Health Regulations and other related laws must be observed to establish proper working
conditions and surroundings.
(1) Workers knowledge of safety
Workers must be well familiar with all warning signs and safety- and health-related items
described in catalogs and technical materials. It is necessary to provide training
regarding materials and work methods prior to the start of work.
(2) Preventing carbon fibers from causing electrical disturbance or a rash
(a) Preventing electrical disturbance
When carbon fibers are being cut, minute fiber remnants float in the air. When
carbon fibers are cut parallel to the fiber orientation (in a vertical direction), more
fiber remnants are produced. The portion to be cut should be temporarily pressed
- 200 -
using adhesive tape to keep fiber remnants to a minimum. Also, if continuous fiber
sheets bends at an acute angle, they are broken and cut fiber remnants scatter in the
air. Prevent them from bending by rewinding them on a paper pipe.
Because carbon fibers are electrically conductive, these fiber remnants floating in the
air may adhere to electric or electronic equipment and cause electrical disturbance.
Therefore, the work of cutting must be done only in a designated place.
If work is done outdoors, sheets may be blown off by strong wind and get entangled
with electric wires or overhead lines, resulting in an accident. Due care must be
exercised not to leave sheets behind.
Also, floating carbon fiber remnants can cause a short to electric tools. Perform a
periodic inspection on them and use ones of which no defects or abnormal conditions
are found.
(b) Preventing a rash
If floating fiber remnants adhere to the skin, itching occurs and it may develop to a
rash. Apply cream to hands, a face and other exposed parts to protect them. If
floating fiber remnants enter the eyes, immediately wash them and see a doctor if
necessary.
(3) Handling and storing resin materials
A leader must be appointed to lead workers to use organic solvents properly and safely.
(a) Storing organic solvents
Resin materials and organic solvents must be stored in a designated place. They
must show the storage marking specified in the Fire Services Act, a sign must be
posted as stipulated in the regulations for organic substances, article 24 and the
notice No. 123 issued by the Ministry of Labor), and the marking indicating the
category of an organic solvent must be shown as specified in the regulations for
organic substances, article 25. (Regulations for organic substances appear in the
rules on organic solvent poisoning prevention in the Industrial Safety and Health
Law.)
(b) Ventilation during work
When using an organic solvent, use adequate ventilation, particularly when working
in an enclosed space. Use forced ventilation, as necessary, including blowers and
- 201 -
ducts. Because members used to set up a scaffold or protective sheets can create an
enclosed space, extra caution must be used to prevent accidents from occurring due
to inhaling of gas from an organic solvent.
Because methacrylate resin contains methacrylate monomers (methacrylate methyl,
for example) and such odorous compounds as acrylic monomers, odor reduction
measures should be taken for not only the workplace but also the surroundings. An
almost odorless monomer with larger molecular weight (called oligomer) is
developed by adding methacrylic or acrylic acid to other compounds. A low-odor
methacrylate resin based on this oligomer is now under study.
(c) Preventing a rash
If a primer, impregnate adhesive resin or a finish material sticks to the skin, a rash
may occur. Wash it immediately using soap and water. If it enters the eyes, wash
it immediately using water and see a doctor to obtain instructions.
Epoxy resin is very irritative on the skin. Wear protective gloves when handling it
and be careful not to let it stick to the skin. Handling of epoxy resin is described in
detail in the notice No. 442 issued in June 5, 1976 by the Labour Standards
Inspection Office (prevention of health hazard caused by epoxy resin hardening
agents). Instructions in this notice must be observed.
(4) Handling of waste
Dispose of garbage or remaining materials, as shown below, in accordance with the laws
on waste disposal and cleaning:
Waste cans:
To be buried as industrial waste
Resin products:
To be incinerated if they are disposed of as liquids.

To be buried or incinerated if they are disposed of as solids.
Carbon fiber sheets: To be buried (It is hard to burn carbon fibers. If they are
burnt, they may scatter as floating fiber remnants from
incinerators and cause electrical disturbance in the vicinity.
They must not be incinerated.)
Carbon fiber sheets integrated with resin:
To be buried
Aramid fiber sheets:
To be incinerated
Armid fiber sheets integrated with resin:
To be buried or incinerated
If a local government has its regulations, they must be followed.
- 202 -
(5) Basic safety precautions

Maintain scaffold, areas under scaffolds and other areas in good condition.
Set up safe working floors and install fences and other protective facilities.
Wear safety belts and protective caps at all times.
Remove unnecessary materials from scaffolds and other high places. Maintain all
workplaces neat and tidy.
Smoking is prohibited during work and fire extinguishers must be placed in a
workplace.
Wear protective masks, safety goggles, protective gloves, safety belts and other safety
gear, depending on the type of work.
Post a sign prohibiting entry of outsiders to work areas, a material yard and a resin
storage place.
Establish an emergency communication system and clearly present it in the
construction plan. Have all workers become aware of the system and make effort to
reduce damage to the smallest possible level if an accident occurs. Clarify first aid
treatment and nearby hospitals.
4.3.4
Quality management
In executing the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber reinforcements,
quality management items must be defined for each work process and the quality must be
managed using the construction management system described in Section 4.3.2 to ensure a
specified level of work quality.
For each quality management item, assessment criteria, control methods and control periods
must be defined.
[Comment]
When executing the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber reinforcements,
quality control items must be defined for each work process and the quality must be managed
using the construction management system described in Section 4.3.2 to ensure a specified
level of work quality. By clarifying all job functions, the quality responsibility matrices
must be established. Table 4.3.4-1 shows quality management items and job functions.
- 203 -
For each quality management item, it is necessary to clarify when, who, on what standard and
how regarding quality management activities. Also, what action should be taken when a
problem occurs must be defined and all workers must have a thorough understanding of it.
Table 4.3.4-2 shows an example of the construction management. Also, an construction
management check sheet (refer to the appendix construction management items in Section
4.3) must be prepared to record results of quality management activities.
- 204 -
Table 4.3.4-1 Quality Management Items and Job Functions (Example)

Management category
Process
Construction plan
Order
Preparation
Shipment of
materials
Acceptance of
materials
Ground (surface)
treatment (including
the repair of cross
sections and the
injection for
mending cracks)
Primer application
Ground mending
Marking
Quality management items
Wrapping of
continuous fiber
sheets
Curing
Finishing
Inspection
Reporting
Work
administrator
Checking design literature

Selecting a contractor
Construction drawings (layout drawing,
temporary facility drawing, etc.)
Construction procedure
Checking and ordering required materials
Checking pathways and curing
Establishing space for working floors
Checking temporary electricity
Checking quality certificates
Acceptance standard
Receiving quality certificates
Checking the quality and quantity of materials
Check the cleanliness of the ground
Repairing cracks
Repairing deteriorated parts, exposed parts of
reinforcing bars, chipped parts, etc.
Checking repair and mending materials
Checking the roundness at corners
Checking the dryness of the ground
Checking the type and quality of primer
Checking the temperature when the work is
executed
Checking the amount of a primer to be applied
Checking the useful life
Weighing and mixing
Checking the surface smoothness
Checking the position where a sheet is pasted
Checking the dryness of a primer applied to the
ground
Checking the temperature when the work is
executed
Checking the amount to be applied
Checking the useful life
Checking the weight and proper mixing ratios of
Checking for uneven application
Checking the type and appearance of sheet
Checking the conditions of impregnation
Checking the number of rows of wrapped sheets
Checking the conditions of the overlapped
portion
Checking for air gaps, air bubbles, creases and
other defects
Checking the conditions of applied overcoating
Checking the conditions of overcoating
impregnation
Checking the conditions of hardening of
Selecting proper finish materials
Tensile strength test
Adhesive strength test
Report on the results of construction
: Giving approval, inspection with witness
: Management representative
- 205 -
Site
manager
Contractor
Material
manufacturer
: Person in charge of management
Table 4.3.4-2 Main Quality Management Items (Example)

Process
Main control items
Assessment criteria
Construction drawing
Verification by the
management
representative
When the
construction plan is
prepared
Correct.
Management
representative
Construction
procedure
Verification by the
management
representative
When the
construction plan is
prepared
Correct.
Management
representative
Constructi
on plan
Materials
receiving
Ground
treatment
Primer
applica-tio
n
Ground
mending
Wrapping
of
continu-ou
s fiber
sheets
Control method
Timing
Action to take
Person in charge
Manage-me
nt material
Checking the quality

and quantity
Design literature
Verification by
referring to mill
sheets
When materials are

received
Return.
Management
representative
Mill sheet,
shipping
advice
Repairing cracks
0.3 mm or larger
Visual inspection,
crack scale
After the surface of

a structure has been
exposed
Inject epoxy
resin.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Repairing deteriorated
parts, exposed parts of Defects that have bad
reinforcing bars,
effects on a structure
chipped parts and
other defects
Visual inspection,
inspection hammer
After the surface of

a structure has been
exposed
Fill polymer
cement mortar
or epoxy putty.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Check the roundness

at corners
10 mm or 20 mm or
larger in radius (*)
Visual inspection,
scale
After the ground has

Repair.
been treated
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Checking the dryness

of the ground
Moisture content on
the surface of concrete
to be 8% or lower
High-frequency
mortar moisture
meter
Before a primer is
applied
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Checking the
temperature when the
work is executed
5C or higher. To be
no dew condensation.
Warm, cure,
Thermometer, visual After the ground has dehumidify or
inspection
been mended
postpone
construction.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Checking the surface

smoothness
Depressions and
protrusions are not
allowed.
Visual inspection,
by the touch
Repair by
coating epoxy
putty.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Checking the
temperature when the
work is executed
5C or higher. To be
no dew condensation.
Thermometer, visual
Every day
inspection
Postpone
construction.
Warm, cure or
dehumidify.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Checking the amount

to be applied
A standard amount to
be used.
Empty can, visual

inspection
After a sheet has

been pasted
Apply resin
again.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Checking the number

of sheets to be
wrapped
Design literature
Visual inspection
After a sheet has

been pasted
Paste
additional
sheets.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
After a sheet has

been pasted
Paste
additional
sheets or cut
and repair the
defective
portion.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
After a sheet has

been pasted
Paste
additional
sheets or cut
and repair the
defective
portion.
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Management
representative
Control
check sheet
Checking the length

of the overlapped
portion
More than 20 cm
Visual inspection,
scale
Air gaps and other

Checking for air gaps, defects that may have
bad effects on a
air bubbles, creases,
structure are not
etc.
allowed.
Visual inspection,
by the touch
Tensile strength test
JIS K7073
Inspection
More that standard

values
Adhesive strength test
JIS K5400
(*): For aramid fibers, the radius must be 10 mm or larger.
- 206 -
Before impregnate
adhesive resin is
applied
Dehumidify.
Talk with the

work
administrator.
4.3.5
(1)
Inspection
Inspection items and inspection procedure
The following inspections must be performed during construction:

Inspection of materials at acceptance and during storage
Inspection of ground conditions
Inspection of pasted continuous fiber sheets
Tensile tests for continuous fiber reinforcements
Other inspections required for quality management
Details of each inspection, inspection methods and control criteria must be defined in the
construction plan.
Results of inspections must be reported to the work administrator and a client who ordered the
work.
[Comment]
In executing the seismic retrofit work of building using continuous fiber reinforcements, the
objective to make a structure earthquake resistant cannot be achieved if materials are used
singly. It can be achieved only if they are combined and made into a composite structure.
The quality management must be implemented in all processes from preparation to
completion shown in Section 4.2.3. This section describes basic inspection items. If
people concerned judge that inspections items other than these basic inspection items are
necessary, they should adopt them and control them in their quality management system.
The site manager must describe details of each inspection items, inspection methods and
control criteria in the construction plan and perform inspections according to what are
described in the construction plan.
Results of inspections, including actions taken to remedy defects or problems, must be
compiled into reports. Reports must be retained for about 10 years after the work is
completed. This aims to make all data available when doubts are raised about the work done
and to contribute to future technical improvements.
- 207 -
(2)
Inspections at receiving of materials and during storage
Materials must meet the quality requirements specified in this guideline, the objective of the
seismic retrofit work for a building and the construction conditions at a work site.
(a) Check the quality of materials based on documents submitted by material
manufacturers.
(b) If problems or imperfections are found in materials or submitted documents, such
materials must be returned to suppliers or must be inspected or tested.
(c) It must be verified that materials are stored in a place that satisfies the specified
storage conditions.
(d) At acceptance of materials, necessary information must be entered in the quantity
control ledger, including the quantity and where they are used.
[Comment]
Receive and inspect materials based on the quality standards described in Chapter 2 of this
guideline.
(a) When materials are delivered, check them to confirm that product names, quantities
and other information described on statements of delivery submitted by a supplier
match those on order sheets. Request a supplier to submit quality certificates, test
reports, instruction manuals and other documents, as required.
(b) If delivered materials do not conform to an order or specifications, return them
immediately and replace them with conforming materials. If problems or
imperfections are found in submitted documents, check to see if such documents can
be accepted or not. Perform tests or inspections, if needed.
(c) As described in Section 4.2.4, store materials in a well ventilated place where they
are not exposed to direct sunlight, heat or rain. Materials that are designated as
hazardous materials according to the Fire Services Act should be stored in a quantity
less than the specified quantity in a place where they are protected from heat or
flame.
Store continuous fiber sheets in a dry place where they are not exposed to direct
sunlight, heat or rain. After they are processed, they must be stored in such a
manner as to prevent them from bending and developing creases.
- 208 -
A container that contains resin materials should be securely sealed to prevent

moisture in the air from entering and causing a change in the quality.
(d) Control materials by recording a place where they are used and the quantity in the
daily report. This report provides data needed to find work-related defects resulting
from the use of a wrong amount of materials so that quick remedial action can be
taken. Also, after the work is completed, the total quantity used can be calculated
by referring to the accepted quantity and the remaining quantity.
(3)
Inspecting ground conditions
Ground conditions must be inspected with respect to the following points:

(a) Conditions before the ground treatment is done
(b) Conditions of a repaired structure
(c) Removal of foreign substances
(d) Surface smoothness
(e) Conditions of the finish at corners
(f) Surface dryness
Conditions of the ground treatment must be inspected with respect to each inspection item
based on the construction control check sheet. Verify that measured values are specified or
recommended values. If they are not, remedial actions must be taken to improve the
conditions. The construction control check sheet must be retained as an inspection result
report.
[Comment]
If ground conditions are not appropriate, continuous fiber reinforcements cannot be wrapped
properly and expected strengthening effects cannot be obtained. Check the ground
conditions and make repairs if defects are found.
Inspection items, inspection methods and assessment criteria used to inspect the ground
conditions are as follows:
(a) Conditions before the ground treatment is done
If cracks that may have bad effects on a structure, corroded reinforcing bars,
deteriorated concrete members, work-related defects, etc., are found, examine the
conditions closely and record them.
- 209 -
When doing the strengthening work without removing existing finish materials,
inspect to confirm that requirements shown in Sections 3.4.1 and 4.2.6 are met.
Record the result of this inspection.
(b) Conditions of a repaired structure
If cracks that may have bad effects on a structure, corroded reinforcing bars,
deteriorated concrete members or work-related defects are found, inspect to see if
they are repaired according to the instructions given in Section 4.2.7. Record the
result of this inspection.
(c) Removal of foreign substances
Imperfect adhesion of continuous fiber reinforcements is caused by weak or
weathered concrete layers, laitance, mud, dirt, oil and other foreign substances.
Check the ground to confirm that they are removed using a disk sander, sand blasting
or compressed air and the surface is finished to a clean, sound ground surface.
(d) Surface smoothness
If the ground surface is not smooth, continuous fiber reinforcements float and the
strengthening effects will deteriorate. The ground surface must be finished to a
smooth surface.
Check the surface to confirm that a level difference is 1 mm or smaller and there is
no depression of 5 mm or smaller over a distance of 1,000 mm at any part of the
surface.
(e) Conditions of the finish at corners
Corners must be rounded to a radius of 20 mm or larger to prevent strain from
concentrating on carbon fibers. For aramid fibers, they must be rounded to a radius
of 10 mm or larger.
Using the R ruler, check corners to verify that they are rounded properly (Photo
4.3.5-1).
If corners are not linearly in proper alignment with the axial direction of materials,
continuous fiber reinforcements cannot be wrapped properly. This linear alignment
tolerance must be 1/200 or less.
Using a ruler, check corners to verify that the linear alignment is acceptable.
- 210 -
Twists at corners in the axial direction should be discussed separately.

(f) Surface dryness
Before applying a primer, confirm that the ground surface is dry. Using a mortar
moisture meter, check the dryness to confirm that the surface moisture content is less
than 8%.
Photo 4.3.5-1 Inspecting The Conditions of Rounded Corners Using The R Ruler
(4)
Inspecting the conditions of wrapped continuous fiber sheets
When wrapping continuous fiber sheets, the layout shown in design literature or the
construction plan must be checked and the work of pasting must be controlled based on the
layout.
During the work of wrapping, the following points must be inspected:
(a) Positions where continuous fiber sheets are wrapped
(b) Conditions of wrapped continuous fiber sheets
(c) Length of the overlapped portion of each continuous fiber sheet
(d) Number of wrapped continuous fiber sheet
(e) Amount of applied impregnate adhesive resin
Above points must be inspected by referring to the construction control record to confirm that
the results of each inspection conform to specified or recommended values. If they do not
conform to specified or recommended values, remedial actions must be taken. Data entered
in the construction control check sheet must be compiled into the inspection result report.
This inspection result report must be retained.
- 211 -
[Comment]
Inspection items, inspection methods and assessment criteria concerning the conditions of
wrapped continuous fiber sheets are as follows:
(a) Inspecting the positions where continuous fiber sheets are pasted
Confirm that continuous fiber sheets are wrapped in positions shown below. If
there are continuous fiber sheets that are wrapped in wrong positions, the work of
pasting must be redone.
Continuous fiber sheets are wrapped in positions indicated by markings.
If continuous fiber sheets are wrapped in rows or layers, they are pasted in such a
way that the overlapped portion of one sheet is displaced from that of another
sheet. This applies to all pasted sheets, irrespective of whether they are wrapped
in rows or in layers.
(b) Inspecting the conditions of wrapped continuous fiber sheets
Inspect the conditions of wrapped continuous fiber sheets visually or by sounding
after wrapped sheets and overcoating have been cured.
Check them for floating, swelling, peeling, sagging, creases, deformation, resin
pooling or other defects. Also check them to see if they are properly impregnated
with resin and examine the adhesion of laminated sheets and the conditions of
hardening of impregnate adhesive resin. Also check to see if there is any blanched
impregnate adhesive resin.
Under the circumstances, quantitative assessment criteria to be used to assess
defective conditions are not yet established.
The site manager or work
administrator has to assess them at their discretion. When defects are found,
concerned people should discuss and take proper actions. For defects that are found
after impregnate adhesive resin has hardened, make repairs according the instructions
given below:
Floating, swelling, peeling (including peeling that occurs between laminated
sheets): Repair by injecting epoxy resin.
If epoxy resin cannot be injected, cut the defective part and paste new sheets on
already pasted non-defective sheets in a way that new sheets overlap other sheets
over a distance of more than 200 mm from each cut end.
- 212 -
Sagging, creases, deformations: First cut the defective part and paste new sheets
on already pasted non-defective sheets in a way that new sheets overlap other
sheets over a distance of more than 200 mm from each cut end.
Resin pooling: If there is no problem with the appearance of a structure, leave the
pooled resin as is. If it spoils the appearance, cut the defective part and paste
new sheets in a way that new sheets overlap other sheets over a distance of more
than 200 mm from each cut end.
Conditions of applied resin: If the amount of overcoating is insufficient, apply
additional resin.
(c) Inspecting the length of the overlapped portion
The overlapped portion of continuous sheets must have sufficient strength to bring
full tensile strength out of continuous fiber sheets. The length of the overlapped
portion must be more than 200 mm which should be established when the work of
overlapping is actually done. If the length is below 200 mm, the work of wrapping
must be redone or additional new sheets must be pasted in a way that new sheets
overlap other sheets over a distance of more than 200 mm.
For 90t-class aramid fibers, the length of the overlapped portion must be more than
300 mm.
(d) Inspecting the number of laminated continuous fiber sheets
In the case of the strengthening work method using continuous fiber sheets, the
number of sheets to be laminated is designed and determined based on the tensile
strength of continuous fiber sheets. Therefore, it is important to check to see if a
specified number of sheets are actually laminated and wrapped.
The number of laminated sheets can be checked as follows:
Checking the number of laminated sheets by referring to the daily work report (or
check sheet) which is prepared for each round of pasting work
Checking the number of laminated sheets by taking photos of each layer
Wrapping sheets by displacing them slightly from one another so that the number
can be visually checked after the work is done
Checking the number of laminated sheets by using impregnate adhesive resin of
different colors for each layer
- 213 -
If the number of laminated sheets is smaller than a specified number, the shortfall
must be pasted.
(e) Inspecting the amount of applied impregnate adhesive resin
If continuous fiber sheets are not well impregnated with impregnate adhesive resin,
the strength as a composite material cannot be put to full use. A sufficient amount
of impregnate adhesive resin must be applied and the finish must be flat and even.
The applied amount can be controlled based on the covered area and the applied
amount which are recorded in the daily work report (or the check sheet).
If defects are found during inspections described at (a) through (e) above, they must
be entered the construction control check sheet and proper remedial actions must be
taken.
(5)
Strength tests for continuous fiber reinforcements
The strength of continuous fiber reinforcements must be checked by conducting the following
tests. How often these tests should be conducted should be determined by concerned parties
through mutual consultations.
(a) Tensile strength test for continuous fiber reinforcements
This test is conducted in compliance with JIS K 7073 Tensile test method for carbon
fiber reinforced plastics.
(b) Adhesive strength test for continuous fiber reinforcements
This test is conducted in compliance with JIS A 6909 Finish coating materials for
construction.
[Comment]
(a) Tensile strength test for continuous fiber reinforcements

Tensile strength tests for continuous fiber reinforcements are conducted to verify the
strength performance of continuous fiber reinforcements as compound materials for
the quality management of continuous fiber reinforcements used in the seismic
retrofit work of building using continuous fiber reinforcements.
The tensile strength of continuous fiber reinforcements is verified by making a test
specimen shown below at a work site and conducting a tensile test after it is cured.
- 214 -
a)
Test method
To be in compliance with JIS K 7073 Testing the tensile strength of carbon
fiber reinforced plastics (I-type).
b)
Shape and size of the test specimen (see Figure 4.3.5-1)

Testing the carbon fiber reinforced plastics (CFRP)
Shape and size: 12.5 mm (width) more than 200 mm (length) (pre-preg
type), or a fiber bundle of approximately 12.5 mm in width more than 200
mm (length) (fabric type) (The length of the test section: More than 100
mm, the number of test specimens: 5 or more pieces)
Testing the aramid fiber reinforced plastics (AFRP)
Shape and size: 12.5 mm (width) more than 200 mm (length), or a fiber
bundle of approximately 12.5 mm in width more than 200 mm (length)
(The length of the test section: More than 100 mm and more than 40 times
as large as the thickness of a test specimen, the number of test specimens: 5
or more pieces)
More than 200 mm

Gauge length to be more than 100 mm
More than
35 mm
More than 50 mm
About 2 mm
Sheet thickness
FRP sheet
Glass fiber or aluminum tab
Fig. 4.3.5-1 Test Specimen of The Continuous Fiber Reinforcement to Be

Subjected to a Tensile Test 2) (unit: mm)
c)
Specified values of tensile strength and Youngs modulus of tensile strength

Tensile strength: All values obtained in the test must be more than the
specified value.
Youngs modulus in tension: An average test value must be within the range
of specified values.
- 215 -
(b) Adhesive strength test for continuous fiber reinforcements

To test the adhesive strength of continuous fiber reinforcements, make the following
test specimen at a work site before the start of work. Conduct the adhesive strength
test after the test specimen has been cured.
There are three methods for testing the adhesive strength of continuous fiber
reinforcements:
In an area of a building that requires strengthening work, one section is chosen as
a section for conducting the adhesive strength test.
In an area of a building that does not require strengthening work, one section is
chosen as a section for conducting the adhesive strength test.
The adhesive strength test is conducted on a continuous fiber sheet which is
prepared specifically for the test and affixed to a concrete plate. (This concrete
plate has the strength greater than the concrete strength of a building to be
reinforced).
This test, however, is used to test the strength needed to resist bending stress. To
test the strength needed to resist shearing stress, concerned parties should discuss
and determine through mutual consultations.
a)
Test method (see Figure 4.3.5-2)

To be in compliance with JIS A6909 Finish coating materials for
construction adhesive strength test. (In this test, an adhesive strength test jig
(adhesion area: 40 mm 40 mm) is set on the surface of a continuous fiber
reinforcement and a tensile tester is used to measure the tensile strength.)
Number of test specimens: 5 or more pieces
Concrete
Cut groove
Peeling
Adhesive agent
Attachment 40 mm 40 mm
Fig. 4.3.5-2 Adhesive Strength Test for Continuous Fiber Reinforcements 2)
- 216 -
b)
Number of laminated continuous fiber reinforcements

In principle, the number of laminated continuous fiber sheets must be equal to
that given in the on-site specification. However, designers and workers can
discuss and determine the number through mutual consultations.
c)
Evaluating adhesive strength

If continuous fiber reinforcements peel off together with the ground concrete
(cohesive failure), the adhesive strength is considered acceptable. If peeling
occurs at an interface surface between continuous fiber reinforcements and the
ground concrete or if it occurs inside continuous fiber reinforcements
themselves, the adhesive strength is considered unacceptable. Even if peeling
occurs at an interface surface, the continuous fiber reinforcements are
acceptable on the condition that the adhesive strength is equal to or greater than
the concrete tensile strength of a building to be reinforced (1.5 MPa or greater).
< References for Chapter 4>

1)
Common building improvement work specification, 1998 edition issued in 1998 by Building
Maintenance Center under the supervision of Building and Repairs Dept., secretariat office of the
Minister of Construction
2)
Common building improvement work management guideline, 1998 edition issued in 1999 by Building
Maintenance Center under the supervision of Building and Repairs Dept., secretariat office of the
Minister of Construction
- 217 -
[Appendix to Section 4.3] Quality management items
Inspections are to be performed in each work done at a work site at all stages from
preparation to product inspection based on the check sheet. Quality management items are
considered appropriate for a certain work site but inappropriate for another work site.
Therefore, this appendix describes only basic quality management items. The following is
an example of the construction control check sheet:
Continuous Fiber Sheet Construction Control Check Sheet (Example)
Date prepared;
Work description:
Checked
(1) Preparing tools
Checked
Inspector
* Result column Good - , bad - (actions to be taken must be considered)
Prepar-i
ng
tools
Checked
How to inspect
Are grinding tools prepared?
Concrete planes
Chipping chisels (flat chisels)
Disk sander
Visual inspection
Are dust and odor reduction tools prepared?
Air blowers (ventilation equipment)
Cleaners
Protective sheets
Helmets
Dust protective masks
Safety goggles
Visual inspection
Are measuring apparatuses prepared?
Scales (one scale for weighing up to 200 g, one scale for

weighing 10 or 20 kg)
Measure
Visual inspection
Are mixing tools prepared?
Mixing and blending containers
Motor-driven hand mixers

Are sheet cutters prepared?
Cutters
Scissors
Workbenches or work plates
Scales
Visual inspection
Are tools for pasting sheets prepared?
Air release rollers (aluminum groove cutting rollers)
Sheet pasting rollers (medium-height wool, 2 or more

pieces)
Rubber spatula, rubber gloves
Metal trowel, white chalk
Visual inspection
Are resin injection tools prepared?
Visual inspection
Are thermometers and hygrometers prepared?
Visual inspection
Are marking tools prepared?
Visual inspection
Are the plate for making test specimens for tensile and adhesive
strength tests prepared (flat aluminum plate, pavement board)?
Visual inspection
- 218 -
Result
Inspector
(2)
Receiving and storing materials

How to inspect
Are continuous fiber sheets stored in a dry place?
Visual inspection
Is the order sheet checked against the statement of

delivery?
Check up on
related
documents.
Are the material test record and mill sheet received?
Check documents
submitted by the
manufacturer.
Is the instruction manual for the material checked?
Check documents
submitted by the
manufacturer.
Receiving
and storing
materials Is the resin container sealed completely?
Is resin stored properly?
Direct sunlight
Moisture
High temperature
(3)
Result
Inspector
Result
Inspector
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Are cleaning solvents stored properly?

Entry of all heat sources strictly prohibited
Observance of specified quantities
Direct sunlight
Visual inspection
Are the useful lives of each material checked?
Visual inspection
Ground treatment
How to inspect
Are defects on the surface of a structure repaired

properly?
Cracks
Rust on reinforcing bars
Honeycombs
Chipped cross section
Other defects
Visual inspection
Is the surface smoothness of a structure satisfactory?

Arent there protrusions?
The smoothness must be 5 mm or less over a distance
Ground
of 1,000 mm.
treatment The tolerance of linear alignment in the axial
direction must be less than 1/200.
Are corners chamfered properly?
Corner to be rounded to a radius of 20 mm or larger
for CF and 10 mm or larger for AF.
Visual inspection
Scale
Scale
Is scraping done properly?
Visual inspection
Is the surface cleaned completely?
Visual inspection
Is the surface of a structure dried completely?

moisture content to be less than 8%)
(The
- 219 -
Moisture meter
(4)
Primer application
How to inspect
Are temperature and humidity when the work is executed

appropriate?
Is the mixing ratio of a base material and a hardening
agent appropriate?
Primer Check the manufacturers specification.
applica-ti Temperature
on
Useful life
Amount to be applied
Inspector
Result
Inspector
Result
Inspector
Thermometer
Hygrometer
Measuring
apparatuses
Documents
submitted by the
manufacturer
Visual inspection
Measuring
apparatuses
Is a primer applied evenly?

The amount to be 0.2 to 0.3 kg/m2.
(5)
Result
Ground mending (applying putty)

How to inspect
Is a primer cured by the touch?
By the touch

agent appropriate?
Check the manufacturers specification.
Applying Temperature
putty
Useful life
Measuring
apparatuses
Documents
submitted by the
manufacturer
After putty is applied, is the surface of a structure smooth? Visual inspection

Does the smoothness conform to the specified ground
Scale
treatment value?
(6)
Marking
Marking
How to inspect
Are marked lines clearly visible?
Visual inspection
Are wrapping start positions displaced 90 degrees in each

row?
Visual inspection
Is the width of each row appropriate?
Scale
- 220 -
(7)
Applying impregnate adhesive resin (when the epoxy resin method is used)
How to inspect
Are temperature and humidity when the work is executed

appropriate?
agent appropriate?
Applying
impregnate
adhesive
resin
Check the manufacturers specification.

Temperature
Useful life
Is impregnate adhesive resin applied evenly?
Undercoating to be more than 0.4 kg/m2
Overcoating to be more than 0.3 kg/m2
Is resin applied to the overlapped portion?
(8)
Result
Inspector
Result
Inspector
Thermometer
Hygrometer
Measuring
apparatuses
Documents
submitted by the
manufacturer
Visual inspection
Measuring
apparatuses

How to inspect
Are a manufacturer name and product number of the

continuous fiber sheet confirmed?
Manufacturer
Product name (product number)
Dont continuous fiber sheets have frayed or broken spots
or stains?
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Are continuous fiber sheets cut as specified in the layout

drawing?
Number of sheets
Length of each sheet
Local reinforcements
Scale
Isnt the surface to which impregnate adhesive resin was

applied cured by the touch?
Wrapping
continu-o Dont wrapped continuous fiber sheets have swellings,
us fiber bulges or other defects?
sheets
Was a roller used to release air?
Are continuous fiber sheets well impregnated with resin?

Do the length and position of the overlapped portion
conform to the drawing?
By the touch
By the touch
Visual inspection
By the touch
Scale
Are continuous fiber sheets wrapped properly?

Creases
Sagging
Blanching
Resin pooling
Visual inspection
Does the number of wrapped continuous fiber sheets

match that shown on the drawing?
Visual inspection
Are local reinforcements made according to the drawing?
Visual inspection
- 221 -
(9)
Finish materials (steric woven cloths, silica sand)

How to inspect
Is a thickener mixed with resin?

4- to 7-parts thickener to be mixed with 96- to 93-parts
resin.
Steric
woven
cloth
Inspector
Result
Inspector
Result
Inspector
Measuring
apparatuses
Is the useful life of resin confirmed?
Timer
Is resin applied liberally and evenly?

More than 0.6 kg/m2
Visual inspection
Measuring
apparatuses
Is the thickener-mixed resin napped with a roller?
Visual inspection
Are steric woven cloths pressed firmly?
Visual inspection
Is resin applied evenly?
Visual inspection
Is the number of silica sand appropriate?

Silica
sand
Result
Check up on the
order sheet
No. 3 or No. 4 silica sand

Is the amount of applied silica sand appropriate?
Approximately 1.0 kg/m2
Visual inspection
Measuring
apparatuses
(10) Curing
Curing
How to inspect
Is the section of a building where continuous fiber

reinforcements were pasted provided with protections
from the rain?
Visual inspection
Doesnt water, dust or sand adhere to the overcoating?
Visual inspection
Is the surface cured by the touch?
By the touch
Are measures taken to maintain the ambient temperature

in the specified temperature range (higher than 5C)?
Visual inspection
(11) Quality test

How to inspect
Were test specimens made at a work site?
Quality
test
Test specimens of continuous fiber reinforcements to

be subjected to tensile strength tests
Test specimens of continuous fiber reinforcements to
be subjected to adhesive strength tests
Visual inspection
Were test specimens sent to a testing laboratory?
Check up on
related
documents.
How were the results of the quality test?
Test reports
- 222 -

Seismic Retrofit Design and Construction Guidelines

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Seismic Retrofit Design and Construction Guidelines

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Seismic Retrofit Design and

Published by the Japan Building Disaster Prevention Association

Editorial Supervisors Message

reinforcement structure and construction method based on continuous fiber reinforced

Committee for Developing Seismic Retrofit Design and

Committee for Developing Seismic Retrofit Design and Construction

Secretariat: Yoshinori Takahashi

4.1.3 Carbon fiber/methacrylate resin work method .................................................... 145

Introduction Outline of Seismic Retrofit Method Using Continuous

[PAN-family high stiffness type]*

Aramid 1: One kind of amine components

] are excluded from these guidelines.

Carbon Fiber Sheet

Aramid Fiber Sheet

One-way textile (including tape)

Two-way reinforced sheet

Shape Classification of Continuous Fiber Sheets

One-way Textile and Two-way Textile

Lightweight and welding-free

Shortening of construction period: Preprocess-free and a few

Invariant section dimension and

Advantages of Continuous Fiber Reinforcement-based Seismic Retrofit Method

Smoothing of concrete surface by scouring and sanding

Cutting of continuous fiber sheets

Cure impregnate bond resins without the adherence of

Conduct finishing with mortars and paints after verifying

General Procedures for Continuous Fiber Reinforcement-based Seismic Retrofit

Surface Treatment with a Sander

Chamfering of Corner Edges

Cutting of Carbon Fibers

Rough coating with

Cutting of Aramid Fibers

Finish coating with

Resin impregnating and

Spraying of silica sands for

1.1 Scope and Terms

Generic name for very thin, continuous fibers with a diameter

Continuous Fiber Sheet:

These sheets use auxiliary materials to maintain their sheet

Those types of reinforcement formed by impregnating

Carbon fibers, imperfect graphitic microcrystal aggregates, are

Carbon Fiber or CF.

These fibers are synthetic fibers consisting of PAN-aromatic

These resins are used to impregnate continuous fiber sheets and

The mass of continuous fibers alone per unit area of continuous

The designed thickness represents a value calculated by

Cross Section Area of

The cross section area represents a value calculated by

The tensile strength represents a value produced by reducing

Designed Tensile Strength

The tensile strength of continuous fiber-reinforced materials

Stress-Strain Relationship for Continuous Fiber-reinforced Materials

<References for Section 1.2>

1.3 Basic Policy for Strengthening Design

Target Seismic Performance and Earthquake-resistance Index of Structures

(1) Seismic performance

(SRC buildings consisting of full steel members)

Shape index for post-reinforcement buildings

In addition, the Earthquake-resistance Diagnostics and Earthquake-resistance Guidelines

Index associated with the ultimate lateral strength of each floor

Earthquake-resistance performance was originally associated with overall basic structural

(a) Improvement of the Ductility Index Value (Increasing the F index)

(d) Improvement of the Aging Index Value (Increasing the T Index)

Properties of Continuous Fiber-reinforced Materials and Retrofit Plans